Project Gutenberg Australia
a treasure-trove of literature
treasure found hidden with no evidence of ownership

A Project Gutenberg of Australia eBook

Title:      The Big Change (1952)
            America Transforms Itself 1900-1950
Author:     Frederick Lewis Allen
eBook No.:  0500881.txt
Edition:    1
Language:   English
Character set encoding:     Latin-1(ISO-8859-1)--8 bit
Date first posted:          September 2005
Date most recently updated: September 2005

This eBook was produced by: Don Lainson

Project Gutenberg of Australia eBooks are created from printed editions
which are in the public domain in Australia, unless a copyright notice
is included. We do NOT keep any eBooks in compliance with a particular
paper edition.

Copyright laws are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the
copyright laws for your country before downloading or redistributing this

This eBook is made available at no cost and with almost no restrictions
whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
of the Project Gutenberg of Australia License which may be viewed online at

To contact Project Gutenberg of Australia go to

Title:      The Big Change (1952)
            America Transforms Itself 1900-1950
Author:     Frederick Lewis Allen




1.  A New Century Begins

2.  Grandeur, Limited

3.  The Other Side of the Tracks

4.  Capitalism Indeed

5.  Government on the Sidelines


6.  The Revolt of the American Conscience

7.  The Dynamic Logic of Mass Production

8.  The Automobile Revolution

9.  Indian Summer of the Old Order

10.  The Great Depression

11.  The Reluctant World Power

12.  Ole Ark A'Moverin'

13.  Faster, Faster

14.  More Americans, Living Longer


15.  The All-American Standard

16.  Corporations, New Style

17.  The Spirit of the Times

18.  What Have We Got Here?

APPENDIX: Sources and Obligations

Introductory Note

This book is an attempt to sketch some of the major changes which
took place in the United States during the first half of the
twentieth century.

Anybody who chooses such a subject has an immense canvas before
him, on which any number of pictures may be painted.  He may
concentrate, after the manner of the old-fashioned history
textbooks, upon American politics from McKinley to Truman.  He may
illuminate the contrast between the American position in foreign
affairs in 1900 and our uncomfortably massive role half a century
later.  He may focus on American art, music, literature, or
culture, or all of them together; or on the almost incredible
advance in medicine and public health; or on the progress of
science and technology.  He may concentrate upon the waning of
puritanism, the loosening of family ties, the reduced authority of
parents, the increasing divorce rate, the economic and social and
political emancipation of women.  He may deal primarily with the
changes in American thought about the nature of man and of God, the
long decline in the prestige of organized religion, the mood of
apprehension in which wars and rumors of wars have caused us to
live, and the anxious search for spiritual security in a world full
of desperate uncertainties.

Or else he may fix his chief attention upon the changes which have
taken place in the character and quality of American life by reason
of what might be called the democratization of our economic system,
or the adjustment of capitalism to democratic ends; the way in
which an incredible expansion of industrial and business activity,
combined with a varied series of political, social and economic
forces, has altered the American standard of living and with it the
average American's way of thinking and his status as a citizen.

I choose this latter theme for the central one of this book because
it seems to me to be of central importance.  This, after all, is
THE American story of the first half of the twentieth century.  And
I choose it for another reason: that I do not believe that the
changes which I shall try to describe are as yet very widely

That they are not understood abroad is demonstrated again and
again.  When Vishinsky or Gromyko or Malik berates the United
States, talking, for instance, about "lackeys of Wall Street," what
he is doing is berating, exaggeratedly, the United States of 1900
rather than of today.  If what he says makes an impression among
many non-Communists in Europe, this is at least partly because a
very large number of Europeans have been brought up on concepts of
the United States long since outdated; and also because they and
other Europeans, aware of the importance of business and of
businessmen in the American scene, imagine that these, today,
closely resemble their counterparts of a generation or two ago, and
also behave like the business and businessmen of Europe.  The
mental picture of the United States that the average European
carries about with him is lamentably irrelevant to the real United
States of today.

Not only that: the changes that have taken place in the American
business system and American life are not fully grasped even by
most of us here at home.  Our own concepts tend to date sharply,
particularly when we get into arguments.  The chairman of the board
of a great corporation decides to say a few words on behalf of
"free enterprise" and against "socialism," and one is suddenly
aware that the image of "free enterprise" in his mind looks more
like an old-time country store than like the vast, co-ordinated,
decentralized institution which he actually manages; and that the
"socialism" which he excoriates is a textbook socialism quite
different in direction and meaning from anything that has found a
significant place in the American scene.  The labor leader, in
order to encourage the van and to harass the foe from the rear,
decides to denounce management and the stockholders for their "lust
for profits" and to arouse the "embattled workers," and he too
pulls out of a drawer a well-worn stencil, cut perhaps about the
year 1920.  And all of us, when we hear a phrase such as "the
American way of life," are likely to see in our minds' eyes some
pleasant aspect of the America we grew up in as boys and girls; and
the older we are, the more anachronistic this mental picture is.
It may be useful, therefore, to try to chart some of the changes
that have taken place since those images were formed.

The story that I propose to tell has deep shadows in it.  Some of
those shadows are dark today.  It is emphatically not a story of
paradise gained.  There is no certainty that we have yet learned
how to avert economic catastrophe, to say nothing of military
catastrophe.  Yet in the main it is, I think, a heartening story.
In these anxious times we can at least take satisfaction in
recalling that the good old days for which some have always yearned
were not so good; that we live, despite the wails of the
pessimists, in an age of progress; and that it is also--despite the
stormy international skies--an age of promise.

F. L. A.

February 24, 1952


Chapter 1

A New Century Begins

On the morning of January 1, 1900, there was skating for New
Yorkers in Van Cortlandt Park, and presently it began to snow.  But
the sharp cold had not chilled the enthusiasm of the crowds who,
the night before, had assembled in Lower Broadway to celebrate
either the beginning of the twentieth century or the beginning of
the last year of the nineteenth: there was some disagreement as to
the proper interpretation of the event, but none as to the size and
liveliness of the gathering.  The cable cars were jammed with
people, Broadway in front of Trinity Church was well-nigh
impassable, the crowds were dense in Wall Street as far down as the
Subtreasury steps, and there was a great din of tin horns,
punctuated from time to time by firecrackers.  It had been a good
year, and another one was coming.

In its leading editorial of January 1, the New York Times sounded
an optimistic keynote.  "The year 1899 was a year of wonders, a
veritable annus mirabilis, in business and production. . . ." it
proclaimed.  "It would be easy to speak of the twelve months just
passed as the banner year were we not already confident that the
distinction of highest records must presently pass to the year
1900. . . .  The outlook on the threshold of the new year is
extremely bright."

Uptown, in the mahogany-paneled library of his big brownstone house
at the corner of Madison Avenue and Thirty-sixth Street, John
Pierpont Morgan, head of the mightiest banking house in the world
and the most powerful man in all American business, sat playing
solitaire as the old year drew to an end.  During the next twelve
months Morgan would buy paintings and rare books and manuscripts in
immense profusion on a European trip; would have a temporary
ballroom built beside his house to accommodate twenty-four hundred
guests at his daughter's wedding, and would begin negotiations with
Andrew Carnegie--the twinkling little steelmaster whose personal
income in 1900 would be over twenty-three million dollars, with no
income tax to pay--for the formation of the United States Steel
Corporation, the biggest corporation that the world had ever seen.
Morgan could not foresee all this now as he ranged the cards before
him, but he was content.  In the words of his future son-in-law and
affectionate biographer, describing that very evening of December
31, 1899,

Mr. Morgan's house was just where he wanted it to be and it suited
his mode of life.  Mrs. Morgan was well and they had their
unmarried daughters, Louisa and Anne, living at home.  His married
children and grandchildren were all well and happy, and he himself
was in good health.  His friends were near by.  The people in his
social world were of his own kind, and the bankers and business men
with whom he came into contact had, for the most part, the same
standard of ethics and point of view that he himself had.  New York
was still a friendly, neighborly city and was a pleasant place in
which to live. . . .  At midnight, when the bells and horns
proclaimed the beginning of the New Year, he was looking forward
with the eagerness of a much younger man to the great possibilities
of the century that was about to begin.

There were, to be sure, hundreds of thousands of New Yorkers for
whom the city was hardly "a pleasant place in which to live."  On
the Lower East Side there were poverty, filth, wretchedness on a
scale which to us today would seem incredible.  And in many other
cities and industrial towns of America the immigrant families were
living under comparable conditions, or worse; for at a time when
the average wage earner in the United States got hardly five
hundred dollars in a year--roughly the equivalent of fifteen
hundred at present prices--most of the newcomers to the country
scrabbled for far less.  Let Van Wyck Brooks summarize what Upton
Sinclair incontrovertibly disclosed a few years later about the
state of the Poles and Lithuanians and Slovaks in the Chicago
stockyard area:

Ignorant and stunted by European tyranny only to be utterly
destroyed by American indifference, they were swindled by house-
agents, political bosses . . . and judges who refused to recognize
their rights.  No one either knew or cared when their babies were
drowned in the stinking green water that lay about their wretched
shacks, when their daughters were forced into prostitution, when
their sons fell into boiling vats because the employers had
provided no safety devices.

"No one either knew or cared"--why not?  Because it was a time of
complacency.  Since the end of the depression of the mid-nineties
the voices of protest at the disparities of fortune in the United
States had weakened.  Populism was dead; the free-silver agitation
had petered out; the once angry farmers of the Plains States were
making out so well that in 1899 a traveler commented that "every
barn in Kansas and Nebraska has had a new coat of paint."  Not yet
had the oncoming group of journalists whom Theodore Roosevelt, in a
burst of irritation, labeled "muckrakers" begun to publish their
remorseless studies of the seamy sides of American life.  American
fiction, like American journalism, was going through what old
Ambrose Bierce called a "weak and fluffy period"; Dreiser's Sister
Carrie, published in 1900, went almost unnoticed and then was
withdrawn from circulation as too sordid or pornographic.  The best
journals and the best people concerned themselves very little with
the fortunes of the average man, and very much with the fortunes of
ladies and gentlemen, with the pomp and circumstance of Society,
and with the furthering of a polite and very proper culture for the
elect.  If in the language of Morgan's biographer, as he described
the great banker's contentment, there was discernible a faint tone
of smugness, this was characteristic of the general attitude of the
well born and well endowed as they contemplated the bright future.

Morgan looked confidently forward to an era of stability and common
sense, in which political leaders like Mark Hanna would see that no
foolish equalitarian ideas got anywhere in government, and in which
the regulation of American business would be undertaken, not by
politicians, but by bankers like himself, honorable men of wealth
and judgment such as he liked to see in his favorite clubs.

Out in Terre Haute, in an upstairs bedroom of a high-ceilinged,
eight-room house, a tall, gaunt, bald-headed Hoosier looked out
over the railroad tracks and dreamed a quite different dream of the
future.  Eugene V. Debs was a one-time locomotive fireman.  He had
led the Pullman strike of 1894, had served a term in prison, had
consumed Marxist literature in his cell, and had become an ardent
Socialist.  His exalted hopes were to take shape in the 1900
platform of the Social Democratic party, as whose candidate Debs
would poll a meager 96,000 votes.  But this was to be merely a
beginning; had Debs but known it then, he was destined to have
nearly a million followers by 1912.  A friendly and merciful man
with an insecure grasp of logic, Debs was hotly aware of the
desperate plight of the immigrant workers, and he was sure he knew
the one and only answer to their miseries.  His platform called for
public ownership of railroads, telegraphs, public utilities, and
mines, and--somewhat more distantly--public ownership of the means
of production and distribution generally.  Nothing but this,
thought Debs, would end the industrial horrors and inequities of
the day.

Both Morgan and Debs would have been bewildered had they been able
to foresee what the next half century would bring to the nation:
how a combination of varied and often warring forces would produce
an America which would not only be utterly unlike the America of
1900, but also would be utterly unlike the picture in either man's
mind; yet an America in which an astonishing productive capacity
would be combined with the widest distribution of prosperity ever
witnessed in the world.

To understand the extent and nature of the big change that was to
take place, we must first go back to 1900 and look about us--at the
scene, the conditions of life, the people.

First, the scene.


If a neatly adjusted time machine could take you back to the Main
Street of an American town in 1900, to look about you with your
present-day eyes, your first exclamation would probably be, "But
look at all those horses!"

For in that year 1900 there were registered in the whole United
States only 13,824 automobiles (as compared with over 44 million in
1950).  And they were really few and far between except in the
larger cities and the well-to-do resorts.  For in 1900 everybody
thought of automobiles as playthings of the rich--and not merely of
the rich, but of the somewhat adventurous and sporting rich: people
who enjoyed taking their chances with an unpredictable machine that
might at any moment wreck them.  There were almost no paved
highways outside the cities, and of course there were no roadside
garages or filling stations; every automobilist must be his own
desperate mechanic.  Probably half the men and women of America had
never seen a car.  When William Allen White organized a street fair
in Emporia, Kansas, in 1899, the automobile which was brought there
for the occasion--and proved to be the most exciting exhibit of the
fair--came from Chicago by rail; it was the first automobile ever
to have crossed the Missouri River.

But horses were everywhere, pulling surreys, democrats, buggies,
cabs, delivery wagons of every sort on Main Street, and pulling
harvesters on the tractorless farms out in the countryside.

The sights and sounds and sensations of horse-and-carriage life
were part of the universal American experience: the clop-clop of
horses' hoofs; the stiff jolting of an iron-tired carriage on a
stony road; the grinding noise of the brake being applied to ease
the horse on a downhill stretch; the necessity of holding one's
breath when the horse sneezed; the sight of sand, carried up on the
tires and wooden spokes of a carriage wheel, spilling off in little
cascades as the wheel revolved; the look of a country road
overgrown by grass, with three tracks in it instead of two, the
middle one made by horses' hoofs; the special male ordeal of
getting out of the carriage and walking up the steeper hills to
lighten the load; and the more severe ordeal, for the unpracticed,
of harnessing a horse which could recognize inexperience at one
scornful glance.  During a Northern winter the jingle of sleigh
bells was everywhere.  On summer evenings, along the tree-lined
streets of innumerable American towns, families sitting on their
front porches would watch the fine carriages of the town as they
drove past for a proud evening's jaunt, and the cognoscenti would
wait eagerly for a glimpse of the banker's trotting pair or the
sporting lawyer's 2:40 pacer.  And one of the magnificent sights of
urban life was that of a fire engine, pulled by three galloping
horses, careening down a city street with its bell clanging.

It is hard for us today to realize how very widely communities were
separated from one another when they depended for transportation
wholly on the railroad and the horse and wagon--and when telephones
were still scarce, and radios non-existent.  A town which was not
situated on a railroad was really remote.  A farmer who lived five
miles outside the county seat made something of an event of
hitching up and taking the family to town for a Saturday
afternoon's shopping.  (His grandchildren make the run in a casual
ten minutes, and think nothing of it.)  A trip to see friends ten
miles away was likely to be an all-day expedition, for the horse
had to be given a chance to rest and be fed.  No wonder that each
region, each town, each farm was far more dependent upon its own
resources--its own produce, social contacts, amusements--than in
later years.  For in terms of travel and communication the United
States was a very big country indeed.

No wonder, furthermore, that the majority of Americans were less
likely than their descendants to be dogged by that frightening
sense of insecurity which comes from being jostled by forces--
economic, political, international--beyond one's personal ken.
Their horizons were close to them.  They lived among familiar
people and familiar things--individuals and families and fellow
townsmen much of their own sort, with ideas intelligible to them.
A man's success or failure seemed more likely than in later years
to depend upon forces and events within his own range of vision.
Less often than his sons and grandsons did he feel that his
fortune, indeed his life, might hang upon some decision made in
Washington or Berlin or Moscow, for reasons utterly strange to his
experience.  The world at which he looked over the dashboard of the
family carriage might not be friendly, but at least most of it
looked understandable.


Your second exclamation, if you found yourself on a Main Street
sidewalk of 1900, would probably be, "But those SKIRTS!"

For every grown woman in town would be wearing a dress that
virtually swept the street; that would in fact actually sweep it
from time to time, battering and begriming the hem, if its owner
had not learned to hold it clear.  From the high collar of her
shirtwaist to the ground, the woman of 1900 was amply enveloped in
material.  (There were, to be sure, arbitrary limits to this
envelopment.  The evening dress of a woman of fashion might be as
dcollet as that of the television star of the nineteen-fifties.
But it also had a train, which she must hold up as best she could
when dancing.)  Even for country wear, in fact even for golf or
tennis, the skirt must reach within two or three inches of the
ground, and a hat--usually a hard sailor hat--must almost
imperatively be worn.  Pull out today a photograph album of the
year 1900 and your first impression will be that even at the
seashore or in the mountains all the women are wearing city

At any season a woman was swathed in layer upon layer of
underpinnings--chemise, drawers, corset, corset cover, and one or
more petticoats.  The corset of those days was a formidable
personal prison which did its strenuous best, with the aid of
whalebones, to distort the female form into an hour-glass shape.
Dresses almost invariably came in two pieces, and the discipline
begun by the corset was reinforced by the bodice part of the dress,
which was stiffened to complete the hour-glass effect.  The bosom
was compressed as nearly as possible into a single structure, and
the correct posture called for a rearward-sloping "straight-front"
effect from this eminence downward; the fashion-plate artists
represented the well-dressed woman as almost falling forward--
despite the counterbalancing effect of an unsubdued posterior--in
the effort to achieve the perfect stance.

As for the men, their clothes, too, were formal and severe by
today's standards.  Collars were high and stiff.  The man of
affairs was likely to wear, even under his everyday sack suit (of
three-button coat, obligatory waistcoat, and narrowish trousers), a
shirt with hard detachable cuffs and perhaps a stiff bosom too.  If
he were a banker or a businessman of executive stature he probably
wore a frock coat to the office, and a silk hat instead of the less
formal derby--except between May 15 and September 15, when custom
decreed a hard straw hat (or, for the affluent, possibly a Panama).
To go hatless, except in the wide open spaces, was for the well-
dressed male unthinkable.  If the weather were intolerably hot, he
might remove his coat, and in certain informal offices--newspaper
city rooms, for instance--he customarily did so.  But his waistcoat
MUST NOT COME OFF (a rule which, considering the sort of shirt he
was wearing, was not without aesthetic merit).  The term "shirt
sleeves" remains in our language as a survival of that custom.

In the country he might wear a blue serge coat with white flannel
(or, more economically, white duck) trousers, or, under the proper
circumstances, a tweed coat with riding trousers or knickerbockers.
But when a man returned to the city, or a farmer put on town
clothes for a visit to the county seat, he must invariably get into
the severe three-piece suit, with starched collar and cuffs--even
under a July sun.

These implacable costumes, male and female, reflected the
prevailing credo as to the relations between the sexes.  The ideal
woman was the sheltered lady, swathed not only in silk and muslin
but in innocence and propriety, and the ideal man, whether a pillar
of rectitude or a gay dog, virtuously protected the person and
reputation of such tender creatures as were entrusted to his care.
If unmarried, a girl must be accompanied by a chaperone whenever
she ventured out to an evening's entertainment in the city.  If she
were a daughter of the rich, a maid might take the place of the
chaperone; it was never quite clear, under these circumstances, who
was supposed to protect the maid's virtue.  Eleanor Roosevelt has
recorded in her autobiography her relief when, at the age of twenty
or so, she found that her friend Bob Ferguson was considered close
enough to the family to be permitted to escort her home from
evening parties at the studio of Bay Emmett the painter.
"Otherwise I always had to have a maid wait for me--that was one of
the rules my grandmother had laid down."  And James W. Gerard has
added his testimony as to the iron code which still governed New
York Society in that period.  "Even when I was thirty years old,"
wrote Gerard in his old age, "if I had asked a girl to dine with me
alone, I would have been kicked down her front steps.  If I had
offered her a cocktail, I would have been tossed out of Society for
my boorish effrontery."  Needless to add that a woman must never be
seen in a bar--or even a smoking car.

The chaperone was, to be sure, chiefly an urban institution.  In
the smaller places, especially west of the Alleghenies, and among
city people vacationing in the country, the rules were greatly
relaxed.  As Henry Seidel Canby has said, there was developing

a free association of boys and girls in their teens and early
twenties that perhaps never has existed on the same plane elsewhere
in the history of the modern world.  We had confidence in each
other, and we were confided in.  All through the Adirondack woods
we climbed together in summer, sleeping in cabins, girls on one
side, boys on the other, following by couples all day lonely and
difficult trails, and in the winter skated far-off ponds, or sat
all night in the spring on moonlit Delaware hills, falling in and
out of love with never a crude pang of sex, though in a continual
amorous excitement which was sublimated from the grosser elements
of love.

But throughout these companionships one might almost say that an
imaginary chaperone was always present.  What was operating was in
effect an honor system: these boys and girls knew they were
expected to behave with perfect propriety toward one another, and
only rarely did they fail to do so.  As Mr. Canby adds, "The boys
sought elsewhere for what they did not get in friendship and the
respectful amorousness of equals.  They raided the amusement parks
or the evening streets in search of girls that could be frankly
pursued for their physical charms.  "Chippies' was the cant
name. . . ."  But the boys preferred to think of "nice" girls of
their own class in other terms, and under the code which they
followed a kiss was virtually tantamount to a proposal of marriage.

The idea of the sheltered lady was of course difficult to maintain
in a country in which 20.4 per cent of the female population were
engaged in working for a living.  This unhappy fact of life caused
the moralists of the day deep concern.  If there was a steadily
increasing number of women working in offices, it was understood
that they were victims of unfortunate financial circumstance; their
fathers, poor fellows, were unable to support them properly; and it
was hoped that their inevitable contacts with rude men of business
would not sully their purity.  If women who had not had
"advantages" worked by the millions in shops and factories--at
wages as low as six or eight dollars a week, roughly equivalent to
eighteen to twenty-five a week in 1950--this was understood to
subject them to appalling temptations; one of O. Henry's most
touching stories deals with a poor shopgirl who, though she kept a
picture of Kitchener of Khartoum in her room as the embodiment of
male knightliness, was pursued by a low character named Piggy who
would one day have his way with her because she was starving on her
meager wages.

There were also servant girls innumerable; but in the cities they
were mostly of immigrant stock, or colored, and therefore, it was
thought, could hardly hope for a better lot.  And anyhow they were
protected from temptation by being given very few hours off.  In
the country towns the servant girls were likely to be farmers'
daughters who would presently marry a clerk or a man in the
railroad office and set up housekeeping--with, one hoped, their
innocence still unimpaired.  (Incidentally, only among a minority
of the wealthy were servants referred to as such, except in the
South; however mean their status, an American deference to the
democratic idea compelled them to be spoken of as "the girls," or,
in less sophisticated circles, as "the help.")

If unhappy circumstances forced a "nicely brought up" young woman
to work for a living, a career as schoolteacher, or music teacher,
or trained nurse was considered acceptable for her.  If she had the
appropriate gift she might become a writer or artist or singer,
even an opera singer.  Some went on the stage; but at the grave
risk of declassing themselves, for actresses were known to be
mostly "fast."  (Always, in discussions of the economic status and
opportunities of women, the effect of a woman's occupation upon her
sexual virtue was recurrent.)  There were pioneers who, with
flaming intensity, took up other careers--as doctors, for instance--
against every sort of opposition; but it was an unusual community
in which they were not considered unfeminine cranks for doing so,
and one of the most telling arguments marshaled against their
decision was that a girl who set out to earn money was selfishly
causing her father needless embarrassment: somebody might think
that he couldn't support her.  By common consent the best--and
safest--thing for a girl to do was to sit at home and help her
mother about the house and wait for the "right man."

Such a code might be expected by people of this post-Freudian day
to have produced a generation of inhibited neurotics.  I think Mr.
Canby is right when he argues, in The Age of Confidence, that on
the whole it did not.  If the rule of reticence and repression
damaged many lives, it was not conspicuously harder for most people
to live by than the rule of frankness and comparative sexual
latitude.  But it had its unhappy aspects.  So inexorable were the
silences that surrounded the sexual functions (except in men's
smoking-room conversation) that a large majority of American women
entered marriage with only the vaguest--and often the most
terrified--notions of what it would involve.  And it is possible,
if not probable, that to an equally large majority of married women
the sexual life remained, year after year, a distasteful necessity,
to be submitted to only because men had beastly instincts which
must be appeased (lest they be driven into adventures with bad
women), and because it was one's right and duty to have children.

It is true that already the divorce rate was rising; in the year
1900 there was one divorce for every 12.7 weddings, as compared
with one for every 2.6 weddings in the abnormal postwar year 1946
and for every 4.1 weddings in the more normal year 1949.  But even
the 1900 figures give no idea of the black disfavor in which
divorce was held in the average American community.  A marriage
might be a nightmare to both partners, but it must go on and on:
that was the decree of public opinion.

As a result, there was hardly an American town of any size in which
one could not point to a middle-aged or elderly couple who had not
spoken to one another in years, so deep was their mutual enmity,
but who continued to share the same house, eat at the same table,
bring up a family of children, and even, perhaps, share the same
bed--in the stubborn conviction that they were treading the only
path of virtue.


You could not travel far, on your return to the America of 1900,
without noticing how much smaller the cities and towns were.  For
in that year the population of the continental United States was
just about half what it would be fifty years later--a little less
than 76 millions as against a little more than 150 millions in
1950.  And although you would find open fields where there are now
villages, and villages which have since grown into towns, it would
be in the cities and their suburbs that the contrast would be most
striking.  Especially in the cities of the West Coast and Texas.
For example, you would find Los Angeles a fast-growing little city
of only 102,489 people--about one-nineteenth of its 1950
population; Baedeker's guide said in 1899 that within the preceding
decade "its adobe houses have given place almost entirely to stone
and brick business blocks and tasteful wooden residences."  You
would find Houston a pigmy city of 44,633 inhabitants, as against
over thirteen times as many in 1950; Dallas, another pigmy with
42,638 people, as against over ten times as many in 1950.

Not only would the thinness of the Western population remind you
how much farther east, in those days, was the center of gravity of
American industry and American cultural institutions; even in the
Eastern cities you would miss many of the commonplace features of
modern city life.  Skyscrapers, for instance: the tallest building
in the country was the Ivins Syndicate Building on Park Row in New
York, which rose 29 stories, with towers which brought its utmost
altitude to 382 feet.  Not yet did visitors to New York remark upon
the "famous skyline."  And in other cities a ten- or twelve-story
building was a thing of wonder.

There was little electric street-lighting; a commonplace sight at
dusk in almost any American city was the appearance of the city
lamp-lighter with his ladder, which he would set against a lamppost
and climb to turn on the gas street-light.  Nor was there, as yet,
much illuminated advertising.  New Yorkers could marvel at the
great Heinz sign on the site of the future Flatiron Building at
Fifth Avenue and Broadway and Twenty-third Street, a fifty-foot
sign, with a huge pickle represented by green light bulbs, and
HEINZ written across it in white bulbs, and slogans such as "57
Varieties" flashing on and off below; but this was a pioneer
spectacle: not yet had Broadway truly become the Great White Way.

As for public transportation in the cities, there was only one
completed subway, a short one in Boston, though in New York ground
was broken for another during 1900; and if New York and Chicago had
their thundering elevated railroads (New York was just electrifying
its line, which had previously run by steam), most urban Americans
got about town in trolley cars, the screaming of whose wheels, as
they rounded a corner, seemed to the countryman the authentic note
of modern civilization.  Electric trolley lines were booming; the
financial journals were full of advertisements of the securities of
new trolley enterprises; to put one's money into street-railroad
development was to bet on the great American future.

Each city had its outlying residential areas, within walking
distance of the railroad or trolley lines: long blocks of single-
family or two-family houses, rising bleakly among the vacant lots
and fields; comfortable lawn-surrounded houses for the more
prosperous.  And there were many commuters who made a cindery
railroad journey to work from suburban towns.  But those outlying
towns were quite different from what they were to become in the
automobile age.  For only if one could be met at the station by a
horse and carriage--which was inconvenient unless one could afford
a coachman--or was an exceptionally hardy pedestrian, was it
practicable to live more than a mile or so from the railroad or
trolley.  So the suburbs were small, and backed by open country.
Nothing would have been more incredible to the commuter of 1900
than the notion that within a generation the fields and woods in
which he went walking of a Sunday would be studded with hundreds of
suburban cottages, all easily accessible in a motorized age.

As you traveled away from the cities into the countryside, one of
the things that would have puzzled you, if you had been able to
look about you with the eyes of the mid-century, would have been
the comparative shortage of city people's summer cottages.  The
rich, to be sure, had their holiday resorts: Bar Harbor, Islesboro,
and North Haven on the islands off the Maine coast; Nahant,
Beverly, and Manchester on the shoreline north of Boston; Newport
and Narragansett Pier in Rhode Island; Lenox in the Berkshires; in
the New York area, Tuxedo Park, Lakewood, Cedarhurst, and the newly-
fashionable north shore of Long Island; Atlantic City and Cape May;
the Springs of Virginia and West Virginia; Saratoga Springs for the
racing season; Palm Beach for the winter season; Santa Barbara on
the West Coast.  If the overwhelming majority of the places in this
list seem to be in the northeast part of the country, the reason is
obvious; most Southerners went north if they could, and most
Westerners went east, for a prosperous holiday.  And many places
whose warm winter climate subsequently made them popular pleasure
resorts were then chiefly known as health resorts.  Said Baedeker's
guide, 1899 edition:

The best known winter-stations are in Florida, California, the
Carolinas, Georgia, and Virginia.  A large proportion of the
invalids visiting these regions are the victims of consumption, but
sufferers from gout, rheumatism, neurasthenia, chlorosis, anaemia,
diseases of the kidneys, affections of the heart, insomnia, chronic
bronchitis, asthma, and overwork are often signally benefited. . . .

Baedeker especially recommended for invalids such places as Los
Angeles, Santa Barbara, San Diego, and San Bernardino in
California; Colorado Springs in the Rockies; and Thomasville,
Georgia, and Aiken, South Carolina, for "weak-chested persons."

In most of the leading resorts there were fine country houses; in
some of them, opulent ones.  There were also many prosperous
families whose special taste for the wilds would lead them to buy
large tracts of Adirondack woodland and build luxurious "camps"; or
whose liking for the simplicities of Cape Cod, or the White
Mountains, or the Lake Michigan shoreline, or the rugged Monterey
coast, would lead them to build more modest cottages for a two or
three months' stay.  But their choice of places was limited by two
things--accessibility to a railroad, and the limited holiday time
available to all but a few.  The boom in summer-cottage building
was only just beginning; probably there were only something like a
tenth as many cottages as in 1950.  It was still the heyday of the
big summer-resort hotel, to which well-to-do vacationists would
come for a short stay, ranging usually from a week to a month: the
shingled hotel with towers and turrets and whipping flags, with
wide piazzas and interminable carpeted corridors, and with a vast
dining room in which were served huge meals on the American plan,
with a menu which took one from celery and olives through soup and
fish and a roast to ice cream, cake, and nuts and almonds, with
sherbet as a cooling encouragement in mid-meal.

For those who could not afford such grandeur, there were
boardinghouses innumerable, with schoolteachers rocking on the
porch and a group of croquet players on the lawn; and, here and
there along the seashore or the lakeside, crowded colonies of tiny
shingled shacks, each labeled clearly with its sentimental or
jocose name--"Bide-a-Wee Cottage," "Doocum Inn," or the like.  But
the overwhelming majority of Americans outside the upper income
brackets stayed at home, through the full heat of summer.  And
being carriageless, they had to satisfy their holiday dreams by
taking a special reduced-rate railroad tour by day-coach to Niagara
Falls or Atlantic City; or, more likely, an occasional trip out of
town in an open trolley car to the Trolley Park, an amusement park
at the end of the line.

So there was still lots of room to play in America--thousands of
miles of shoreline, hundreds of lakes and rivers, hundreds of
mountains, which you could explore to your heart's content, camping
and bathing and hunting and fishing without asking anybody's
permission, if you could only somehow reach them.  Already there
were far-sighted conservationists pointing out that for generations
Americans had been despoiling the land while subduing it; that
forests were being hacked to pieces, farm land misused and
overused, natural resources plundered right and left; and that
national parks would be needed, both to conserve these resources
and to give the people room to play.  But to most people such
warnings just didn't make sense.  If lumbermen destroyed one
forest, there were others to enjoy; if cottagers bought up one
beach, there were others open to any bathers.  The bounties of
nature seemed inexhaustible.  As Stuart Chase was to remark long
years later, the prevailing attitude was that of the Mad Hatter,
who if he soiled one teacup simply moved on to the next one.

For the small minority who were lucky enough to have a summer
cottage to go to, the ritual of departure was complex.  First, the
city house would be put through a thorough cleaning and
dismantling, a process that lasted for days.  On Departure-Day-
Minus-One the expressman called for the trunks, which were many; it
would have astonished a family of the 1900 era to be told that in
later years vacationists would manage for weeks with nothing but
suitcases.  On the fateful morning the family would grasp bags,
overcoats, umbrellas, and such other possible incumbrances as
fishing tackle, golf clubs, dog, cat, and caged canary, and proceed
to the station in one or more horse-drawn cabs.  Then came the long
journey--either by Pullman car, incredibly grand with its elaborate
paneling of the Chester A. Arthur vintage, or by open-platform
daycoach, very cindery.  Arrived in the neighborhood of Elysium,
the family would dismount on a sunbaked board platform, assemble
its belongings, and proceed in a big three-seater wagon (for the
family and personal equipment) followed by an even larger wagon
(for the trunks).  A six-mile drive would take an hour, for there
was that sandy stretch by the cemetery where the horses moved at a
straining walk, and there were a couple of long hills (now taken by
all automobiles in high).  It was a dirty and sticky family that
finally watched the trunk wagon being backed up to the side porch
of the cottage; whether they were more exhausted than their
grandchildren, who now make the 300-mile journey packed tightly
into the family Buick, is less certain.

To the city-bred children of that time, the farmers they met in the
country seemed a race apart, foreign in everything but language.
And why shouldn't they have been?  With no automobiles, no radio,
no rural free delivery, no big mass-circulation magazines; with, in
many places, no access to any schooling but the most elementary;
and with rare chances, if any, to travel to a city, they were
imprisoned in rural isolation.  If, as we have already noted, the
world they saw about them was moved by more understandable and
therefore less terrifying forces than those which impinged upon
their descendants, it was also unbelievably more limited.


As you continued your investigation of the United States of 1900
you would find yourself, again and again, struck by the lack, or
the shortage, of things which today you regard as commonplace

Electrical services and devices, for instance.  Most of the city
houses of the really prosperous were now electrified; but the man
who was building a new house was only just beginning to install
electric lights without adding gas, too, lest the current fail
suddenly.  And the houses of the great majority were still lighted
by gas (in the cities and towns) or oil lamps (in the country).
Millions of Americans of the older generation still remember what
it was like to go upstairs of an evening and then be consumed with
worry as to whether they had really turned off completely the
downstairs gas jets.  A regular chore for the rural housewife was
filling the lamps; and a frequent source of family pride was the
possession of a Welsbach burner that would furnish adequate light
for a whole family to read by as they gathered about the living-
room table.

Of course there were no electric refrigerators--to say nothing of
washing machines and deep-freeze units.  Farmers--and summer
cottagers--had icehouses in which big cubes of ice, cut during the
winter at a neighboring pond or river, or imported by ship from
north to south, lay buried deep in sawdust.  When you needed ice,
you climbed into the icehouse, scraped the sawdust away from a fine
hunk of ice, and carried it in your ice tongs to the kitchen
icebox.  If you lived in the city, the ice company's wagon showed
up at the door and the iceman stowed a huge cube in your icebox.

For a good many years there had been refrigerator cars on the
railroads, but the great national long-distance traffic in fresh
fruits and vegetables was still in its infancy; and accordingly the
prevailing American diet would have shocked deeply a visitor from
1950.  In most parts of the United States people were virtually
without fresh fruit and green vegetables from late autumn to late
spring.  During this time they consumed quantities of starches, in
the form of pies, doughnuts, potatoes, and hot bread, which few
would venture to absorb today.  The result was that innumerable
Americans were in sluggish health during the months of late winter
and early spring, when their diet was short of vitamins.  If as a
visitor from 1950 you found yourself staying in an average American
house in the winter season at the turn of the century, you would
soon find yourself yearning for orange juice, tomato juice, fresh
lettuce, or grapefruit--every one of them unobtainable then.

By the turn of the century running water, bathtubs, and water
closets were to be found in virtually all the town houses of the
prosperous, though many a fine house on a fashionable street still
held only one bathroom.  But not only did factory workers and
farmers (except perhaps a few owners of big farms) still not dream
of enjoying such luxuries, but even in the gracious houses of well-
to-do people beyond the reach of city water lines and sewer lines,
there was likely to be no bathroom at all.  They washed with
pitcher and basin in their bedrooms, each of them pouring his dirty
water from the basin into a slop jar, to be emptied later in the
day; and after breakfast they visited the privy behind the house.
In his lively book, The Age of Indiscretion, Clyde Brion Davis
tells how, if you lived in Chillicothe, Missouri, you might on
occasion extend your political education by beholding the Governor
of Missouri, a resident of Chillicothe, "without his silk hat or
frock coat and with his fawn-colored vest unbuttoned and the tab
of his stiff-bosomed shirt unbuttoned and hanging outside his
trousers . . . looking very thoughtful as he sauntered to the

At a luxurious hotel you might, if you paid extra, get a room with
private bath, but not until 1907 did Ellsworth M. Statler build in
Buffalo the first hotel which offered every guest a room and
private bath at a moderate price.  And not until 1916 did the
double-shell enameled bathtub go into mass production, replacing
the painted cast-iron bathtub, with roll rim and claw feet, which
was the standard article of the 1900 period.

As a visitor from the nineteen-fifties to the era of that cast-iron
bathtub it might or might not occur to you that personal
cleanliness was not so readily achieved then as in your own time,
and that if the Saturday-night bath offered to millions of
Americans their only weekly immersion in warm water, this was
chiefly because bathrooms were few and far between.  But pretty
certainly there was one custom of those days which would strike you
as filthy.  In the Eastern cities well-bred people disapproved of
spitting in mixed company, though the cuspidor was likely to be a
standard office fixture beside the executive's desk; but in the
West and South, and in the small cities and towns especially,
spitting was a standard prerogative of the sturdy male; there were
cuspidors everywhere, not only in offices, hotels, and public
buildings, but in the leading citizen's parlor; and when it took
too much of an effort to reach a cuspidor--which many men prided
themselves on being able to hit with a stream of spittle at a
considerable distance--many otherwise cleanly people considered it
their privilege to spit in the fireplace or on the floor.

Perhaps the dwindling of this ancient American custom during the
years since 1900 has been affected by the changing use of tobacco.
In 1900, when the population of the United States was half what it
was in 1950, Americans smoked a slightly larger number of cigars,
consumed a much larger amount of pipe tobacco and a very much
larger amount of chewing tobacco--and smoked only about one-
hundredth of the number of cigarettes that they did fifty years
later.  (In 1900 about four billion cigarettes were manufactured in
the United States; in 1949, 384 billions.)

Telephones, in 1900, were clumsy things and comparatively scarce;
they were to be found chiefly in business offices and in the houses
of such well-to-do people as enjoyed experimenting with new
mechanical devices.  In the whole country there were only 1,335,911
of them--as compared with over 43,000,000 at the end of 1950.  In
Muncie, Indiana, the local press warned people that, when using the
telephone, they "should not ask for a name but refer to the number
list."  And so strange, to most people, was still the idea of such
an impersonal instrument of personal communication, that many a
housewife would cry out politely as the telephone began ringing,
"I'm coming, I'm coming!"

As for the instruments of mass communication which, in the years to
come, were to do so much to provide Americans of all classes and
conditions with similar information, ideas, and interests, these
too were almost wholly lacking.  There would be no radio for
another twenty years; no television, except for a very limited
audience, for over forty-five years.  Crude motion pictures were
occasionally to be seen at vaudeville theaters, or in peep-show
parlors, but the first movie which told a story, The Great Train
Robbery, was still three years in the future.  There was as yet no
magazine with a circulation of over a million.  Already the days
were ending when a group of splendid and sedate periodicals
designed for polite readers with intellectual tastes--such as The
Century, Harper's, and Scribner's--had dominated the magazine
field.  Munsey and Curtis and McClure had begun to show that many
readers could be attracted by magazines which offered less literary
but more human and popular fare, and that such magazines could as a
result attract lucrative advertising.  But although Cyrus Curtis
had pushed the circulation of his Ladies' Home Journal to 850,000,
he had only just begun his extraordinary demonstration of the way
in which popular magazines could serve as a medium for national
advertising on a huge scale.  His Saturday Evening Post had only
182,000 readers in 1900, and an advertising revenue of only $6,933.

Accordingly there were sharp limits to the fund of information and
ideas which people of all regions and all walks of life held in
common.  To some extent a Maine fisherman, an Ohio farmer, and a
Chicago businessman would be able to discuss politics with one
another, but in the absence of syndicated newspaper columns
appearing from coast to coast their information would be based
mostly upon what they had read in very divergent local newspapers,
and in the absence both of the radio and of newsreels it is
doubtful if any of them--except perhaps the Chicago businessman--
had ever heard with his own ears the silver voice of William
Jennings Bryan.  There was no such common denominator of
acquaintance as there would be in 1950 between people who could
instantly recognize not only Harry Truman, but Bob Hope, Van
Johnson, and Betty Hutton, who had laughed simultaneously at Jack
Benny's colloquies with Rochester, and who knew Bing Crosby's voice
the moment they heard it on the air.

And if the instruments of mass communication were lacking, so also
were many social institutions which today Americans take for
granted.  A nation of individualists, accustomed to the idea that
each person must fend for himself as an independent unit, was
moving into an age of interdependence but was still slow to
recognize the fact and slow to organize the institutions which such
an age required.  Consider, for example, what a small Midwestern
town had to offer a boy by way of recreation and educational
opportunity.  Tradition said that boys must find their own chances
for recreation--swimming at the old swimming hole of hallowed
legend, playing baseball in the open fields, hunting and fishing in
the neighboring woods and streams.  But already industrialism was
contaminating the rivers, the open country was being built up and
cultivated, the natural playgrounds were being despoiled--and few
substitute diversions had been provided.

I know of no better demonstration of the plight of a boy in such a
town than is given in Clyde Brion Davis's The Age of Indiscretion.
In Chillicothe, Missouri, says Mr. Davis, there was no place "where
a youngster could enter the water except the really filthy ponds
and the equally dirty and dangerous river where drownings occurred
every season. . . .  We, in our district, had no place to play
baseball except a wholly inadequate and rutty lot down by the
Milwaukee tracks. . . .  There was no tennis or golf or badminton
or basketball.  There was not a gymnasium in town or anything
approaching physical education even in high school."  There was no
public library (unless you counted a small semipublic library in
the high school).  There was no Y.M.C.A., no Boy Scout organization,
no 4-H organization, no school band, school orchestra, or school
glee club.

It seems to be a continuing characteristic of American life that
communities perpetually fail to catch up institutionally with their
own growth; at any rate, it was glaringly true that the American
town of 1900 had failed to adapt itself to the necessities of the
onrushing industrial age.


In the development of organized sports there was the same sort of
lag.  The frontier tradition and the old American individualism
died hard.  Most American boys and men were still expected to get
their active amusement on a catch-as-catch-can basis out in the
open countryside--hunting, fishing, camping, swimming, riding--or
to get it out of contests (such as target-shooting) which grew
directly out of the conditions of the open countryside.  Baseball
had long been the national game and millions of boys had learned to
play it, but mostly on local sandlots, from which, if proficient,
they might graduate to play on the town team against a neighboring
town.  As for girls, the traditional idea was that they were too
weak, or at any rate too proper, to engage in such rough goings-on.
Organized games which required special costumes and equipment were
mostly considered affectations of the rich, and to the average
small-town American any such notion as that of offering "supervised
play" for boys and girls would have been quite bewildering.

Already this old-time tradition was breaking down.  Organized games
were growing rapidly in the schools and colleges: football,
baseball (which was a college sport with much more prestige then
than later), rowing, track, and on a minor scale soccer and
lacrosse.  (Basketball was still known only to a comparative few.
It had not even been invented until 1892.)  Among the games which
older people, too, could enjoy, golf and tennis were spreading fast
in popularity; a considerable number of people bowled; and men and
women by the hundreds of thousands bicycled for recreation.  But as
we look back on the sports of those days, the most striking thing
is the extent to which they centered in the East--and also were
still regarded as the prerogative of the well-to-do.

Tennis, for example, was overwhelmingly Eastern, and the annual
championships were held as a matter of course at Newport, the
center of summertime fashion.  Golf had reached Chicago at the time
of the World's Fair of 1893, and already there were no less than
twenty golf clubs in California, but the best amateur players were
mostly well-to-do Easterners, and the best professionals were
nearly all Scotch.  Red-blooded Americans outside the influence of
urban wealth and fashion tended to regard golf as downright silly;
any businessman could get a laugh by remarking that he couldn't see
any sense in chasing a little white ball up and down a field.

And as for football--which in 1900 was a bone-breaking contest in
which no forward passing was allowed and the teams crashed into one
another and piled up in sweating heaps in the effort to gain five
yards in three downs--it is instructive to look at the New York
Times for Sunday, November 25, 1900.  There, on the front page,
right-hand column, you will learn that the Yale football team, the
preceding afternoon, had become the undisputed "football champions"
of the year--because, after having beaten Princeton, they had
beaten Harvard, which had already beaten Pennsylvania.  It was as
simple as that.  The Yale-Harvard game had been played at Yale
Field, with 20,000 people in the bleachers, and speculators
offering seats at prices from $10 to $20.  Following the Times's
account of the game itself you will find a headline reading SOCIETY
AT THE GAME, informing you that "the society and club worlds of
this city exhibited an intense interest in yesterday's game," and
that "to give a list of the well-known men and women present would
be to reprint whole pages of the Social Register."

It is only fair to add that in 1900 there were college football
teams from coast to coast and that some of the Midwestern ones
displayed considerable prowess.  Outing magazine, reviewing the
season, devoted separate sections of its survey to Midwestern,
Southern, and Pacific Coast football.  Yet, like the New York
Times, it had no doubt as to where pre-eminence lay.  It selected
an All-America team consisting of four players from Yale, two from
Harvard, and one each from Cornell, Columbia, Lafayette,
Pennsylvania, and West Point.  (Incidentally, when Frank Hering
went to Notre Dame to coach football in the fall of 1896, he "had a
hard time working up enough enthusiasm to get a squad on the
field," according to Arthur J. Hope's history of the university.)

Even if one makes allowance for a certain degree of condescension
on the part of Eastern chroniclers, the evidence is overwhelming
that at the turn of the century athletic sports centered in the
East and that the public thought of them as surrounded by an aura
of fashion.  Far ahead were the days of tennis champions from
municipal courts, golf champions from the public links, expert
college teams playing in huge stadiums so numerously that no one
selecting an All-American eleven could see more than a few of the
best ones play; Californians moving into the top ranks in sport
after sport; high-school basketball teams organized by the
thousands from one end of the country to the other; and Americans
of both sexes, to the estimated number of well over ten millions,
enjoying at least an occasional evening of bowling.

Chapter 2

Grandeur, Limited

Of all the contrasts between American life in 1900 and half a
century or more later, perhaps the most significant is in the
distance between rich and poor--in income, the way of living, and
status in the community.  At the turn of the century the gulf
between wealth and poverty was immense.

One illustration may help to point the contrast.  I have already
mentioned Andrew Carnegie's income.  During the year 1900 Carnegie
owned 58 1/2 per cent of the stock of his great steel company.
That year it made a profit of 40 million dollars.  Carnegie's
personal gain that year, whether or not he took it in dividends,
was therefore well over 23 million dollars--with NO INCOME TAXES TO
PAY.  During the five years 1896-1900 his AVERAGE annual income,
computed on the same basis, was about 10 millions.  And these
figures include no other income which he may have had from any
other property.

At the time that Carnegie was enjoying this princely income, tax
free, the average annual wage of ALL American workers was somewhere
in the neighborhood of four or five hundred dollars; one economic
calculator has arrived at a figure of $417 a year, another makes it
$503.  Remember that these figures are averages, not minimum

* To translate these figures into the terms of 1950 one must make
allowance for the dwindling value of the dollar.  This it is
difficult to compute; for though statisticians may arrive at
precise index figures for the rise in prices, money was spent in
such different ways then, and nominally identical goods were in
fact so different, that any index figure is suspect.  For
convenience I shall assume in this book that the 1900 dollar bought
three times as much as the 1950 one, which is at least close to the
reality.  Translate the wages of 1900 into these terms and we find
that the average 1900 wage, in terms of what it would buy in 1950,
was somewhere in the neighborhood of $1,200 to $1,500--which looks
considerably less appalling than $400 to $500.

But if we multiply the worker's wage in this way we should likewise
multiply Andrew Carnegie's.  And we find that in terms of 1950
purchasing power his income came to more than 60 millions, tax
free, in 1900, and to more than 30 millions per year for the five
years 1896-1900.

In short, Andrew Carnegie's annual income was at least twenty
thousand times greater than that of the average American workman.

There you have the basic contrast.  Andrew Carnegie was one of the
very wealthiest men of his day, but many others had incomes in the
millions.  And their way of life showed it.  Let us take a look at
this way of life.

To begin with, they built themselves palatial houses.

During the last twenty years of the nineteenth century, when a
great many American millionaires had decided that the thing for a
rich man to do was to build himself a princely mansion, it had been
the Vanderbilt family who had set the pace for the rest to follow.
By the middle eighties there were no less than seven great
Vanderbilt houses within the space of seven blocks on the west side
of Fifth Avenue.  One should perhaps question the published reports
of the cost of these palaces--three millions for William H.'s,
three millions for William K.'s, and so forth--but it would seem
safe to say that the seven, between them, must have represented a
family outlay of well over twelve millions (which, one must remind
oneself, was roughly equivalent to over thirty-six millions today).

The first three of these buildings--William H. Vanderbilt's and the
pair of houses he built for his daughters Mrs. Shepard and Mrs.
Sloane--conformed outwardly, in everything but scale, to the New
York brownstone tradition; but William H.'s contained a bewildering
variety of statues, paintings, tapestries, and urns from all over--
English, French, German, Japanese.  For a pattern was forming: the
American millionaire wanted to live like a prince; and since
princes were foreign, and princely culture was likewise foreign, he
must show his princeliness by living among foreign furnishings and
foreign works of art, in as great variety and profusion as could be

The William K. Vanderbilt house and the Cornelius Vanderbilt house
carried the idea a step further.  They abandoned the New York
brownstone and New York exterior aspect.  For William K., Richard
Morris Hunt designed a limestone castle that was reminiscent of the
Chteau of Blois and even more so of the fifteenth-century French
mansion of Jacques Coeur at Bourges; for Cornelius, George B. Post
provided a brick-and-stone chteau that likewise carried people's
minds back to Blois.  Both were splendid buildings, ornaments to
Fifth Avenue, but their foreignness amused the architect Louis
Sullivan, who felt that houses should harmonize with the lives of
the people who lived in them.  "Must I show you this FRENCH
CHTEAU, this little Chteau de Blois, on this street corner, here,
in New York, and still you do not laugh?" wrote Sullivan in his
Kindergarten Chats.  "Must you wait till you see a GENTLEMAN in a
silk hat come out of it before you laugh?  Have you no sense of
humor, no sense of pathos?  Must I tell you that while the man may
live in the house physically . . . he cannot possibly live in it
morally, mentally, or spiritually, that he and his house are a
paradox, a contradiction, an absurdity . . . ?"

No such misgivings as these troubled the Vanderbilts, nor did they
let anything stint their zeal for grandeur.  Subsequently, the
family fortune went also into the building of several massive
Newport houses, of which the most immense was Cornelius
Vanderbilt's The Breakers, which resembled an oversized Italian
villa, and the most dazzling was William K.'s Marble House, the
construction, decoration, and furnishing of which was alleged to
have cost some eleven millions.  There was also Frederick W.
Vanderbilt's great house at Hyde Park, in which the dining room was
approximately fifty feet long.  There was William K. Vanderbilt's
Idle Hour, at Oakdale, Long Island--with 110 rooms, 45 bathrooms,
and a garage ready to hold 100 automobiles.  But the champion of
all the turn-of-the-century chteaux was George W. Vanderbilt's
ducal palace at Asheville, North Carolina, which he called

Biltmore, too, was French, designed by Hunt after the manner of the
great castles of the Loire.  It had forty master bedrooms, a Court
of Palms, an Oak Drawing Room, a Banqueting Hall, a Print Room, a
Tapestry Gallery, and a Library with 250,000 volumes.  It was
surrounded by an estate which gradually grew until it covered some
203 square miles, giving Vanderbilt ample scope to exercise his
interest in scientific farming and forestry.  To serve as his
director of forestry, Vanderbilt hired a young man named Gifford
Pinchot, who was enabled to offer what a standard work on American
forestry calls "the first practical demonstration of forest
management on a large scale in America."

Paul Morton, who was U. S. Secretary of Agriculture in the middle
nineties, regarded Vanderbilt's experimental work in agriculture
and forestry with admiration not unmixed with envy.  "He employs
more men than I have in my charge," said Secretary Morton.  "He is
also spending more money than Congress appropriates for this

No wonder a chronicler of the time reflected that "what with the
six or seven great New York houses of the Vanderbilt family, and
their still larger numbers of country estates, it could plausibly
be argued that among them they have invested as much money in the
erection of dwellings as any of the royal families of Europe, the
Bourbons alone excepted."

And the Vanderbilts were far from alone in the building of vast
villas and chteaux.  The Goelet, Belmont, and Berwind houses at
Newport; the Flagler house at Palm Beach; the Gould house at
Lakewood, New Jersey; the Widener house near Philadelphia; the
Phipps house at Pittsburgh--these were only a few of the mightier
constructions in which the multimillionaires of the 1900 period
sought to lead the princely life.

As one compares photographs of one palatial interior after another,
with their marble floors, curving marble staircases, tapestries,
urns, velvet hangings, carved and painted ceilings, brocaded
chairs, mural paintings, pipe organs, potted palms, and classical
statues holding electric light fixtures, one wonders if life in
such surroundings must not have seemed a little unhomelike.  One is
reminded of Anna Robeson Burr's description of Henry C. Frick, the
steel millionaire, "in his palace, seated on a Renaissance throne
under a baldacchino, and holding in his little hand a copy of the
Saturday Evening Post."  And not only was there nothing cozy about
these marble halls; Paul Bourget, the French novelist, found in
their furnishings an absence of moderation, of restraint.  "On the
floors of halls which are too high there are too many precious
Persian and Oriental rugs," commented Bourget after a Newport
visit.  "There are too many tapestries, too many paintings on the
walls of the drawing rooms.  The guest-chambers have too many
bibelots, too much rare furniture, and on the lunch or dinner table
there are too many flowers, too many plants, too much crystal, too
much silver."

One is reminded, too, of the apt comment of Harry W. Desmond and
Herbert Croly in their book, Stately Homes in America, to the
effect that the European palaces and chteaux which the
millionaires' architects had copied had not been private houses
only but public buildings also, crowded with tenants and retainers
of the noble family which controlled the destinies of the region,
and that as public buildings they "could with propriety be
magnificent."  In a land without a peasantry such palaces as these
were anomalous.  No wonder a Newport or New York or Pittsburgh
chteau with no such neighborhood traffic surging through it made
an oddly illogical frame for a magnate who had made his millions by
merging steel companies, or for a magnate's wife to whom a rocking
chair by a Franklin stove had once seemed the last word in luxury--
even if the architect had provided for them not only Italian
Renaissance paintings and Greek statuary and Flemish tapestries but
also bathrooms, electric lights, automatic elevators, a lavish
heating system, and a complete internal telephone system.

Some of the millionaires eschewed palatial magnificence.  For
example, J. Pierpont Morgan, though he lived a truly regal life,
preferred masculine comfort to marble splendor (except in the
Library which he built after the turn of the century to hold part
of his extraordinary collection of rare books and masterpieces).
Morgan's town house at 291 Madison Avenue, New York, was commodious
rather than grand: one could run it with a staff of a dozen
servants or so.  His country house at Highland Falls was ample but
unpretentious; many American country clubs of today are bigger.
His double house in London did not suggest a palace, though it
contained a collection of paintings at which connoisseurs of Dutch,
French, Spanish, and English art gasped.  But he had also a sizable
country house outside London; a thousand-acre place in the
Adirondacks; a private apartment at the Jekyll Island Club on the
Georgia Coast; a "fishing box" at Newport; special suites at the
Hotel Bristol in Paris and the Grand Hotel in Rome which were set
aside for his use whenever he wanted them; and, in addition to all
these, the 302-foot steam yacht, Corsair III, which served him as
an additional residence either on the Atlantic coast or in the
Mediterranean.  (He also had a private Nile steamer built to order
for his pleasure whenever he should be in Egypt.)  And Morgan could
hardly have been accused of penny-pinching when, wanting carpets
for Corsair III exactly like those on Corsair II, and finding that
such were no longer made, he ordered the old patterns set up on the
looms so that his new carpets, made to order, should be identical
in design.

Andrew Carnegie's preferences, too, were in many respects simpler
than those of the millionaires who frequented Newport.  The house
which he built for himself on Fifth Avenue at Ninety-first Street,
though very large, didn't try to look like a palace; it had a
subdued neo-Georgian aspect.  His yacht, the Seabreeze, was not in
a class with the Corsair.  But during the nineties he acquired an
estate in his native Scotland, Skibo, on which he really let
himself go.  Eventually the estate reached 32,000 acres in size.
Carnegie had two or three hundred tenants; he poured out money on
the construction of roads; and though he preferred informal dress
and informal entertainment, and at Skibo Castle almost invariably
wore a light gray Norfolk jacket and knickerbockers, he and his
guests were awakened at eight o'clock each morning by the Carnegie
bagpiper approaching the castle from a distance and then circling
it and skirling beneath the bedroom windows, and a little later
they ate breakfast to the music of an organ played by the Carnegie

Nor was there anything especially palatial about the house in which
John D. Rockefeller lived much of the year at Pocantico Hills,
close to Tarrytown, New York.  Rockefeller did not care for pomp
and circumstance; his tastes were Baptist rather than Medicean, and
after his retirement from active business in the mid-nineties he
was further handicapped by ill-health, so that in the years
immediately following the turn of the century he was living on a
diet of graham crackers and milk, and was utilizing for his daily
golf game a bicycle, on which he rode from shot to shot.
Rockefeller was moved less by a lust for splendor than by a concern
for personal protection, since he knew that the ruthless methods of
his Standard Oil Company had made him violent enemies.  What he did
at Pocantico Hills was to build up, gradually, a vast personal
enclosure within which he might live a prudently well-ordered life

The estate was not completed until long after the turn of the
century, when the discovery of oil in Texas and Oklahoma and the
increasing popularity of the automobile were between them
multiplying his millions faster than he could give them away; but
the pattern was more nearly that of 1900 than of his declining
years.  If Rockefeller's own house was not a palace, it was one of
more than seventy-five buildings on his estate; if he himself used
one car for fifteen years, the garage on the estate was built to
hold a fleet of fifty.  Within his estate there were seventy miles
of private roads on which he could take his afternoon drive; a
private golf links on which he could play his morning game; and
anywhere from a thousand to fifteen hundred employees, depending on
the season.

All this, by the way, was for Pocantico Hills only; Rockefeller
also owned an estate at Lakewood, which he occupied in the spring;
an estate at Ormond Beach in Florida, for winter use; a town house
on Fifty-fourth Street in New York; an estate at Forest Hill,
Cleveland, which he did not visit; and a house on Euclid Avenue in
Cleveland, likewise unused by him.  Never, perhaps, did any man
live a more frugal life on a more colossal scale.


But if Rockefeller lived frugally, there were those that did not.
When one is trying to measure the lavish scale of life among the
very rich of those days, it is a little unfair to dwell unduly upon
such extreme extravagances as the Bradley Martin ball given early
in 1897--when the country was just pulling out of a grievous
depression--at a reported cost of $369,200 (roughly the equivalent
of a million dollars today); or the James Hazen Hyde ball of a few
years later, for which Stanford White transformed Sherry's
restaurant in New York into the semblance of the interior of the
Grand Trianon, with marble statues brought from France, waiters
tricked out in eighteenth-century livery and perukes, and
entertainment provided by the great French actress, Rjane, and
members of her company, likewise imported for the occasion.  Both
the Martins and Mr. Hyde found they had misjudged the public
attitude toward such expenditures, and the fact that they both
thereafter went abroad to live was not wholly unrelated to
this discovery.  Let us look at a less publicized and more
representative part of the record.  Let us visit Newport at the
height of the 1902 season, the tennis week at the end of August,
during which the Dohertys of England were able to defeat many of
the best American tennis players in the matches at the Casino, and
only a successful defense of the American title by William A.
Larned in the "challenge round" turned back R. F. Doherty's

On Monday evening of that week, August 25, Mr. and Mrs. Cornelius
Vanderbilt were "at home" at Beaulieu, the William Waldorf Astor
villa which they had taken for the summer.  If you had been
invited, and the words "at home" had suggested to you a quiet chat
in the drawing room, you would have been surprised to find yourself
entering the estate through a specially-built arched entrance, 25
feet wide and 18 feet high; proceeding up a brilliantly illuminated
midway along which there were shooting galleries, Negro dancers,
singing girls, a Punch and Judy show, and other exhibits
characteristic of an amusement park; and in due course continuing
to a temporary theater, on the construction of which two gangs of
carpenters had worked night and day for five days.  And in this
theater you would have witnessed the first act of a successful
Broadway musical comedy, The Wild Rose, featuring Marie Cahill,
Eddie Foy, and Irene Bentley.  The Knickerbocker Theater in New
York had been closed for the evening in order that the entire cast
of the show, with the first-act scenery, might be transported to
Newport to delight Mrs. Vanderbilt's guests.  When the show was
over, these guests adjourned to the house for supper, while the
theater was cleared for dancing; after supper there was a ball
with, according to the New York Times, "two cotillion leaders and
elaborate figures with beautiful and costly favors."

Two evenings later Mrs. Ogden Goelet gave a dinner dance at Ochre
Court, with two orchestras and another cotillion; one figure of the
cotillion required 700 gardenias, the provision of which offered
something of a problem to Newport florists; according to newspaper
reports, the gardenias were distributed "from a Russian sleigh."
And the very next evening Mrs. William Astor gave a ball at
"Beechwood" to open her new Louis XV ballroom, with another
cotillion, led by Harry Lehr.

In the nineties Paul Bourget had commented favorably on several
aspects of Newport life.  He had remarked that there were no
courtesans, because virtually all the men came only for week ends
and holidays and the life of the place did not lend itself to
secluded intimacies; that there were no adventurers, because nobody
was admitted to society whose earnings and investments could not be
at least roughly ascertained; and that most of the people looked
healthy rather than dissipated.  His points were well taken.  This
was not a depraved or debauched community; it had standards of
conduct and decorum.

To explain the Newporters' look of health, M. Bourget described an
average day in the life of a young girl there.  She would be out
riding before nine; she would return from her ride and change in
time to watch a tennis tournament match at the Casino; then her
carriage would take her to a yacht landing and she would be ferried
out for lunch on a yacht; at half past four or thereabouts she
would leave the yacht to watch a polo match; then she would go
home, bathe, and change for a dinner party, which would probably
break up by ten-thirty because many of those who had been out in
the open air would have difficulty keeping their eyes open any
longer; after that she might go on to a ball.  Paul Bourget,
however, apparently did not attend any ball.  If he had, it is safe
to guess that this acute observer would have found in a grand
Newport entertainment the same lack of restraint which he had found
in the decoration of the houses.  For these people had more money
than they knew what to do with, and they were engaged in a
competition to see who could toss it about most superbly.

The visitor from France might have wondered at the expenditure of
thousands upon thousands of dollars in order that during one
evening a couple of hundred people might see part of a musical show
that could be seen in its entirety, and to better advantage, on
Broadway, or might frolic in a midway that was in essence a small
imitation of Coney Island.  But it was characteristic of Newport
entertaining that no expense was spared to bring to the place
things that didn't belong there at all.  For instance, according to
Lloyd Morris,

Mrs. Belmont imported Chinese artisans to construct a red and gold
lacquer tea house on the cliffs at Marble House.  The structure was
gorgeous and authentic, but contained no provision for making tea.
A miniature railroad was therefore laid from the pantry of the
mansion to the cliffs, its course masked by elaborate planting, and
footmen with trays were thereby whisked down to the lacquered toy.

At several houses in New York and Newport the hostesses prided
themselves on being able to serve dinner for a hundred or more
people on a few hours' notice--a feat which required, of course, a
profusion of servants.  But servants were not lacking: in some
country houses they might number fifty or sixty in all, including
the gardeners, chauffeurs, and grooms, and they were organized in a
hierarchy of their own, English fashion.  A few years after the
turn of the century a young man fresh out of Harvard found himself
installed for the summer in one of the marble mansions of Newport
as tutor to the son of the family.  The young man was an earnest
athlete, and it dismayed him that the boy in his charge was getting
no chance to learn about teamwork in sports.  One afternoon he
found the butler and the other chief menservants playing soccer in
a secluded part of the grounds.  The very thing, he said to
himself, and proposed that he and his young charge take part in the
game.  But it didn't work at all.  For the moment the boy got
possession of the ball, opposition melted away; these men, born and
bred in a tradition of subservience, simply could not bring
themselves to get in the way of the young master.

If my mention of people's being able to serve dinner to a hundred
guests on short notice suggests some sort of casserole operation,
be assured that there was nothing casual about a fashionable dinner
at the turn of the century.  The internal capacity of the
prosperous of those days was prodigious.  Seven or eight courses
were likely to be served, with a variety of wines.  In my life of
Pierpont Morgan I printed the menu of a dinner enjoyed by the
members of the Zodiac Club, a private dining club in New York.  It
is a little hard today to be sure, from that menu, which dishes
were served as alternate choices and which constituted separate
courses for all, but it appears to have been a ten-course feast:
oysters, soup, hors d'oeuvres, soft clams, saddle and rack of lamb,
terrapin, canvasback ducks, a sweet, cheese, and fruit--the dinner
being preceded by sherry (instead of cocktails), accompanied
successively by Rhine wine, Chteau-Latour, champagne, and Clos-
Vougeot, and washed down with cognac (along with the coffee).  It
is difficult to imagine hunger being any more thoroughly assuaged;
in fact, from the perspective of the nineteen-fifties it is
difficult to understand how the diners could have faced the
canvasback ducks with anything but dogged resolution.

If the members of the Zodiac Club dined heavily and well, they at
least made no special attempt to enhance the grandeur of the
surroundings in which they ate.  A more all-round effort was made
by Randolph Guggenheimer when he gave a dinner for forty ladies and
gentlemen at the old Waldorf-Astoria on February 11, 1899.  His
guests found the Myrtle Room of the Waldorf transformed into a
garden, with roses, hyacinths, and tulips in bloom, and with hedges
of fir.  Nightingales, blackbirds, and canaries sang in the
greenery.  (It had been something of a trick to induce the 200
authorities to loan some nightingales for the affair.)  The table
was set in an arbor with a vine-covered trellis overhead and with
green turf underfoot.  The menus were painted in gold on scraped
and polished cocoanuts; there were fans for the ladies on which the
wine list had been painted.  As favors there were beautifully
engrossed vinaigrettes for the ladies, and jeweled matchboxes for
the gentlemen.  To provide music, six Neapolitans in native garb
played guitars.  And the dinner, which was served on gold plates,
went as follows:

Buffet Russe


Small Blue Point Oysters

Lemardelais  la Princesse

Amontillado Pasado

Green Turtle Soup


Basket of Lobster

Columbine of Chicken, California Style

Roast Mountain Sheep, with Pure of Chestnuts (the sheep having
been brought to New York by fast express in small, portable


Brussels Sprouts Saut

New Asparagus, Cream Sauce and Vinaigrette

Mumm's Extra Dry and Mot & Chandon Brut

Diamond Back Terrapin

Ruddy Duck (likewise rushed by express in small refrigerators)

Orange and Grapefruit Salad

Fresh Strawberries

Blue Raspberries

Vanilla Mousse

Bonbons, Coffee, Fruit

What did the evening's pleasure cost?  Ten thousand dollars--$250 a
head.  (Again, these were 1899 dollars; the cost in today's terms
was $750 a head.)  So said Oscar of the Waldorf, who should have
known because he planned and staged the party for Mr. Guggenheimer.

One further word may not be wholly superfluous to some readers in
the nineteen-fifties: these great feasts and elaborate balls did
not go on anybody's corporate expense account.  They were paid for
by individuals, out of their own vast incomes.


In those days the word Society (with a capital S) carried much more
definite connotations than it would today.  In every community,
probably, and in any generation, there is social emulation: there
are certain families, or certain individuals, association with whom
will seem to other people to number them among the elect.  You will
find this emulation in its most acute form today in the fraternity
systems of some colleges; in adult communities the lines are less
inexorably drawn.  The smaller and less fluid the community, the
clearer this phenomenon is likely to be; in larger cities, and in
suburban communities where there is a constantly changing
population, it is usually confused and obscured.  One may find a
great variety of groups, such as the old, tradition-bound leading
families; the fashionable group; the newly prosperous who are not
yet admitted to fashionable standing; the well-bred professional
people and intellectuals who touch these other groups but do not
quite belong to them; the earnest business people who are pillars
of the churches and charities; the second rank of business people
who live comfortably but have little traffic with these other
groups; and so on through the whole vaguely defined spectrum--the
pattern being sharply modified in each community by factors of
national origin and of religious, professional, and business
association.  What was striking about the social pattern of 1900,
as we look back upon it today, was that in most communities it was
much clearer and simpler, the stratifications more generally
recognized; and especially that they were generally taken much more
seriously than they are today.

Visitors from England or France would explain to their countrymen
that Society in the United States was not centered in any one
metropolis such as London or Paris, but that each big city here had
a Society of its own; yet that of New York was pre-eminent.  When
Ward McAllister, in 1892, made his famous remark to the effect that
even if Mrs. Astor's ballroom held only four hundred people it was
big enough, since there were only about four hundred people in
Society, there was much scornful laughter; but there were also
great numbers of people to whom McAllister seemed to be defining
the limits of the most select and enviable company in the land.

A few years earlier, Henry Clews had written fulsomely about the
attractions of Manhattan life, asserting that "New York . . . is
really the great social center of the Republic. . . .  Here is the
glitter of peerless fashion, the ceaseless roll of splendid
equipages, and the Bois de Boulogne of America, the Central Park."
Clews had insisted that "it does not take much of this kind of life
to make enthusiastic New Yorkers of the wives of Western
millionaires, and then nothing remains but to purchase a brownstone
mansion, and swing into the tide of fashion with receptions, balls,
and kettle-drums, elegant equipages with coachmen in bright-
buttoned livery, footmen in top boots, maid-servants and man-
servants, including a butler and all the other adjuncts of life in
a great metropolis."  Clews's enthusiasm may have been comic, but
he was describing a recognized phenomenon.  While the socially
established were striving to hold the ranks of Society intact
against the inroads of the new rich, the new rich in their turn
were striving even more furiously to gain recognition by
irresistibly lavish but carefully correct entertaining; and there
were uncounted women to whom an invitation to one of Mrs. Astor's
massive dinners would have seemed a ticket of admission to

For sidelights on the drama of social climbing and social exclusion
at the turn of the century there is no better source than the
satirical drawings of Charles Dana Gibson.  Here one will find,
over and over again, the beautiful girl of socially secure but
financially insecure family trying to decide between the bald-
headed, aging millionaire and the handsome young man who is a
penniless nobody; the ungainly little middle-aged man whose wife
and daughters drag him to entertainments where they hope to meet
the right people; the foreigner whose sole attraction is his title,
but whom the millionaire's wife wants her daughter to marry; and
the misery of the social climber to whose sumptuous party nobody
will come.  In one graphic picture Gibson shows a fat, coarse-
looking woman sitting all alone at the edge of a great empty
ballroom.  The picture is captioned "Mrs. Steele Poole's
Housewarming," in obvious reference to the combinations of steel
manufacturing companies that were making new millionaires right and
left as the nineteenth century closed.  What is most impressive
about these Gibson sketches as a social commentary is that hundreds
of thousands of Gibson admirers were impressed with the
significance of what he was satirizing.  It is difficult to imagine
The New Yorker, let us say, finding in our own time any such eager
audience for a series of cartoons of the drama of social
aspiration; not enough readers would care.

The same sort of drama was going on in other cities the country
over: there was the same eagerness for admission to the gatherings
of the socially elect, whether these were assemblies, cotillions,
sewing circles, the gatherings of some local association, or a
leading family's annual ball.  It continues today, of course, in
somewhat altered forms; the difference is that today comparatively
few people take the drama seriously as involving social ranking,
and that the whole phenomenon is complicated by the preferences of
news photographers, gossip columnists, television audiences, and
publicity-hungry restaurateurs and entertainers.  In 1900 Society
was Society indeed.  It was scornful of public entertainers.  It
was scornful of the attentions of the press; indeed, there were
fathers who told their sons that "a gentleman's name appeared in
the papers only three times: when he was born, when he was married,
and when he died."  And it was confident that it represented what
was most patrician, most brilliant, and most important in American

That is one of the explanations for the international marriages
between American heiresses and foreign noblemen that were so
frequent in those days.  The first important one had taken place in
the eighteen-seventies between Jennie Jerome of New York and Lord
Randolph Churchill (it had produced one of the great men of a
future day, Winston Churchill).  By the nineties they were becoming
epidemic.  In McCall's magazine for November, 1903, there was a
list of fifty-seven of them to date, including the matches between
Miss Mary Leiter and Lord Curzon, Miss Anna Gould and Count Boni de
Castellane, and Miss Louise Corbin and the Earl of Oxford; in that
very month of November, 1903, Miss May Goelet married the Duke of
Roxburghe, and outside St. Thomas's Church on Fifth Avenue great
crowds gathered in the hope of getting a glimpse of the Duke and
his new Duchess.

For this spate of international marriages there were two reasons.
One of them was that to a Prince or Duke or Count it was very
agreeable to get both a charming girl and a lot of money.  And
sometimes there was nothing conjectural about the money.  Read, for
example, these sentences from a contract signed November 6, 1895,
the day when Consuelo Vanderbilt married the Most Noble Charles
Richard John, Duke of Marlborough:

Whereas, a marriage is intended between the said Duke of
Marlborough and the said Consuelo Vanderbilt . . . the sum of two
million five hundred thousand dollars in fifty thousand shares of
the Beech Creek Railway Company, on which an annual payment of four
per cent is guaranteed by the New York Central Railroad Company, is
transferred this day to the trustees.  And shall, during the joint
lives of the said Duke of Marlborough, Consuelo Vanderbilt, pay the
income of the said sum of two million five hundred thousand
dollars, unto the Duke of Marlborough for his life, and after the
death of the said Duke of Marlborough, shall pay the income of the
said trust fund unto the said Consuelo Vanderbilt for life. . . .

Yet there was another reason for such alliances.  The American
girl's parents felt that a noble wedding set upon them the
authentic stamp of aristocracy.  What if the country was
traditionally a democracy and its Constitution decreed that "no
title of nobility shall be granted by the United States"?  There
were, of course, wealthy and socially impeccable Americans who took
these traditions seriously and regarded the collecting of ducal
sons-in-law with amused contempt; but there were others who felt
that in truth the people of the United States constituted a social
pyramid, with Society at its apex, a peerage in all but name; and
that if the families of this peerage intermarried with the lords of
other lands, the alliances gave fitting recognition of their true
patrician worth.  Just as some Americans of wealth, for all their
patriotism, felt that the best art and culture were European, so
they recognized that the insignia of aristocracy, too, were
European--and equally worth embracing.  It was good to feel sure
one belonged to the American nobility.


Somewhat below these Himalayan heights of affluence there were
hundreds of thousands of Americans who might have been classified
as rich, prosperous, or well-to-do--ranging from the families of
the less glitteringly successful manufacturers, merchants, and
businessmen, and the top-of-the-heap professional men, down the
income scale to the families of, let us say, minor business
executives, shopkeepers, run-of-the-mill lawyers and doctors, and
the better-paid professors and ministers.  Naturally any group so
inclusive and ill-defined as this represents at any time such a
great diversity of occupations, incomes, and modes of life that to
generalize about it is risky.  What, one might ask, did a family
with a 1900 income of $20,000 (equivalent to something like $60,000
net today, or $100, 000 before taxes) have in common with a family
with a 1900 income of only $2,500 (equivalent to something like
$8,500 today before taxes)?  Or what did an ill-educated but canny
speculator in street-railway stocks, who delightedly leaped into
sudden wealth and bought the best trotting horse in town, but still
was free with the toothpick, have in common with the members of old
families who were trying to maintain a polite mode of life of which
he had no inkling?  Yet for all their variety, most of the members
of this group--which we might very loosely identify as the upper
middle class--did have one thing in common, as we look back at them
today.  Though many of them suffered intermittently from acute
financial worry, their general position seems to people of similar
status today to have been amply comfortable.

One reason for this becomes apparent the moment one begins to
translate 1900 income into 1950 income.  Assuming that the cost of
living tripled in the interval, one figures at first that, let us
say, the holder of a professorship which paid $3,000 a year in 1900
would have to receive $9,000 a year in 1950 to be as well off; but
this calculation takes no account of income taxes: actually, the
1950 professor would have to receive $9,000 AFTER TAXES, or
probably between $10,000 and $11,000 before taxes, to be as well
heeled as his predecessor was.  The chances are slim that the
salary of his professorship has jumped at that rate.  The same
thing holds for a great many salaried jobs in businesses and other
professions; and for the income from any but the most cannily
chosen and carefully watched securities.  By and large, salaried
people and those living on inherited means or on savings have lost
financial ground as a result of our progressive inflation.

A further advantage these people undoubtedly had over their
comparably circumstanced grandchildren.  They had more room to turn
round in.

Because wages in the building trades--and the costs of building
materials--were much lower than today, they could live in much
larger quarters.  Because servants' wages were much lower and
candidates for servants' jobs were in abundance, they could staff
these larger quarters amply.  Furthermore they were spared many of
the expenses which most of their descendants take as a matter of
course: the cost of an automobile (much greater than that of a
horse and carriage); the cost of such extra gadgets as electric
refrigerators, washing machines, radios, television sets, or what
not; the cost of a college education for children of both sexes;
and very likely the cost of an extra home for week-end or summer
use.  (As we have seen, fewer reasonably well-to-do Americans had
"summer places" then than now.)  So the man whose salary now would
command a rather cramped apartment might then have occupied a house
which today would seem grandly large.

Wherever you may live today, you probably know some street which at
the turn of the century was the abode of the prosperous and which
has not been wholly rebuilt since then.  As you walk along it, you
may wonder how anybody with an income of less than princely size
could have afforded to live in one of those big houses (most of
which have probably been broken up into apartments within the past

Take, for example, Commonwealth Avenue in Boston, from Arlington
Street to Massachusetts Avenue, which in the main looks today very
much as it did in 1900.  Consider that although its residents in
those days included many of the very rich, there could not have
been enough very rich Bostonians to occupy all those hundreds of
brick four-story-and-basement houses.  Look at the hulking corner
mansions, three windows or more wide on the Avenue side and five or
six windows wide on the side street.  Look at some of the extra-
width houses in mid-block, with broad steps leading up to a front
door flanked on either side by two amply-spaced windows.  Or glance
at the much more numerous houses of comparatively modest dimensions--
a frontage on the Avenue of something like twenty-five feet, with
only a single bay window beside the front door; even these lesser
buildings have four stories above the basement, and must have
contained some fifteen to twenty rooms, plus several bathrooms and
many ample-sized closets and storage rooms.  You may be sure that
some of these houses were occupied in 1900 by families with incomes
of well under ten thousand dollars a year--the equivalent of forty
thousand or less before taxes today.  That is a handsome income,
but it won't command in the nineteen-fifties anything like so much
space on the finest street of a big city.  How did these families

Here are some of the answers.  They employed a cook at perhaps $5 a
week, a waitress at $3.50 a week, a laundress at $3.50 a week; the
waitress and laundress shared the upstairs work.  They could add
the once-a-week services of a cleaning woman to come in at $1.50 a
day, and also the very part-time muscle of a choreman who served
several other houses, and they would still be able to keep up the
house (and get most of their laundry done at home, too) at a total
annual cost of perhaps $800 a year--the equivalent of say $2,400
today.  Some of the clothes for the women of the family were bought
ready-made in the stores, or were made by professional dressmakers
who had their own establishments, but the chances are that most of
them were run up at home by dressmakers and seamstresses who came
in at $3.50 to $1.50 a day.  (One room would be set aside for this
work; the floor would be covered with a sheet, which by the end of
the day would be littered with pins and snippets of cloth; and here
the dressmaker, with the aid of French fashion books and patterns,
would improvise and fit the dresses.)  Even when one added the cost
of materials bought by the yard, clothes thus made were not
expensive.  This family probably owned no carriage, but got about
on foot and by trolley--or, in bad weather or on festive occasions,
by hired cab.

The head of the house would probably have been outraged if his
daughter had even thought of taking a job: wasn't he able to
support her?  But on the other hand he saved money on her
education.  She would go to a private school, but in all
probability not to college, though her brother would be sent to
college as a matter of course, and perhaps would go to boarding
school as well.

With these various savings such a family would be able to live a
life of spacious and well-served comfort.  And because the house
was so large, they would accumulate more possessions--furniture,
rugs, ornaments, pictures, books, china, silver, linen, and
keepsakes of every sort--than their grandchildren would ever dream
of burdening themselves with.

The pattern varied endlessly, of course, by communities and
according to individual tastes.  Even in a row of almost identical
houses, the scale and manner of living were anything but
standardized; in order to underline the contrast with present
conditions, I have been describing the living scheme of the sort of
people who preferred space and service to other comforts.  Wages
and prices tended to be lower in the smaller communities, and wages
in particular were still lower in the South.  Well-to-do families
in the West were less likely to send their children to private
schools than their counterparts in the East.  But this was the
general nature of life among the comfortably prosperous.

One should add, too, by way of a footnote, that such a way of
living could be approximated by people who had much smaller incomes
with which to gratify their genteel tastes.  A college professor on
a salary of $2,000 to $3,000, for example--roughly equivalent to
$6,500 to $10,500 today before taxes--had to watch every penny and
forego many satisfactions which he felt were the natural right of
well-educated people, but he could afford a fair-sized house and at
least one maid.  In 1896, when Professor Woodrow Wilson of
Princeton was trying to persuade Professor Frederick Jackson Turner
to join the Princeton faculty, Mrs. Wilson set down a reasonable
budget for a professor on a $3,500 salary.  It included food and
lights, $75 a month; rent, $42 a month; coal, $12 a month; water,
$4 a month; and servants, $29 a month.  This was for two servants,
and was presumably figured at a rate of $3.50 a week per servant.

By dint of the most scrupulous economy it was even possible for a
family with an income of only $1,500 (read perhaps $4,800 today) to
play a part as a "member of society" in a town of 20,000 people,
living in a modest two-story house on the best street in town,
employing a full-time colored maid who came in for the day at $4 a
week, entertaining graciously though modestly, and being invited to
the most enviable functions of the local elite.  Such a family
could afford no travel at all; for us in the automobile age it is
difficult to realize how circumscribed geographically was their
life.  But within limits they could follow, without great
discomfort, the pattern of the prosperous.

Elderly people who look back today upon childhoods lived under any
of the circumstances which I have just been describing sometimes
regard them with nostalgia.  Life seems to have been much simpler
in its demands then, and certain of the amenities seem to have been
much more accessible.  It was easier then than now, these people
feel, to maintain a sense of the identity of the family.  People
who live in ample houses are better able to take care of old or
invalid or ineffective relatives than families with less space at
their command.  Indeed it is quite possible that part of the social
security problem of our time--the widely expressed need for
pensions, medical insurance, unemployment insurance, etc.--arises
out of the fact that many families no longer can shelter those whom
they used to consider their dependents--grandma, who used to have a
third-floor room, or eccentric Cousin Tom, who was tucked away in
the ell.  (Part of the problem today, of course, results from what
inflation has done to savings, and still more of it is a product of
the revolution in social concepts which this book is attempting to
outline.)  Even when one makes every allowance for the many good
things of today which the prosperous of 1900 (and those who
approximated their way of life) had to go without, one must admit
that there is a basis for the nostalgia.  Space and service add up
to a good deal.

Yet we must remember that the Commonwealth Avenue family's ample
life in their big house was made possible by the meager wages of
the maids who lived in narrow rooms at the very top of the house,
four flights above the level on which they did most of their
interminable work; by the meager wages of dressmakers and
seamstresses, of the carpenters and masons who had built the house,
of the workers in factories and stores who produced and sold the
goods they used; and that the space and service which were at the
disposal of even the $1,500 family were likewise made possible by
low wages.  There is another side of the shield to be looked at.

Let us travel clear to the other end of the economic and social
spectrum--by-passing on the way the majority of the Americans of
1900--and take a glance at life as it was lived on the other side
of the tracks.

Chapter 3

The Other Side of the Tracks

In the early days of the factory system in England, David Ricardo
enunciated the grim principle which he called the Iron Law of
Wages; the principle that all wages tend to fall to the level which
the most unskillful or most desperate man will accept.  In pre-
industrial times this law had not often operated unchecked.  The
prince, or the baron, or the squire, or the neighbors had tended to
look after those who by reason of incompetence or illness or
adversity were in want.  And in the United States of pre-industrial
days, men and women who were in cruel straits--whose crops had
failed, or whose trade was dwindling, or whose family store had
gone broke--had at least been able to go on working, for whatever
pittance they could command, or could move on elsewhere to try
again.  But the coming of industrialism had brought a change, in
America as well as in Europe.

For when a man built a mill or factory, around which there grew up
a mill village or factory town, those who came to work for him were
in great degree imprisoned by their choice.  They did not own the
tools with which they worked, and therefore were dependent upon
what employment the mill offered; and anyhow there was not enough
work in such a community for all who would be looking for it if the
mill shut down.  And if their wages were really low they could not
afford to look elsewhere for jobs.  So they ceased to be free
agents.  They were at their employer's mercy.  The code of conduct
of the day did not require him to feel any responsibility for what
happened to them.  And the Iron Law really went into action.

Likewise in a city slum into which there flowed a steady stream of
newcomers from abroad--almost penniless people, ignorant, inexpert,
often friendless, and unable to speak the language of the country--
men and women were likewise imprisoned by circumstance.
Theoretically there were all manner of occupations open to them;
theoretically they were dependent upon no single employer.  But in
practice poverty, limited skills, and ignorance kept them--the
great majority of them--where they were, year after year, to battle
fiercely for chances to earn a living, and to accept whatever
miserable wage was offered to them.  Here too the Iron Law ruled.

Nowhere in the United States, in the middle years of the nineteenth
century, had the Iron Law brought quite such abominations as it had
produced in England, where the wages, hours of work, and sanitary
conditions in the new industrial towns and the mining areas had
been a stench in the nostrils of decency; but in all conscience
they had been bad enough.  For in the second quarter of the
nineteenth century wages had fallen in the mill towns of New
England until by 1850 whole families were laboring at the machines
for three or four dollars a week per worker; a twelve-hour day was
average, and a fourteen-hour day was not unusual; there were even
children of what we would consider junior high school age who had
to spend the hours from five o'clock in the morning till eight
o'clock at night--with half an hour off for breakfast and half an
hour for dinner--six days a week, in an ill-lighted, ill-ventilated
factory, foregoing sunshine, recreation, education, and health
itself to keep the family alive; and all this even if the employer
was raking in high profits.  It had been conditions such as these,
appearing wherever the new industrial capitalism seemed to be
making its most active forward progress, that had prompted Karl
Marx to see if he could not invent a different system.

During the latter half of the nineteenth century, industrialism had
advanced with mighty strides in the United States.  A remarkable
series of inventions and technological improvements had sparked its
progress.  By 1900 what had formerly been a land mostly of farmers
and villagers had become a land increasingly of cities and roaring
industrial towns; and comforts, conveniences, and wealth had so
piled up that it almost seemed as if a whole new world had been
invented for people to work and play in.  But the wealth still
tended to flow into a few people's pockets.

During most of this incredible half century, to be sure, the
general standard of living in the United States had happily shown
considerable improvement.  Prosperity had tended to sift down
through the ranks of society and to improve the conditions of life
for the great majority of Americans.  For instance, economists
calculated that between 1860 and 1891, wages in twenty-two
industries had increased on the average over 68 per cent, while
wholesale prices had declined over 5 per cent.  Those figures
represented a real gain.  But during the hideous depression of the
mid-nineties wages had been widely slashed; and, although there had
been some improvement in the lot of the workers afterward, as good
times returned toward the turn of the century (an improvement, at
least, in their chances of regular employment) there was no further
gain in the trend of what the economists call "real wages," which
is to say wages as measured against prices.  What was happening to
prevent the new wealth which the millionaires were so happily
raking in, and from which millions of Americans in the middle
economic ranks were directly or indirectly benefiting, from
percolating all the way down to the lower levels of American

One thing that was happening was that the good American land was
filling up.  Traditionally, when the American workingman's position
had become intolerable, he could always go west--if he could raise
the cash to go.  The West had been the land of new hope, not only
for men of adventurous ambition, but also for the discards of
industrialism.  But now the frontier was closed, and though there
were still chances for a man to arrive in the West with nothing and
then to achieve comfort, these chances seemed to be dwindling.  And
a second thing that was happening was that the United States was
continually importing a proletariat of such size, and such limited
employability for the time being, that the labor market in the
large cities and industrial towns was glutted and the wage level
was held down.

Throughout most of the nineteenth century this proletariat had been
coming across the Atlantic.  For a time it had been mostly Irish:
in the eighteen-forties and -fifties it had been the Irish who were
the diggers of ditches, the builders of levees, the mill workers
who labored twelve or thirteen or fourteen hours a day for a
microscopic wage.  Then, as the Irish began to better themselves,
the Italians had begun to pour in.  And then, increasingly, the
Jews and Slavs of Eastern Europe.  As each group arrived, it tended
to form a proletarian level under the previous one.  (Always at or
near the bottom, in menial and ill-paid jobs, remained our Negro
population, slaves no longer, but condemned nevertheless to a
servitude of ignorance and exclusion from opportunity.)

Little by little, most of the members of these foreign groups
caught the contagion of freedom and ambition in the American air
and began to lift themselves out of poverty.  But as they did so,
their places on the lowest economic level were taken by still newer
immigrants, lured from Europe by the glowing reports (sometimes
fictitious) of relatives and fellow townsmen who had preceded them,
or by the bright promises held out by industrial agents.  So fast
did they come that they filled up the slums of New York and Boston
and Philadelphia and Chicago, and the factory towns of New England
and Pennsylvania and Ohio, more rapidly than American opportunity
could drain them off.  During the single year 1900, the number of
immigrants who arrived was 448,572; during 1901 it was 487,918; the
figure kept on rising until in 1907 it reached a peak of 1,285,349.
Here was irony indeed: so brightly did the Goddess of Liberty's
lamp glow, with its promise of hope to the dispossessed of many
lands, that the very numbers in which they answered its invitation
tended to keep the wage level down, not only for these new arrivals
but for native-born Americans as well, and delayed the modification
of the Iron Law.

(Incidentally, a certain tendency among many Americans, then and
later, to be arrogant or condescending toward Europeans may be
partly due to the fact that for generations almost the only
Europeans that the average native-born American saw were poor,
ignorant, ill-dressed, and often dirty members of this imported
proletariat, jabbering in incomprehensible tongues while they did
menial jobs.  They were scornfully known as Dagoes, Polacks,
Hunkies, Kikes.  As they bettered themselves, they became in most
cases less Italian or Polish or Serbian or Czech or Russian, more
American; and so the unfavorable image of Europeans in the American
mind persisted.)

But, one may ask, what about those traditional foes of the Iron
Law, the labor unions?  The answer is that they were few and--
except in a few favored crafts--weak; that they existed in peril of
the law, which in general upheld the notion that what an employer
chose to pay a man, and what that man chose to accept, were those
two men's business and nobody else's; and that they were generally
viewed by the rest of the public with fear and dislike.

In 1900 the total trade union membership came to 868,500; of these,
the unions in the American Federation of Labor claimed 548,321.  In
a few successfully organized trades, such as the cigar makers',
their pressures had pushed wages up.  Robert A. Woods of the South
End House in Boston, a scrupulously careful observer, reported in
1902 that unskilled laborers in Boston were making from $9 to $12 a
week--when work was available; skilled labor artisans in general
were making $13.50 to $19.50--again with "some lost time"; but
cigar makers, by contrast, were making $15 to $25, with "little
lost time."  The head man of the AF of L was a cigar maker himself,
Samuel Gompers, a thickset, strong-jawed, wide-mouthed man with
unruly hair and rimless pince-nez glasses who took a strictly
limited view of the aims which the unions under his influence
should pursue.  In his youth Gompers had learned German in order to
read the works of Marx; but since then he had seen American
unionism so often weakened by the impracticality of revolutionary
theorists, and by the hatred that their imported revolutionary
theories aroused among the public at large, that he stuck rigidly
to the principles of craft--as opposed to industrial--unionism,
opposed any attempt to put his unions into politics (as by forming
a labor party), and bade them bargain only for improvements in
wages, hours, and conditions of work.

But to cite the modest aims which Gompers pursued is to give an
utterly misleading picture of unionism in general at the turn of
the century.  Most big industries were not unionized at all; and
where unions did exist, or where attempts were made to organize the
men, there were likely to be violent, headlong, and bloody
conflicts, with ferocious battles between rebellious workmen on the
one hand, and their implacable employers and the employers' scabs
and perhaps the militia on the other hand.

In 1898, when the United Mine Workers won their first important
strike, a group of them at Virden, Illinois, "armed with shotguns,
revolvers, and rifles, vanquished a trainload of similarly
accoutered strikebreakers and company guards, with great loss of
life on both sides," according to Herbert Harris's history of
American Labor; Mr. Harris adds aptly, "By means of superior
marksmanship, the union was granted all its demands."  That was the
sort of spirit in which labor and capital were more than likely to
be opposed.

Such was the temper of the times that when Oliver Wendell Holmes,
in 1896, dissented from an antipicketing decision of the
Massachusetts Supreme Court, he was convinced that his dissent had
shut him off from all chances of future judicial promotion.  The
decision granted an injunction to a shopkeeper, named Vegelahn, to
prevent two men from picketing outside his shop.  There had been no
suggestion of violence, no threat to physical property;
nevertheless when Holmes suggested that the men were within their
rights in thus advertising that they thought their employer was
unfair, he was propounding what public opinion considered gross

Under such circumstances it is not remarkable that labor unions
had, on the whole, only a minor influence in 1900.  And anyhow they
could not reach down to the very bottom ranks of labor to protect
the men and women on whom poverty bore down most cruelly of all.

There were other reasons than the closing of the frontier, the
flood of immigrants, and the weakness of organized labor for the
fact that the Iron Law still held much of its old force; we shall
come to these in due course.  But it is time for us now to look at
a few of the hard facts of life on the other side of the tracks at
the turn of the century.


Here are a few cold figures:

1.  WAGES.  The AVERAGE annual earnings of American workers, as I
have already said, were something like $400 or $500 a year.  For
unskilled workers they were somewhat less--under $460 in the North,
under $300 in the South.  A standard wage for an unskilled man was
a dollar and a half a day--when he could get work.  That
qualification is important: one must bear in mind that according to
the census of 1900, nearly 6 1/2 million workers were idle (and
therefore, in most cases, quite without income) during some part of
the year; that of these, nearly 2 million were idle four to six
months out of the twelve.

In Boston, Robert A. Woods reported in 1902 that the average wage
of shopgirls in the North and West Ends was from $5 to $6 a week.
In the South, in 1900, nearly a third of the male employees over
sixteen years of age in the cotton mills were getting less than $6
a week.  Nor was this anywhere near the bottom of the scale.
Investigating the condition of Italian workers in Chicago at about
this time, the federal Bureau of Labor found one class of unskilled
laborers who averaged as little as $4.37 a week.  Woods reported
further that in the garment shops of Boston, women were earning
from $5 a week down to $3 a week, and added that "women sewing at
home cannot earn more than 30 cents or 40 cents in a long day"; and
he was echoed by Jacob A. Riis in New York, who reported in 1900
that he had seen women finishing "pants" for 30 cents a day.  Try
translating THAT into the terms of today: even after you have
multiplied it by three to take account of the tripled cost of
living, you arrive at the noble sum of 90 cents a day, which is
$5.40 a week, which is $280.80 for a full working year!

2.  HOURS.  The average working day was in the neighborhood of 10
hours, 6 days a week: total, 60 a week.  In business offices there
was a growing trend toward a Saturday half holiday, but if anybody
had suggested a five-day week he would have been considered
demented.  At the time when the International Ladies' Garment
Workers Union was established in 1900, the hours in this trade, in
New York, were 70 a week.

3.  CHILD LABOR.  Among boys between the ages of ten and fifteen,
no less than 26 per cent--over a quarter--were "gainfully
employed"; among girls in the same age groups, 10 per cent were.
Most of these children were doing farm work, but 284,000 of them
were in mills, factories, etc., during years in which, in any
satisfactorily arranged society, they would have been at school.

4.  ACCIDENTS.  The standards of safety were curiously low from our
present-day point of view.  Consider this set of facts: in the
single year 1901, one out of every 399 railroad employees was
killed, and one out of every 26 was injured.  Among engineers,
conductors, brakemen, trainmen, etc., the figures were even worse
than this: in that single year, one out of every 137 was killed.

The accident hazard could be particularly acute for children
working in industrial plants.  "In the large stamping works and
canning factories in a city like Chicago," Professor William O.
Krohn had told the National Conference of Charities and Correction
in 1897, "not a day passes but some child is made a helpless
cripple.  These accidents occur after three o'clock in the
afternoon.  The child that has begun his work in the morning with a
reasonable degree of vigor, after working under constant pressure
for several hours, at about three o'clock becomes so wearied,
beyond the point of recovery, that he can no longer direct the
tired fingers and aching arms with any degree of accuracy.  He thus
becomes the prey of the great cutting knives, or of the jaws of the
tin-stamping machine."

5.  THE HUMAN RESULT.  Robert Hunter's book, Poverty, published in
1904, was a conscientious attempt to define the extent and nature
of the group of people in America who were "underfed, under-
clothed, and poorly housed."*  Hunter defined poverty very
strictly, as a condition in which people, "though using their best
efforts, are failing to obtain sufficient necessaries for
maintaining physical efficiency."  His best guess, after studying
all available statistics, was that there were at least 10 million
of them in the United States, of whom 4 million were public paupers--
people dependent upon public or private charity--while the rest
gained no such relief from their pitiable state.  Hunter admitted
that his figure of 10 million might be far short of the truth;
there might be 15 million, or 20 million.  He was dismayed that a
nation devoted to the use of statistics had not shown real interest
in getting an answer to what seemed to him a vital question.  "BUT
OUGHT WE NOT TO KNOW?" he asked.

* Were these words of Hunter's in Franklin D. Roosevelt's mind in
1937, when in his second inaugural address he said, "I see one-
third of a nation ill-housed, ill-clad, ill-nourished"?


And what did those cold figures mean in human terms?  To read the
reports of qualified observers of poverty at its worst in the big
city slums and the grim industrial towns at the beginning of the
century is to hear variation after variation upon the theme of
human misery, in which the same words occur monotonously again and
again: wretchedness, overcrowding, filth, hunger, malnutrition,
insecurity, want.

"It is impossible to describe the mud, the dirt, the filth, the
stinking humidity, the nuisances, the disorder of the streets,"
wrote G. Giacosa, an Italian dramatist who visited his fellow
countrymen's quarter in New York in 1898.

In March, 1899, the consulting architects of the City of Boston
made a report on certain tenements they had found in the North and
West Ends of the city.  They had found, they said, "dirty and
battered walls and ceilings, dark cellars with water standing in
them, alleys littered with garbage and filth, broken and leaking
drain-pipes, . . . dark and filthy water-closets, closets long
frozen or otherwise out of order . . . and houses so dilapidated
and so much settled that they are dangerous."

Even in far more hygienic quarters the overcrowding could be acute.
M. E. Ravage, arriving as an immigrant from Rumania, became a
tenant, at 50 cents a week, of Mrs. Segal's apartment on Rivington
Street in New York's Lower East Side.  During the day, he reported
later in his book, An American in the Making, Mrs. Segal "kept up
the interesting fiction of an apartment with specialized
subdivisions"--a parlor, a dining room, a kitchen, a young ladies'
room, Mrs. Segal's own room, a children's room.  But at night,
between nine and ten o'clock, the place "suddenly became a camp."
Sofas opened up, carved dining-room chairs were arranged in rows;
the sofa in the parlor alone held four sleepers, broadside, with
rocking chairs arranged to support their feet.  One night the
parlor alone was occupied by nine men, some of them on the floor.
"The pretended children's room was occupied by a man and his family
of four."  The windows had been puttied tight shut, and the air was
"heavy with the reek of food and perspiration."

Far more filthy and insanitary habitations than this were equally
overcrowded.  A few years earlier, Paul Bourget had found in the
Italian part of the Bowery two rooms on the street level, "small as
a boat's cabins," in which eight men and women were "crouched over
their work, in a fetid air, which an iron stove made still more
stifling, and in what dirt!"  And Bourget had gone on to inspect
various workshops in the Jewish quarter, where he had found "hunger-
hollowed faces" and "shoulders narrowed with consumption, girls of
fifteen as old as grandmothers, who had never eaten a bit of meat
in their lives--a long, lamentable succession of the forms of

In 1908 a Hungarian churchman, Count Vay de Vaya und Luskod, told
in a book, Nach Amerika in einem Auswandererschiffe, how the life
of the Hungarian immigrants in the steel town of McKeesport,
Pennsylvania, had looked to him when he had visited the place a few
years earlier.

Fourteen thousand tall chimneys are silhouetted against the sky
along the valley that extends from McKeesport to Pittsburgh, [he
wrote], and these fourteen thousand chimneys discharge their
burning sparks and smoke incessantly.  The realms of Vulcan
could not be more somber or filthy than this valley of the
Monongahela. . . .  Thousands of immigrants wander here from year
to year . . . and here they suffer till they are swallowed up in
the inferno. . . .  Scarce an hour passes without an accident, and
no day without a fatal disaster.  But what if ONE man be crippled,
if ONE life be extinguished among so many!  Each place can be
filled from TEN men, all eager for it.  Newcomers camp out within
sight of the factory gates, while a little farther away others
arrive with almost daily regularity--thousands of immigrants to
don the fetters of slavery.

A surplus of labor, a desperate willingness to take any job, under
whatever conditions, just to fill the stomach: the theme occurs
again and again in the reports of these observers.  Here is Robert
Hunter, writing not about the steel districts of Pennsylvania, but
about Chicago:

On cold, rainy mornings, at the dusk of dawn, I have been awakened,
two hours before my rising time, by the monotonous clatter of
hobnailed boots on the plank sidewalks, as the procession to the
factory passed under my window.  Heavy, brooding men; tired,
anxious women; thinly dressed, unkempt little girls, and frail,
joyless lads passed along, half awake, not one uttering a word, as
they hurried to the great factory. . . .  Hundreds of others,
obviously a hungrier, poorer lot . . . waited in front of a closed
gate until finally a great red-bearded man came out and selected
twenty-three of the strongest, best looking of the men.  For these
the gates were opened, and the others, with downcast eyes, marched
off to seek employment elsewhere or to sit at home, or in a saloon,
or in a lodging house. . . .

Still another note recurs frequently in these reports: the idea
that these dregs of the industrial population, being foreign, were
cut off from the rest of America by their foreignness.

A few years ago [wrote Hunter], when living in Chicago in a colony
of Bohemians and Hungarians who had been thrown out of work by the
closing of a great industry, I went about among the groups
clustered in the streets or gathered in the halls.  I felt the
unrest, the denunciation, the growing brutality, but I was unable
to discuss with them their grievances, to sympathize with them, or
to oppose them.  I was an utter stranger in my own city.

That there were alleviating aspects of these miserable scenes even
these very chroniclers agreed.  That even the hungriest people were
better dressed than one might have expected struck almost all
visitors from abroad.  Ravage, fresh from Rumania, noted that
almost nobody wore patched garments, and added that ". . . if you
went merely by their dress, you could not tell a bank president
from his office boy."  He was echoing what Giacosa wrote after
riding on a New York elevated train:  "Some elegant Wall Street
bankers are marked by special clothes of English cut.  But with
that exception, no European would be able to pick out by eye who
there represents the infinite variety of professions, trades,
states, fortune, culture, education, that may be encountered among
the whole people."  After visiting the Chicago slaughter houses--
which he found inexpressibly filthy--Giacosa was struck by the
dignified and well-dressed look of the workers when they emerged
from their horrible labors at the end of the day; how very like
Woods's comment on the people who lived in the South End of Boston:
"Among the young men and women, the young women especially, it is
surprising to find what becomingly dressed persons can come out of
really miserable abodes."

Nor should we forget how many of the immigrants in these very slums
found things new to them which delighted them.  Ravage was
pleasantly surprised by finding soap used for everyday purposes;
eggplant and tomatoes in winter; beer, in a pitcher from the corner
saloon.  Mary Antin, as a child newly arrived from Russia, was
entranced with canned foods, iron stoves, washboards, speaking
tubes, and street lamps--"so many lamps, and they burned till
morning, my father said, and so people did not need to carry
lanterns."  Even more wonderful, to her and her parents, was free
public education--"no application made, no questions asked, no
fees."  Her father "brought his children to school as if it were an
act of consecration."

It was quite true, too, that little by little the worst horrors of
the slums were being eliminated.  Investigating commissions,
tenement house commissions, and other groups of the more fortunate
citizens had been aroused by such reports as that of Jacob A. Riis
in his memorable book, How the Other Half Lives, published in 1890.
Ten years later Riis was able to report that in New York the worst
of the rear tenements were gone, the dreadful police-station
lodging rooms were gone, "Bottle Alley is gone, and Bandit's Roost,
Bone Alley, Thieves' Alley, and Kerosene Row--they are all gone."
And it seemed to Riis that by 1900, on the East Side, rags and dirt
had become the exception rather than the rule.  A beginning had
been made in the job of providing parks, playgrounds, and
gymnasiums for the poorer parts of New York.  Not only in New York
but in other cities and states, legislation was nibbling away at
the worst abominations of factory employment and of housing.

Yet, as the floods of immigration continued, and wages obeyed the
Iron Law even though industry was booming, and dirty and
dilapidated habitations acquired new layers of grime and sagged
still further, those who made it their business to wrestle with the
problem of American poverty often felt helpless to bring about any
real improvement.  "The real trouble," wrote Woods, "is that people
here are from birth to death at the mercy of great social forces
which move almost like the march of destiny."  Did not what was
happening make a mockery of the very idea of a democratic society?
"We are witnessing today, beyond question, the decay--perhaps not
permanent, but at any rate the decay--of republican institutions,"
said the sociologist Franklin H. Giddings to the members of the
Nineteenth Century Club.  "No man in his right mind can deny it."

And when Edwin Markham wrote his poem, "The Man with the Hoe,"
which appeared in 1899, even people whose contact with American
poverty had been slight felt a vague sense that a portent had been
described; that in these verses, written by Markham after seeing
Millet's famous painting of a brutalized toiler, they were getting
a picture of what industrialism was doing to the common man and
might, perhaps, do to themselves some day if the social forces
which they had seen in operation were not somehow reversed.
Markham saw the toiler as a man with

     The emptiness of ages in his face,
     And on his back the burden of the world.

Markham asked:

     Who loosened and let down this brutal jaw?

And commented:

     There is no shape more terrible than this--
     More tongued with censure of the world's blind greed--
     More filled with signs and portents for the soul--
     More packed with danger to the universe.

And concluded:

     O Masters, lords and rulers in all lands,
     How will the future reckon with this man?
     How answer his brute question in that hour
     When whirlwinds of rebellion shake all shores?
     How will it be with kingdoms and with kings--
     With those who shaped him to the thing he is--
     When this dumb Terror shall rise to judge the world,
     After the silence of the centuries?*

From the vantage point of the nineteen-fifties one can read those
prophetic lines and declare that they proved not to be prophetic
for the United States.  But surely it was significant that when the
century was beginning a great many Americans were far from sure
that the "dumb Terror," asking his "brute question," would not
cause the "whirlwinds of rebellion" to shake, not only Europe, but
also an America in which such gaudy wealth was contrasted with such
inhuman misery.

* Reprinted by permission.

Chapter 4

Capitalism Indeed

In 1899 there died in New York a man who, though he had never made
much of a study of economics and had a curiously immature mind, may
have had a more pervasive influence on the thinking of American
businessmen at the turn of the century than all the professors of
economics put together.  This man's name was Horatio Alger, Jr.,
and what he had done was to write more than a hundred books for
boys--success stories called Bound to Rise, Luck and Pluck, Sink or
Swim, Tom the Bootblack, and so forth--the total sales of which
came to at least twenty million copies.

Horatio Alger was a creature of paradox.  The unfailing theme of
his books was the rise of earnest, hard-working boys from rags to
riches; yet he himself did not begin life in rags and did not by
any means achieve riches; during his later years he lived mostly in
the Newsboys' Lodging House on one of New York's drearier streets.
His paper-bound guides to success were, and are, generally regarded
by educated readers as trash; they were literal, prosy, unreal, and
unsubtle to a degree.  Yet they were the delight of millions of
American boys during the years between the Civil War and World War
I, and it is possible that most of these boys got from Horatio
Alger their first intelligible picture of American economic life.

The standard Horatio Alger hero was a fatherless boy of fifteen or
thereabouts who had to earn his own way, usually in New York City.
He was beset by all manner of villains.  They tried to sell him
worthless gold watches on railroad trains, or held him up as he was
buggy-riding home with his employer's funds, or chloroformed him in
a Philadelphia hotel room, or slugged him in a Chicago tenement.
But always he was strong and shrewd and brave, and they were
foolish and cowardly.  And the end of each book found our hero well
on the way toward wealth, which it was clear resulted from his
diligence, honesty, perseverance, and thrift.

To the farmer's son, thumbing his copy of Andy Grant's Pluck by
lamplight on the Illinois prairie, or to the country banker's son,
scanning the Brave and Bold series in a Vermont village, the lesson
of Horatio Alger seemed clear: business was a matter of trading
among individuals and small groups of men, and if you worked hard
and saved your money, you succeeded.  The basic principles of
economic conduct were the same as those laid down by Benjamin
Franklin's Poor Richard:

"God helps them that help themselves."

"Early to bed, and early to rise,
Makes a man healthy, wealthy, and wise."

"If we are industrious we shall never starve, for, as Poor Richard
says, At the working man's home, Hunger looks in; but dares not

"A fat Kitchen makes a lean Will."

And, to sum up:  "In short, the way to wealth, if you desire it, is
as plain as the way to market.  It depends chiefly on two words,
industry and frugality."

There was no denying that the Alger thesis had a certain
magnificent validity.  Look at John D. Rockefeller, who had begun
as a $4-a-week clerk in a commission merchant's house in Cleveland,
and by the beginning of the twentieth century was becoming the
richest man in the world.  Look at Andrew Carnegie, who had begun
at thirteen as a $1.20-a-week bobbin boy in a Pittsburgh cotton
mill, and had become the greatest of steel manufacturers.  Look at
Edward H. Harriman, who had begun as a broker's office boy at $5 a
week, and was building a railroad empire.  And as for thrift, look
at the great banker, George Fisher Baker, who not only had begun
his career as a clerk, but during his early married life had
imposed upon himself and his wife the discipline of living on half
their income and saving the other half.  These were only a few of
the examples which proved the formula for success: begin with
nothing, apply yourself, save your pennies, trade shrewdly, and you
will be rewarded with wealth, power, and acclaim.  To which the
natural corollary was: poor people are poor because they are the
victims of their own laziness, stupidity, or profligacy.

Naturally it was pleasant for successful businessmen to believe
that these were, in fact, the first principles of economics.  But,
one might ask, hadn't they learned in the classroom that economics
is just a little more complex than that?

To this question there are two answers.  The first is that mighty
few of the tycoons of 1900 had ever studied economics.  Take, for
instance, eight of the most successful of all: John D. Rockefeller,
Carnegie, Harriman, and Baker, whom we have just mentioned; and
also J. Pierpont Morgan, William Rockefeller, James Stillman, and
H. H. Rogers.  Of these eight, only Morgan had had anything
approaching what we today would call a college education; he had
spent two years at the University of Gttingen in Germany, where he
had pretty certainly not studied anything that we would now
classify as economics.  And it is doubtful if even in the prime of
life many of these men, or of their innumerable rivals and
imitators, had much truck with economic science, or thought of
professors of economics as anything but absurdly impractical
theorists.  A man who had come up in the world liked to describe
himself as a graduate of the School of Hard Knocks.  Education was
all right in its way, and you sent your son to college if you
could, if only because it was a good place to make useful contacts
with the right people; but these college professors knew nothing
about business, which was a battlefield for hard-shelled fighters.
And anyhow the principles laid down by Ben Franklin, and somewhat
foolishly simplified for boys by Horatio Alger, were fundamentally

At the turn of the century there were, however, several hundred
thousand Americans who HAD gone to college.  Of these, a somewhat
smaller number had gone to institutions so up-to-date as to include
economics in the curriculum.  And a still smaller number had
actually studied the subject.  What had they been taught about
economic life?

Despite the efforts of men like Richard T. Ely, Charles S. Walker,
Simon N. Patten, and John Bates Clark, during the last quarter of
the nineteenth century, to modernize the science of economics and
bring it into accord with the changing actualities of a new
financial and industrial era, most of these college graduates had
been indoctrinated with the theories of "classical" economics.
These theories were supposed to explain how individual men, or
groups of men, behaved when they bought and sold goods.  The
classical economists had been bemused with the notion that just as
the physicists could expound the laws of nature which accounted for
the behavior of inanimate matter, so they themselves ought to be
able to expound the laws of economics which accounted for the
behavior of economic man in the market place: such as the law of
supply and demand, the law of diminishing returns, and the law that
bad money drives out good.  They assumed, for their theoretical
purposes, that any man, when he did business in the market place,
was animated exclusively by motives of pecuniary self-interest--in
other words, by the selfish love of gain.  They assumed that, under
normal circumstances, men thus motivated would tend in their buying
and selling to produce an equilibrium of supply and demand, thereby
automatically determining how much labor would earn, how much
management would earn, and what would be the return on invested
capital.  They might admit, when pressed, that man was in actual
fact animated by a variety of motives, such as the desire to be in
the swim, the desire to do the decent thing, the desire to look
successfully lavish.  They might also admit that the normal
operations of the market place were being constantly abnormalized
by the efforts of pools, trusts, and holding-company combinations
to enforce monopolies; that battles between rival interests for the
stock-market control of this property or that had violent indirect
effects on the course of other businesses; that tariffs, and
factory laws, and labor conflicts altered or interrupted the
orderly workings of economic law.  But such phenomena as these,
they felt, were "abnormal": it was better to focus one's attention
upon the normal course of the supposedly self-regulating markets.
(It was somewhat as if meteorologists should find it more logical
to concentrate upon the behavior of fair weather than upon the
behavior of storms.)  Furthermore, such present-day concepts as
those of the national economy, the national income, the national
gross product, and the interdependent functioning of economic
groups, had not yet entered their thinking; the principles they
propounded dealt with the behavior of individual, independent units
of mankind.

Fascinated by the laws they had discovered, these classical
economists tended to feel that anything which upset these laws was
bad.  In short, they taught the economics of laissez faire.
Everything worked best when you let it alone.  Even the gentlest
and most amiable of men, for instance, would proclaim that
"legislative interference with wages and hours" was "an

Nobody expounded the folly of tampering with the laws of economics
more eloquently than Yale's great teacher of political economy, the
dynamic William Graham Sumner.  In his book What Social Classes Owe
to Each Other, published in 1883, he had put the reformers to rout.
"The yearning after equality," he had written, "is the offspring of
envy and covetousness, and there is no possible plan for satisfying
that yearning which can do aught else than rob A to give to B;
consequently all such plans nourish some of the meanest vices of
human nature, waste capital, and overthrow civilization."

This emphatically did not mean that Sumner was opposed to a better
life for everybody.  On the contrary, as a man of high and generous
principle--he had begun his working life as a clergyman--he was
heartily in favor of it.  But he believed in the wider extension of
opportunity, not in changing the rules under which business was
conducted.  He argued that

instead of endeavoring to redistribute the acquisitions which have
been made between the existing classes, our aim should be to
civilization.  Every old error or abuse which is removed opens new
chances for development to all the new energy of society.  Every
improvement in education, science, art or government expands the
chances of man on earth.  Such expansion is no guarantee of
equality.  On the contrary, if there be liberty, some will profit
by the chances eagerly and some will neglect them altogether.
Therefore, the greater the chances, the more unequal will be the
fortune of these two sets of men.  So it ought to be, in all
justice and right reason.

Sumner would not have argued that there were not some ways in which
legislation could protect the economically helpless.  But he
thought that most reform legislation was conceived in ignorance and
drafted in folly.  "You need not think it necessary," he would tell
his Yale classes, "to have Washington exercise a political
providence over the country.  God has done that a good deal better
by the laws of political economy."

Sumner was in dead earnest, just as John D. Rockefeller was when he
said, "God gave me my money."  The laws of economics were benign.
All you needed to do was to let them work unhindered.  If they
seemed to shower benefits upon one man while others scrabbled for
crumbs outside the back door of the restaurant, that was part of
God's design.

The irony of the situation lay in the fact that for generations men
had been tinkering with economic law to their own advantage, and in
the process had produced institutions which were emphatically not
God's work--as most of Sumner's hearers presumably supposed them to
be--but man's.  The corporation, for instance, was not an invention
of God's.  It was an invention of man's.  It was a creature of the
state: its privileges, its limitations, were defined by
legislation.  As put to work for the furtherance of industry and
business in general, the corporation was one of the great
inventions of the nineteenth century: an instrument of incalculable
value.  Yet, by taking adroit advantage of the legislative acts
which defined its privileges, one could play extraordinary tricks
with it.  Corporate devices could be used to permit A to rob B--or,
let us say, more charitably, to permit A to drain off all the gravy
in sight and leave none for B.  And it was a little foolish to
defend such devices on the ground that one must let economic nature
take its course.

It was largely as a result of the discovery of tricks that could be
played with corporations, and particularly with their capital
stock, that the wealth produced in such a tremendous spate at the
turn of the century flowed in large proportion into a few well-
placed hands.  While the eyes of boys in Economics A were fastened
upon the benignity of the law of supply and demand, the eyes of
corporation lawyers and their clients were fastened upon the
benignity of the New Jersey Holding-company Act.  Most of these
gentlemen would have regarded an income tax, let us say, as a flat
transgression by man of economic law.  But few of them regarded the
Holding-company Act in any such light, even though it made the
theoretical rewards of capital, as defined by the classical
economists, look trifling.

I once amused myself by studying a number of Horatio Alger's
stories to see how the young hero ultimately became rich.  Clearly,
his initial steps up the ladder of success were the direct fruits
of his own industrious labor.  These might lift him from five
dollars a week to ten dollars a week.  But that was not quite
wealth.  And I noticed that at the end of the book he had a way of
getting his hands on capital.

Sometimes this capital was inherited: the supposed orphan, ragged
though he was, proved to be the son of a man whose mining stock,
previously considered worthless, was good for $100,000.  Sometimes
the capital was a gift: the boy's pluck made such a good impression
upon rich Mr. Vanderpool that the old fellow made over to him the
$50,000 that the boy had helped him to save from the robbers.  Or
the boy befriended an invalid gentleman in a Tacoma hotel, and out
of gratitude this gentleman gave him a part interest in some house
lots which promptly soared in value.  The method varied; but when
the time came for our hero to get into the money, it was a
transaction in capital which won the day for him.

Manifestly the lesson of these books was not supposed to be that
hard work brings in but a pittance and that the way to succeed is
to stand in with the rich.  The lesson was rather that capital
comes as a reward from heaven to him who labors mightily, puts his
pennies in the savings bank, and shuns the fleshpots.  Work, save,
be a good boy, and presently the railroad stock will fall into your
lap and all will be well.

Perhaps the Horatio Alger stories help to explain to us why it was
that a generation of businessmen who sincerely believed that wealth
was the fruit of virtue and poverty the fruit of indolence, and
that one should not tinker with economic law, were simultaneously
shaping economic and social institutions which often seemed to
follow quite different--and much more dynamic--principles.  Let us
look at some of these institutions.


In 1900 capitalism was capitalism indeed.  Businesses were run by
their owners, the people who had put up or had acquired the capital
with which to finance them.  There was very little of what Paul
Hoffman has called the "diffusion of decision-making power."  It
would have seemed wildly irrational that a man should manage the
destinies of a corporation while owning only a minute fraction of
its stock, as so frequently happens today.  Only two-thirds of the
manufactured products of the country were made by corporations; the
other third were made by partnerships or individual proprietors.
No corporation in the country had over 60,000 stockholders;
American Telephone and Telegraph, which by 1951 could boast a
million of them, had in 1900 only 7,535.  The Pennsylvania Railroad
had 51,543; the Union Pacific, 14,256; United States Steel, shortly
after its formation in 1901, had 54,016.  These, it must be
understood, were among the big stock-market favorites of the day;
in most concerns, ownership was concentrated in far fewer hands.
Witness, for example, Carnegie's personal holding of 58 1/2 per
cent of the stock of his huge Carnegie Steel Company.

The head of a company was likely to be a man who had started with
an idea and some money to finance it--either his own money or his
friends'; or else, if the concern were older, he might be the
inheritor or purchaser of most of its capital stock.  If the
company were a large one whose shares were listed on the Stock
Exchange, he might have bought a controlling interest in the course
of stock-market trading.  In any case he was likely to have a sense
of personal proprietorship which few heads of businesses possess
today, except in small or young concerns.  And his freedom to do as
he personally pleased with this working property of his was only
slightly restricted either by law or by custom.  The very idea of a
"managerial revolution" would have been unintelligible to him.  The
business belonged to him, didn't it?

In many cases he felt that how he ran it was nobody else's affair.
Some companies made ample reports to their minority stockholders,
but others made scanty ones, and some made none at all.  During the
years between 1897 and 1905 the Westinghouse Company apparently
held no annual meeting of stockholders.  The United States Express
Company held no meetings and made no report, year after year.  The
American Sugar Refining Company--a big concern with over 10,000
stockholders--reported nothing at all to them; all one could find
out about its operations was contained in a balance sheet filed
with the Secretary of State of Massachusetts in order that it might
hold its corporate license to do business--and this balance sheet
consisted merely of four generalized items of assets and three of
liabilities.  When John D. Archbold, who had succeeded John D.
Rockefeller as active head of the great Standard Oil Company, got
hold of an advance copy of a governmental report advocating more
publicity about corporate affairs, he commented to Senator Boies
Penrose:  "Private corporations should not be required to make
public items of receipts and expenditures, profits and losses.  A
statement of assets and liabilities is all that can benefit the
public.  Items of receipts and expenditures, profits and losses can
only benefit the competitors."

If even minority stockholders had no business to know what was
going on, still less did the government or the courts.  The records
of governmental investigations and of court trials during the last
years of the nineteenth century are full of instances of men saying
over and over again on the witness stand, as William Rockefeller
did in a railroad rate case, "I decline to answer on advice of
counsel."  In this particular case the lawyer who was questioning
him pursued the matter, and the following colloquy took place:

"On the ground that the answer will incriminate you?"

"I decline to answer on advice of counsel."

"Or is it that the answer will subject you to some forfeiture?"

"I decline to answer on the advice of counsel."

"Do you decline on the ground that the answer will disgrace you?"

"I decline to answer on the advice of counsel."

"Did your counsel tell you to stick to that one answer?"

"I decline to answer on the advice of counsel."

There was a general laugh, in which Rockefeller himself joined.
But he was not simply amusing himself.  Nor was he necessarily
covering up anything specifically wrong.  He was preventing people
from sticking their heads into what was not their business, but
private business; and this should be secret.

There had long been professional stock-market operators who had
bought and sold the control of businesses--of railroads especially--
almost as if they were counters in a game.  These operators might
be quite innocent of any concern about the company's actual
operations, and might interest themselves only in making a profit
in buying and selling it.  The greatest railroad enterpriser of the
early years of the twentieth century, E. H. Harriman, had begun his
career as a stockbroker, and had first got into railroading when he
bought a controlling interest in the shares of a weak railroad with
the idea of renovating the property and selling it at a profit to
either the Pennsylvania or the New York Central--which he did a few
years later.  That was one way of operating; there were others of a
less laudable nature.  One favorite one, of which the most
formidable practitioner had been Jay Gould, was to buy control of a
company, then cause it to make contracts which sucked money out of
its treasury into some other concern to which one had personal
access; and then, after thus squeezing the juice out of it, to sell
out, leaving the company a financial wreck.  During the latter half
of the nineteenth century many slick traders had bought, used, and
thrown away railroad properties almost as casually as if they were
paper cups.

If one got proper legal advice, or could bribe a judge to decide in
one's favor, one could do this sort of thing time after time
without running afoul of the law, and without incurring much public
disfavor except among the people whose lives and fortunes had been
directly brought to ruin by one's action.  The attitude among other
citizens was likely to be, "Well, I don't think I'd do a thing like
that if I were in his place, but after all you've got to admit that
he's smart."

Prominent among those who played games with capital were the stock-
market speculators and manipulators--men to whom a company was not
the people who managed and worked for it, or its buildings and
machines, or the products which these turned out, but merely the
securities which represented its ownership, and the succession of
figures on the stock-market ticker which reflected the going value
of these securities.  Listen to Henry Clews's account of how the
"Standard Oil crowd," a group of speculators headed by Archbold and
Rogers of the Standard Oil Company, so cannily bought and sold the
shares of other concerns--which often had nothing at all to do with
the oil business--that they could manipulate prices at will.  Clews
was no muckracker, but a stalwart defender of Wall Street and its
ways.  But even he was awed by the speculative success of these

With them, [wrote Clews a few years after the twentieth century
opened] manipulation has ceased to be speculation.  Their resources
are so vast that they need only to concentrate upon any given
property in order to do with it what they please. . . .  They are
the greatest operators the world has ever seen, and the beauty of
their method is the quietness and lack of ostentation with which
they carry it on.  There are no gallery plays, there are no scare
heads in the newspapers, there is no wild scramble or excitement.
With them the process is gradual, thorough, and steady, with never
a waver or break.  How much money this group of men have made it is
impossible even to estimate.  That it is a sum beside which the
gain of the most daring speculator of the past was a mere bagatelle
is putting the case mildly.  And there is an utter absence of
chance that is terrible to contemplate.

Sometimes the efforts of two competing groups of men to get control
of a given property by means of buying on the Stock Exchange had
convulsive effects.  In the spring of 1901, for instance, the
Morgan forces and the Harriman forces were both trying to acquire
the Burlington Railroad--Morgan, in order to supplement the
Northern Pacific system, which his group controlled; Harriman, in
order to supplement his Union Pacific system.  Harriman conceived
the bold idea of accomplishing this end by buying the control of
the Northern Pacific itself out of his unwary rivals' hands.  He
bought Northern Pacific stock quietly and rapidly.  The Morgan
forces, taking belated alarm, in turn bought furiously.  Numerous
Wall Street speculators, seeing what looked to them like an
unwarranted rise in the price of Northern Pacific stock, sold short
(that is, sold Northern Pacific stock which they didn't own, in the
hopes of buying it later at a lower price for subsequent delivery).
The result was that the Morgan and Harriman forces, between them,
bought more stock than existed.  The price of Northern Pacific on
the ticker leaped to 1,000; there was a panic as the frantic short
sellers sold everything they possessed in order to save themselves.

To us today such a cause for panic would be inconceivable; the
operations of the stock market are so hedged about with
restrictions that nothing of the sort could happen.  But in 1901
the buyers and sellers of capital could do almost as they pleased
with it, no matter how much damage a collision between them might
bring about.

Most businessmen believed in competition--theoretically.  But in
practice there was a ceaseless search for ways in which to prevent
it, so that rival companies in an industry might all jack up their
prices and enlarge their profits.  Again and again the heads of
various steel companies, let us say, would form a "pool"--make an
agreement not to sell below a certain price.  But often--as one
industrialist put it--such agreements lasted only as long as it
took the quickest man in the group to get to a telegraph office and
quote a lower price in order to grab business from the others.  So
the search went on for a way of making agreements that would stick.

In 1879 John D. Rockefeller's lawyer, Samuel C. T. Dodd, found one.
He got the owners of forty different oil companies to put their
stock into the hands of a group of trustees (headed by Rockefeller),
who could then operate all forty companies as a unit, charging what
they pleased and forcing their competitors to the wall; hence the
term "trust."  During the eighteen-eighties there appeared a sugar
trust, a butcher trust, a rubber trust, and many others.  But so
ferocious was the outcry of protest from rival businessmen against
the trusts--and from the gouged public too--that the legislators
went to work to outlaw such practices, the most famous of their
legislative products being the Sherman Antitrust Act of 1890.

Yet even this obstacle to the consolidation of competing businesses
did no more than delay the trend temporarily.  For a Supreme Court
sympathetic with big business interpreted the Act very narrowly for
many years.  And anyhow, meanwhile another lawyer had made another
corporate invention.

In 1889 the Governor of New Jersey had asked a lawyer named James
B. Dill to suggest a way of fattening the state's treasury.  Dill
had suggested that a neat way to do this would be to pass a New
Jersey law permitting companies incorporated in New Jersey to buy
and hold the stock of other corporations--something which up to
that time had generally been held illegal.  The New Jersey
legislature acted; there was a rush to incorporate companies in New
Jersey; the state accordingly made a lot of money out of
incorporation fees.  And before long a new era of American
capitalism began.

For now a group of competing companies no longer needed to form a
trust in order to combine themselves into a giant concern which
would command the market and choke off competition.  They could
organize a new corporation, a holding company which would buy the
stock of their various companies--or, more strictly, exchange its
shares for theirs--and this holding company would thereupon control
the operations of all of them.

During the last years of the nineteenth century there was a furious
epidemic of holding-company incorporations, and it raged most
spectacularly in the steel industry.  The manufacturers of wire got
together to form the American Steel & Wire Company.  Another group
of producers got together to form the American Tube Company;
another, to form the American Tin Plate Company, and so on.  At
last, in the winter of 1900-1901, the combinations in turn
combined.  A new super-holding company was organized which
exchanged its shares for those of these new consolidated concerns--
and even bought, too, the control of Andrew Carnegie's hitherto
independent steel company, and also some Rockefeller iron mines--
thus bringing into one vast unit about three-fifths of the steel
production of the entire country.  This new giant was called the
United States Steel Corporation.  It was breathtakingly huge--the
biggest business unit that the world had ever seen.

The rush to form such holding-company combinations, not only in the
steel industry but elsewhere too, was enormously accelerated by the
fact that you could make big money out of them, and quickly.  For
it was discovered that the public could be encouraged to buy the
shares of the combinations at prices far exceeding the total prices
of the shares of the individual component companies.  Each time
there was a combination, the value of shares leaped.  A man who had
held the controlling interest in a small steel company--perhaps a
struggling one--suddenly found himself the owner of a valuable
block of shares of, let us say, American Tin Plate; and then, only
a couple of years later, of a far more valuable block of shares of
United States Steel.  Millions of dollars appeared as if from
nowhere and fell into his hands.  No wonder that Pittsburgh was
full of new millionaires; that the city became, as Herbert N.
Casson put it, "a Klondike for artists, book agents, curio dealers,
and merchants who had expensive gewgaws for sale"; and that one of
the beneficiaries of the consolidation boom "ordered a special
brand of half-dollar cigars made in Cuba, each with his name and
coat of arms on the wrapper."  The bankers and promoters who
launched the new issues of stock of these great combinations
profited even more hugely.  The total profit of the syndicate which
put United States Steel on the market came to about $60,000,000, of
which the share of J. P. Morgan & Company, which managed the great
transaction, came to at least $12,000,000.

One could argue that the inflated value put upon the stock of these
new monsters of industry was quite unjustified; that what these
huge profits represented was a capitalization of the hoped-for
earning capacity of the new companies for a decade or even a
generation to come.  One could argue that the basic aim of such
consolidations was simply monopoly, and in some cases the result
certainly was monopoly, though not in all.  But another idea was
working too; the idea of integration, of making a single efficient
unit out of a multiplicity of fragments.  Although the public
outcry against what people still called "the trusts" continued, and
although now there was a rising note of fear in it--the fear that
big business would gain such a stranglehold on the country that the
small enterpriser would be stifled--nevertheless there was a
magnificence about these new giants of industry that provoked
admiration along with fear.  For by integrating operations and
cutting costs, the new consolidated companies opened the way to
economical mass production.  In the process of playing highly
remunerative games with the tokens that represented capital, the
bankers and the steel men had introduced into America something
new: twentieth-century industry, undisciplined still, but full of


Two more things remain to be noted about the giant corporations.
One is that in their formation, individual men of wealth, as
against institutions, played a part far bigger than would be
expected today.  For instance, the syndicate which launched the
issue of Steel Corporation stock in the spring of 1901 included
approximately three hundred participants.  Of the twenty-six
leading ones, only four were institutions (J. P. Morgan & Co., the
First National Bank of New York, the New York Security & Trust Co.,
and Kidder, Peabody & Co. of Boston); the remaining twenty-two were
individuals.  The four leading members were all individuals: the
two Moore brothers, William H. and James H.; William B. Leeds; and
Daniel G. Reid.  American business was not as institutionalized as
it is today; the rich man counted for more, the rich institution
for less.

The other thing to be noted is the sort of men these combinations
brought to the top.  Take this new Steel Corporation, for instance.
Andrew Carnegie, who had been first and foremost a steel
manufacturer, was out of it.  The dominant figure in it was not a
steel manufacturer, but a banker--J. Pierpont Morgan.  And his
right-hand man was not a steel manufacturer primarily, but a
corporation lawyer--Judge Elbert H. Gary.

I have said that in that age of unbridled capitalism, a company was
run by the man who owned it, and he tended to be its personal
proprietor.  But unless he was overwhelmingly successful, and also
astute enough to plow his profits back into the property--as Henry
Ford did some years later--there was one group of men of whom he
stood in awe: the bankers.  They commanded the credit he might need
to tide him over lean seasons; and if he had to reorganize his
company or to sell bonds or stock to investors, they had the power
and prestige in the financial world to provide--or deny--a market
for his securities.  To command capital was even more important
than to own capital.

There was also, during the epidemic of holding-company
consolidation, another species of businessman who shot into new
prominence: the promoter.  This man was a sort of marriage broker
for corporations.  He might know little about steel, for instance,
but be able to bring steel companies together.  He knew how to coax
and threaten their owners into combining, and he knew what were the
successive steps that had to be taken to get the new holding
company set up.  There was also the corporation lawyer, who knew
the necessary legal devices.  ("What looks like a stone wall to a
layman," said Finley Peter Dunne's Mr. Dooley, "is a triumphal arch
to a corporation lawyer.")  Morgan was both a promoter and a
banker; Gary was both a promoter and a corporation lawyer.  The
banker and his lawyer aide were becoming the presiding geniuses of
big business.

Indeed as the twentieth century began Pierpont Morgan was becoming
by all odds the most powerful figure in the American world of
business, if not the most powerful citizen of the United States.
He controlled, or at least was highly influential in, the
corporations that ran a number of the most important railroads of
the land; not because he was a railroad man, for he was not, but
because he was a master of the art of financial reorganization, and
when big railroads got into financial trouble, as many of them did
during the depression of the eighteen-nineties, he was the man who
could best put them on their feet again--partly by reason of the
wealth that his firm directly commanded, partly by reason of his
great prestige and moral force in Wall Street, and partly by reason
of his reputation for insisting upon proper management of any
property for which he had raised money.  When Morgan reorganized a
railroad company he either called the tune from then on, or else
listened to the tune and intervened if he didn't like the sound of
it.  He was also a power among bankers; gradually he and his
partners were becoming major factors in the policies of many of the
leading banking houses of New York.  And now, in 1901, he had
become the kingpin of the great steel industry, and was looking
about for more worlds to supervise.  His authority was vague, but
it was immense--and growing.

This gruff, thundering, awe-inspiring man with the hideous red nose
and the piercing eyes--this banker, promoter, churchman, art
collector, yachtsman, and philanthropist--this inwardly shy, deeply
religious, narrowly patrician, and boldly enterprising gentleman
was no believer in competition.  Morgan seemed to feel that the
business machinery of America should be honestly and decently
managed by a few of the best people, people like his friends and
associates.  He liked combination, order, the efficiency of big
business units; and he liked them to operate in a large, bold,
forward-looking way.  He disapproved of the speculative gangs who
plunged in and out of the market, heedless of the properties they
were toying with, as did the Standard Oil crowd.  When he put his
resources behind a company, he expected to stay with it; this, he
felt, was how a gentleman behaved.  His integrity was solid as a
rock, and he said, "A man I do not trust could not get money from
me on all the bonds in Christiandom."  That Morgan was a mighty
force for decent finance is unquestionable.  But so also is the
fact that he was a mighty force working toward the concentration
into a few hands of authority over more and more of American

When in the spring of 1901 the news broke that he had formed the
Steel Corporation, there was a note of dismay in the comment even
of conservative citizens.  President Hadley of Yale said in a
speech that unless some way could be found to regulate such trusts,
there would be "an emperor in Washington within twenty-five years."
John Brisben Walker, editor of the Cosmopolitan Magazine, which was
then a journal of public affairs, wrote that between the lines of
the Steel Corporation announcement could be read these words:  "The
old competitive system, with its ruinous methods, its countless
duplications, its wastefulness of human effort, and its relentless
business warfare, is hereby abolished."  Others feared that if the
trend toward consolidation continued, the public would rebel and
embrace socialism.  Said the Boston Herald editorially, "If a
limited financial group shall come to represent the capitalistic
end of industry, the perils of socialism, even if brought about by
a somewhat rude, because forcible, taking of the instruments of
industry, may be looked upon even by intelligent people as possibly
the lesser of two evils."  The Philadelphia Evening Telegraph
likewise feared the eventual coming of "one of the greatest social
and political upheavals that has been witnessed in modern history."

What irony that the revolution which these observers feared should
indeed have taken place--but not in the United States!  It has
often been noted that when the orators of Moscow berate American
capitalism and turn their invective upon Wall Street, they are a
couple of generations out of date; one might say, more specifically,
that a typical Communist propagandist of the nineteen-fifties
sounds exactly as if he were reacting angrily to the news in the
morning papers of March 3, 1901.

On that date there were true grounds for uneasiness.  To a
generation whose economic thinking had been running in the grooves
fixed by Benjamin Franklin and Horatio Alger and the classical
economists, it was disquieting enough to see the masters of capital
using new instruments and devices to set at naught the traditional
economics of man-to-man bargaining.  It was more unsettling still
to see them apparently moving, in what had been a political
democracy, toward the mastery of America.

Chapter 5

Government on the Sidelines

And what, one may ask, was the United States government doing while
these portentous events were afoot?

It is hard for us, today, to realize how small the government was
in 1900, and how limited in its functions and powers.  It spent
roughly half a billion dollars a year, about one-eightieth of what
it was destined to spend half a century later (even before the
Korean war stepped up the budget).  In fact, the federal government
in 1900 spent considerably less money than New York State did in
1950.  The national debt amounted to only a little over a billion
and a quarter dollars--about one two-hundredth of the 1950 debt of
257 billions.  Even when one makes allowance for the diminished
value of the dollar and for the way in which federal expenses and
particularly the federal debt have been swollen since 1900 by wars
and defense expenditures, those are incredibly small figures by
today's standards.

The government had no Department of Commerce, no Department of
Labor, no Federal Trade Commission, no Federal Reserve System.  The
reason was simple: business was supposed to be no affair of the
government's.  It had an Interstate Commerce Commission, which was
supposed to regulate the railroad companies, but the powers of the
Commission were small and uncertain.  Even the Sherman Antitrust
Act had been whittled down by Supreme Court decisions into a feeble
instrument for the maintenance of competition in business; and
during the year 1900 the Attorney General brought not one single
suit under that law.

As for the White House, we have it on the authority of "Ike"
Hoover, who was long the Chief Usher, that when he began work there
in the early nineties "the whole Executive office staff, which was
then domiciled in the White House proper, consisted of but ten
people, and four of these were doorkeepers and messengers."  There
could not have been many more in 1900.  What a contrast to 1950,
when the employees of the White House office numbered 295, and
those who worked for what was technically known as the "Executive
Office of the President"--including not only the White House office
but the Bureau of the Budget, the Council of Economic Advisers, the
National Security Council, the National Security Resources Board,
and so forth--totaled no less than 1,335, and occupied most of the
architecturally profuse building which in McKinley's time had
comfortably housed the State, War, and Navy Departments!

Two or three examples may illustrate how incidental was the role of
the government in business affairs.  In 1895 its gold reserve was
slipping away and it desperately needed a loan of money to enable
it to buy more gold with which to buttress its endangered currency.
It turned, in this emergency, to the strongest private banker in
the country, who was of course Pierpont Morgan; only he had the
financial prestige to assure the bankers and the men of means that
they might safely lend to the government.  Washington without Wall
Street's aid was helpless.

Twelve years later, in 1907, there was a bank panic which centered
in New York.  A series of conspicuous bank failures had undermined
public confidence, depositors were drawing out their money right
and left, and once again strong measures were needed to restore
confidence and order.  Again it was Pierpont Morgan who came to the
rescue, bringing the bank presidents together in meeting after
meeting, and through the sheer strength of his reputation and the
force of his will bulldozing them into making loans which tided the
weakened banks through the crisis.  During that emergency the
President of the United States was powerless to do anything.  The
Secretary of the Treasury was hardly more than one of Morgan's
minor aides.  There were no Federal Reserve funds to be drawn upon,
nor any other federal machinery adequate to help.  In effect the
strong man of Wall Street served as the organizer of a private,
voluntary, national reserve system.

Or take the action of President Theodore Roosevelt in ending the
anthracite coal strike of 1902 by mediating between the coal
operators and the United Mine Workers.  For decades now we have
been so accustomed to seeing management and labor going to
Washington--or being dragged to Washington--to settle their major
disputes that it is hard for us to realize that in 1902 the
settlement of a strike by the President of the United States was
absolutely without precedent.  When Roosevelt invited the operators
and union leaders to Washington, some observers were favorably
impressed; the strike had already been going on for months, the
price of anthracite coal had climbed sky high, and as winter
approached there was already intense suffering.  What a fine thing
for the President to try to end the crisis, thought these citizens,
even if it wasn't really any of his business!  Not so the
conservative press.  The New York Sun called Roosevelt's proposal
"extraordinary" and "dangerous."  And said the New York Journal of

The President's course . . . magnifies before the public the
importance and power of the unions, casts an unwarranted stigma
upon the position and rights of the operators, and adds a trades-
union issue to the many unwelcome politico-economic questions of
the hour. . . .  Worse by far than any possible strike is Mr.
Roosevelt's seemingly uncontrollable penchant for impulsive self-

It was during this strike that the leading representative of the
coal operators, George F. Baer, sent his famous lines of assurance
to a worried resident of Wilkes-Barre.  "The rights and interests
of the laboring man," wrote Baer, "will be protected and cared for--
not by the labor agitators, but by the Christian men to whom God
in his infinite wisdom has given control of the property interests
of the country."

When the coal operators faced the President in conference in
Washington, their attitude toward him was one of "studied
insolence," to borrow Mark Sullivan's phrase.  They took the
position that the strikers were outlaws, criminal conspirators
against the rights of property.  As Baer himself put it, "The duty
of the hour is not to waste time negotiating with the fomentors of
this anarchy."  Roosevelt succeeded in establishing a basis for the
settlement of the strike, but throughout the negotiations he was
profoundly aware that he had no power at all to intervene.  What he
was doing was quite outside the normal province of the United
States government.


But that was in 1902 and Theodore Roosevelt was an adventurous man.
In 1900 his predecessor, the stately William McKinley, sat in the
White House, and McKinley was a man of discretion, who wouldn't
have dreamed of trying to settle a strike.  McKinley took a
different view of the functions of the federal government.  He
believed, quite sincerely, that the government oughtn't to
intervene in business affairs unless criminal activities were
involved (and there were mighty few activities which the laws then
defined as criminal); instead, the government ought to serve
business to the extent of its modest capacity.

Nobody has described McKinley better than William Allen White, who
as a young journalist interviewed him at his home in Canton, Ohio,
on a warm day in the summer of 1901.  McKinley, said White, sat

in a large cane veranda chair in a lightweight dark alpaca coat and
trousers, with a double-breasted white vest adorned only by his
watch chain, with a dark purple four-in-hand necktie meticulously
arranged; a heavy man five feet ten or eleven inches tall but never
paunchy, with a barrel torso, a large head and face, deeply cut
though not finely chiseled features--but without spot, blemish,
wrinkle, or sign of care and sorrow upon the smooth, sculptured
contour of his countenance.  I was sweating, for it was a hot day.
He was stainless, spotless, apparently inwardly cool and outwardly

McKinley was dignified and courtly, with such a built-in reserve
that White felt that somewhere back in his youth he had "buttoned
himself up."  When a photographer arrived to take the President's
picture, McKinley laid aside his cigar, saying gently, "We must not
let the young men of this country see their President smoking!"

Behind this frock-coated statue of civic righteousness, as he
presided over governmental affairs, stood the stalwart Republican
leader, Mark Hanna, a solid, forthright, outspoken, generous, very
human man who genuinely admired McKinley, somewhat as a sales
manager might admire a noble though impractical bishop, and took
delight in showing him what practical course he should pursue.
Hanna was a prosperous manufacturer, a Senator from Ohio, and
chairman of the Republican National Committee.  He knew well how to
raise money from the rich and privileged.  Temperamentally he was
in full accord with the big manufacturers, and at ease with the big
bankers.  He felt that whatever served them served the country.
Within the limits of feasible statesmanship, he was their earnest
and devoted servant.

In the presidential campaign of 1900 McKinley was opposed by
William Jennings Bryan, whom he had already defeated in 1896.
Bryan was no demagogue but a genuine lover of the people, a good
man, an honest man, a natural defender of human rights.  He had a
shallow and opinionated mind, but he had also a magical gift of
speech.  In those days when there was no radio and no television
and when oratory was a widely appreciated art, there was no one who
could hold and sway an audience as Bryan could.  There are men
still living who recall how they came to some county-seat meeting
to hear him speak, and how they stirred restlessly on the hard
benches during the preliminary addresses; how when Bryan began they
listened with skepticism; and how the organ tones of his glorious
great voice and the rise and fall of his rhetorical cadences so
captured them that when, at last, he came to the end of his
peroration, they found themselves hardly able to move their cramped
muscles: for two hours they had sat motionless under the spell of
his silver tongue.

Bryan based his 1900 campaign chiefly on the issue of anti-
imperialism, arguing that the islands which had fallen into
American hands as a result of the Spanish War should be delivered
to their inhabitants.  He also inveighed against the trusts,
recommending that corporations be subject to federal licensing, and
he even proposed an income tax; but his grasp of economics was
insecure, and although millions of Americans were troubled about
the trusts, Bryan failed to ignite them fully.  For 1900 was a year
when many of them had more money in their pockets than they had had
for many a season.  Mark Hanna had said before the campaign, "All
we need to do is to stand pat," thereby giving currency to a phrase
that has reverberated through American politics ever since; and
Hanna's prediction had been sound.  McKinley, the victor of the war
against Spain, the majestic embodiment both of America's new
importance in world affairs and of the new prosperity, won without
difficulty; and Mark Hanna made ready to serve big business for
four more years.

Indeed as Hanna scanned the skies during the last weeks of 1900
there was only one cloud on the horizon: the man chosen by the
Republican National Convention as its candidate for Vice-President,
the rambunctious Rough Rider of San Juan Hill, the unpredictable
young Governor of New York, Theodore Roosevelt.  As Governor this
Roosevelt had been as mild in his attitude toward business as
another Roosevelt was destined to be in the same office a
generation later; but he was independent, he wouldn't stay
tethered, and Hanna distrusted him.  "Don't any of you realize,"
Hanna had exploded to another senator at the convention, "that
there's only one life between that madman and the Presidency?"

What White called "the alliance between government and business for
the benefit of business" was an honest love affair to Hanna.  He
felt that if the path were made easy for the great corporations to
do as they pleased, the riches which they accumulated would filter
down to the less fortunate, and that any attempt to change the
rules of the game except to give the great corporations even more
opportunity to prosper would open the way to demagoguery, mob rule,
and destruction.  With others the alliance was not a matter of
emotional affinity or of conviction, but of purchase and sale--the
prostitution of government bodies for favors and cash.  Big
corporations advanced their interests not only by making sizable
campaign contributions--often to both parties--but also by
subsidizing or bribing legislators and even judges.

Railroad companies issued free passes to lawmakers, officials,
journalists, and their families.  At one state capital after
another, corporation lobbyists with well-filled pockets were ready
to go into action whenever there was a threat of adverse
legislation or a hope of favorable legislation.  And as for the
United States Senate--whose members were at that time elected, not
by the people, but by these amenable state legislatures--it had
become the chief citadel for the defense of privilege.  Most of the
Senators were either rich men or carefully selected allies and
messenger boys of the rich; they could deliver orotund speeches
about the "full dinner pail" for the workman, but their hearts were
with the big stockholder.

To quote once more from William Allen White's autobiography,
written long years later:

Senators elected in the days when machines and the ownership of
machines were passing into the hands of a class-conscious,
organized plutocracy had no obligations to the people of their
state. . . .  In Kansas, it was the railroads.  In western
Massachusetts, it was textiles.  In eastern Massachusetts, it was
the banks.  In New York, it was amalgamated industry.  In Montana,
it was copper.  But the power which developed and controlled any
state went to New York for its borrowed capital, and New York
controlled the United States Senate. . . .  The grade of senators,
as far as intelligence went, was higher than the grade which the
people selected, but on the whole and by and large it was not a
representative government.  Only a minority of the people of the
United States had any control over the United States Senate.  And
that minority was interested in its own predatory designs.

If a Senator or Congressman needed a little persuasion, there were
ways of providing it.  Perhaps the neatest demonstration of the art
of this sort of persuasion is to be found in the political
correspondence of John D. Archbold, the active head of the Standard
Oil Company, which was stolen from his files and made public by
Hearst in 1908.

This correspondence showed Congressman Sibley of Pennsylvania,
Archbold's chief agent in Washington, writing to say, "A Republican
United States senator came to me today to make a loan of $1000.  I
told him I did not have it but would try to get it for him in a day
or two.  Do you want to make the investment?"

It showed Senator Joseph B. Foraker of Ohio getting $44,000 from
Standard Oil in four successive certificates of deposit sent by
Archbold (which Foraker later claimed were retainers); and it
showed Archbold subsequently writing Foraker about an "objectionable
bill" that needed "to be looked after."

It showed Archbold writing on several occasions to governors to
urge them, if "consistent," to appoint Judge So-and-so to fill the
vacancy in such-and-such a court.  "It is not necessary for me to
dwell upon Judge Henderson's capabilities.  They are undoubtedly
well known to you," wrote Archbold on one occasion.  Mild words, to
which nobody could take exception.  Have not citizens the right to
suggest appropriate candidates for high office?  Yet no governor
could miss the sharp point of the request.  This was a post in
which Standard, in return for favors past or future, must have a
man whose decisions could be counted upon.

Thus, by hints, suggestions, loans, so-called loans that were in
fact gifts, and on occasion by outright secret bribes, could a big
corporation make legislators, elected officials, and even judges do
its bidding.  The Soviet propagandists of the nineteen-fifties are
forever talking about "lackeys of Wall Street."  Well, in 1900 the
United States government included many men who might aptly, if not
quite idiomatically, have been described as lackeys of Wall Street.
Moving into public life in those days was like moving into the
neighborhood of a million-dollar fruit tree whose fruit could
readily be dislodged if one but made the slightest move in its
direction.  And this was easily done, for no one much seemed to be


Why was no one much looking?  There was furious interest in
political elections.  The 1896 campaign had been the hottest,
perhaps, in the whole history of the United States, and the 1900
one did not lack for warmth.  There was, as I have already said, a
very widespread popular fear that the trusts might ultimately take
over the control of the United States.  Why, then, did very few
people seem to realize that since the nature and behavior of
American capitalism was a matter of transcendent importance to
them, and involved great political problems, therefore the
character and performance of their political representatives should
come under the closest observation?

The reasons were many.  In the first place, much of the opposition
to the trusts which did exist took the form of advocacy of a
socialism of manifestly European derivation.  It seemed foreign to
the nature of Americans, who were likely to be unsympathetic toward
ideologies and disinclined to think of themselves as proletarians,
however miserable their lot.  It was associated in American minds
with the strange-looking, foreign-language-speaking people of the
Lower East Side of New York and other immigrant neighborhoods.
Besides, it was suspect as revolutionary--in the sense of
advocating a total transformation of the business system, if not in
the sense of involving barricades and bloodshed.  Did not Eugene V.
Debs, the 1900 presidential candidate of the Social Democratic
party, himself declare that it was "not a reform party but a
revolutionary party"?  Even with so strong a candidate as the
eloquent Debs, the Social Democrats could win no more than 96,000
votes that year.

In the second place, though many earnest Americans who did not like
the trend of things had become "Christian Socialists"--following a
pattern of thought later inherited in part by Norman Thomas--these
were an unorganized and somewhat impractical group; and the
theological student or social worker who argued that all industry
should be taken over by the government, which would presumably be
dominated by people as benevolent as himself, became the awkward
butt of japes to the effect that if you divided up all the money in
the country evenly among the population, it would soon be back once
more in the smart people's hands.

In the third place, the very idea of reform had been discredited by
the failure of the Populist party in the nineties and by Bryan's
seduction of the Populists into the advocacy of free silver.  There
are few things so dead as a reform movement that has fallen for a
panacea and is beginning to become aware of the error of its ways.

Yet still more important, perhaps, was the fact that there were few
people outside the inner circles of big business and corporation
law who really understood how the big business combinations were
set up, how they functioned, or how they exercised their political
leverage; and there were still fewer who had any but the dimmest
notion of how the trend of the times could be reversed without a
grave danger of disrupting the industrial and political processes
of the nation.

This general haziness of the public mind was due in large part to
the fact that not many Americans had learned to think of economic
affairs--industry, technology, trade, commerce--as matters of
general concern to them as citizens.  A man worked hard at his
business, did his level best to make money at it, talked business
with other men in the Pullman smoking compartment or in the country
store; but all that was personal and immediate, and quite
disconnected, in his mind, with the general condition of American
life.  Nobody had told him that all Americans were interdependent;
that each business, each social activity, each political activity,
formed a part of a general American pattern which was affected by
what everybody did; that, in the phrase of a later day, Americans
were "all in the same boat."  He was used, for instance, to
thinking of American business as something which had little to do
with American history, except insofar as the tariff affected it.
Was not the American history which he had studied in high school a
dreary tale of political campaigns and maneuvers which led from the
Missouri Compromise to the Dred Scott case and from the Resumption
of Specie Payments to the Dingley Tariff, enlivened only by
occasional wars?  What did the operations of his business have to
do with all that?

To be sure, he was excited by presidential campaigns, and could
argue with the best that McKinley was the creature of the trusts or
that Bryan was unsound; but his political affiliation was likely to
be hereditary, and the newspaper editorials and cartoons which
provided him with most of his current political education were more
partisan than illuminating.  As for the popular magazines, it was
true that Ida M. Tarbell was already at work on her painstaking
history of the Standard Oil Company for McClure's, but not a word
of this chronicle had yet appeared in print, and very few of the
magazine journalists of the day, except S. S. McClure and his
staff, were much interested in probing deeply into the facts of
business life in its relation to political life.  And as for the
great magazines of the old school, those highly respectable
publications which ladies and gentlemen liked to display on their
library tables, these had become so intent upon serving the
interests of culture--a culture daintily remote from the crass
concerns of everyday life--that the idea of examining closely the
nature of any such vulgar necessity as business was repugnant to

Here, by way of illustration, is the table of contents of the
March, 1900, issue of the Century Magazine, rival of Harper's and
Scribner's for pre-eminence in the eyes of the elect and one of the
truly splendid publications of that day:

Frontispiece.  Engraving by Timothy Cole of J. M. W. Turner's
painting of "Dido Building Carthage."

The National Zoo at Washington.  By Ernest Seton-Thompson.

To the Lapland Longspur.  Poem, by John Burroughs.

Paris of the Faubourgs.  By Richard Whiteing.

Robert Herrick, the Man and the Poet.  By Thomas Bailey Aldrich.

A Transfer of Property.  Story.  By Catharine Young Glen.

The Little Child Dead.  Poem.  By Josephine Dodge Daskam.

The "Larger Hope."  Poem.  By Elizabeth Paton McGilvary.

Engraving by Timothy Cole of J. M. W. Turner's painting of the
"Fighting Temeraire."

The Bamboo Flute.  Poem.  By Richard Henry Stoddard.

Eliza Hepburn's Deliverance.  Serial Novel.  By Henry B. Fuller.

Dr. North and His Friends.  Serial Novel.  By S. Weir Mitchell.

Carpaccio's Little Angel with the Lute.  Poem.  By Josephine
Preston Peabody.

The Giant Indians of Tierra del Fuego.  By Dr. Frederick A. Cook.

Poverty.  Poem.  By Arlo Bates.

Oliver Cromwell.  By John Morley.  (The fifth paper of a series.)

The Composer Meyerbeer.  By Moritz Moszkowski.

To an English Setter.  Poem.  By Thomas Walsh.

Lines and Sail-plan of the "Spray."  By Joshua Slocum.  (Part of an
account of a voyage alone around the world.)

The Eternal Feminine.  Story.  By Eva Wilder Brodhead.

A Midwinter Tramp from Santiago to Havana.  By H. Phelps Whitmarsh.

In the Gloaming.  Poem.  By John Vance Cheney.

Talks with Napoleon.  By his physician at St. Helena, Dr. B. E.

The Warfare of Railways in Asia.  By Alexander Hume Ford.

Topics of the Time--a department of editorial comment, including a
piece on The Date Line (discussing whether the twentieth century
began in 1900 or in 1901), a piece on Benefits of Jury Duty to the
Juror, and a piece on A Neglected Art (letter-writing).

In Lighter Vein--humor.

Such was the fare that the genteel thought it proper to place
before the genteel in the United States of 1900.  It was lavishly
varied; it was produced with distinction of thought and of phrase,
and illustrated with grace and charm; it ranged through the
centuries and the continents, as cultivated people should be able
to; it contained nothing which could bring a blush even to a cheek
ready and willing to blush.  And it resolutely turned its back upon
the great forces which were determining the fortunes and future of
the United States.

Is it any wonder that, in a day when such a magazine stood upon the
pinnacle of journalism, there was a shortage of people burning to
learn exactly how the ugly factories that disfigured the industrial
towns of America were linked together by corporate charters into
huge combinations, and how the masters of these combinations, and
the bankers who stood behind them, subdued legislators to their

But a change was coming.  And, paradoxically, the advance agent of
this change was an ignorant, demented assassin.  On the 6th of
September, 1901, at the Pan-American exposition in Buffalo, a man
named Czolgosz shot and fatally wounded President McKinley.

Not only had Mark Hanna lost a loved and revered associate, but the
cloud of uncertainty that he had discerned on the horizon when
Roosevelt had been nominated for the Vice-Presidency now filled
half the sky.  "And now look," he exclaimed to his friend Kohlsaat,
"that damned cowboy is President of the United States!"


Chapter 6

The Revolt of the American Conscience

There were no signs and portents in the sky to herald the beginning
of a new era when Theodore Roosevelt moved into the White House in
the autumn of 1901.  He announced that he would carry forward the
late President McKinley's policies, and in his earliest utterances
as President he gave the financial and industrial powers of the day
no cause for undue alarm.  In his first message to Congress he made
it clear, to be sure, that he did not think all was well with
business; but so neatly did he balance each adverse statement with
another one defending business that Finley Peter Dunne's fictional
Irishman, Mr. Dooley, aptly summarized the message as follows:
"'Th' trusts,' says he, 'are heejous monsthers built up be th'
inlightened intherprise iv th' men that have done so much to
advance progress in our beloved counthry,' he says.  'On wan hand I
wud stamp thim undher fut; on th' other hand not so fast.'"

It was not until several months had passed that the first signal
flare of the new era went up: in February, 1902, Roosevelt's
attorney general brought suit for the dissolution of the Northern
Securities Company under the Sherman Antitrust Act.

The Northern Securities Company was a holding company set up by J.
Pierpont Morgan and Edward H. Harriman for the joint control of
certain railroad properties, as part of a treaty of peace between
them after the Northern Pacific panic.  If it had stood the test of
law it might conceivably have set the pattern for the purchase of
most of the major railroads of the country by a few men in Wall
Street.  In moving to smash it Roosevelt not only served notice
that there were limits to what the government would let men do in
using the mechanism of the holding company to build up economic
empires; he also struck at one of the prized creations of the great
Morgan himself.

Morgan was dining at home when the news of the suit came to him by
telephone.  He was dismayed and indignant.  He told his guests that
he had supposed Roosevelt to be a gentleman, but a gentleman would
not have sued; rather he would have asked Morgan privately to
reorganize or abolish the Northern Securities Company in order to
bring it in line with the government's wishes.  The great banker
felt that Roosevelt was treating him, an honorable man, like a
common crook.  Joseph Pulitzer, publisher of the New York World and
a foe of the "trusts," was overjoyed at Roosevelt's action and
wrote in a letter of instructions to his editor, Frank I. Cobb,
that the President had "subjugated Wall Street."  This was
considerable of an exaggeration; but at least the battle was

This battle between the President and the emerging plutocracy,
during the next few years, was destined to be an intermittent and
often halfhearted one.  The reason was not far to seek.  Roosevelt
was a Republican President.  He could not get too far out of step
with his party.  Among its members were the great majority of the
rich and privileged, and the party needed their lavish financial
contributions at campaign time.  Politically Roosevelt must appear
to be their friend, who merely disciplined them a little from time
to time for their own good.  It has been pointed out again and
again since those days that Roosevelt's bark was much worse than
his bite, and that even his bark became noticeably milder in a
campaign year; that the legislation which he actually put through--
such as the Hepburn Act for the further regulation of the
railroads, for example--did not pack much of a wallop; that never
again in his seven and a half years in the White House did he do
anything so bold as to attack the Northern Securities Company; that
the conservative Taft administration which followed his was much
more active in bringing prosecutions under the Sherman Act than he
was; and furthermore that Roosevelt had a limited and uncertain
knowledge of economics and was impulsive, boyishly immature,
inconsistent, and unduly addicted to the delights of political
showmanship.  All of which is true--but overlooks Roosevelt's most
vital contribution to American history.

For what this dynamic President did was to advertise and dramatize
to the whole country a point of view on business, government, and
the public interest that was refreshingly new, exciting, and

Up to this time most of the outcry against the trend toward
plutocracy had been the bitter outcry of people who had been hurt.
The opposition had been mainly an opposition of the have-nots to
the haves.  Furthermore it had been, in great part, a radical if
not revolutionary opposition.  The farmers who had flocked into the
Populist party during the early nineties had been angry men who
wanted to overthrow Wall Street and big business generally.  The
workers who had joined such belligerent unions as the Western
Federation of Miners had been violent men addicted to the use of
lethal weapons and the hope of revolution.  The urban laborers who
formed the backbone of the Socialist parties had listened
appreciatively to the preachments of leaders who had drawn upon the
revolutionary ideologies of Europe.  And such native-born citizens
of means as had opposed the power and greed of the captains of
industry had tended to be gentle, tenderhearted men of good will--
ministers, social-service workers, sentimental liberals of a
species to which the term "pink" was later scornfully applied.  But
now here, in the Presidency of the United States, was an opponent
of the plutocratic trend who did not belong in any of these

Roosevelt could not be called a have-not; he had never himself been
hurt by Wall Street; he was indeed rich in his own right.  He was
an old-stock American, and a military hero to boot.  He was not a
spinner of ideological theories or a sentimental visionary but a
man of action, a woodsman and hunter, a Rough Rider, a man of
robust enthusiasms, who preached the "strenuous life," who liked to
tell boys, "Don't flinch, don't foul, hit the line hard!"
Everything about him commanded popular attention: the flashing
eyeglasses and grinning teeth that cartoonists loved to sketch, the
energetic voice rising to a falsetto of high emphasis as he drove
home an oratorical point; the pugnacious gestures, the zest for
conflict; his omnivorous interest in big-game hunting, history,
ornithology, simplified spelling, military affairs, and a dozen
other contrasting subjects; his delighted interest in all manner of
people.  John Morley described him as "an interesting combination
of St. Vitus and St. Paul," and as a wonder of nature comparable to
Niagara Falls.

And the burden of his speeches about "malefactors of great wealth"
and "the square deal" was not economic but moral.  He sought the
"moral regeneration of the business world."  He believed in setting
up a "moral standard."  He preached that it was just plain wrong
for some people, by tricks and wiles, to get a stranglehold on
business and politics, while others were cheated out of
opportunity.  This was the kind of talk that millions of Americans
of all walks of life--people allergic to ideologies, impatient of
economic theory, but highly susceptible to moral evangelism and
devoted to the idea of a fair chance for all--could understand and
respond to.  The effect of the legislation that Theodore Roosevelt
backed was minor compared with the effect of his personality and
his preaching upon a great part of a whole generation of Americans.
He struck a new keynote for the times, and it resounded all over

The times were ripe for it.  Consider a few dates.  Roosevelt moved
against the Northern Securities Company in February, 1902.  Already
Miss Ida Tarbell had been at work for years on her history of the
Standard Oil Company, and it began to run in McClure's in November,
1902.  Lincoln Steffens' first article on municipal corruption,
"Tweed Days in St. Louis," written with Claude H. Wetmore, appeared
in the same magazine a month earlier, in October, 1902.  It was
these two journalists who inaugurated a new trend in American
journalism, a trend toward the deliberate, unsentimental,
searching, factual reporting of what was actually going on in
American business and American politics.  (When Roosevelt later
attacked the "muckrakers" he was hitting chiefly at their more
sensational imitators.)  "Golden Rule" Jones, the reform mayor of
Toledo, had been elected in 1897; the elder Robert La Follette
became the energetic reform governor of Wisconsin in 1900; Tom L.
Johnson was chosen mayor of Cleveland in 1901; these men were the
leaders and forerunners of a whole generation of reformers in state
and local government.  It was in 1902 that the enthusiasm of Robert
C. Ogden and his friends for the raising of educational standards
was seized upon by John D. Rockefeller, with the advice of his
statesmanlike counselor in charitable matters, Frederick T. Gates,
to organize the General Education Board, the first of the great
broad-purpose foundations which set a new pattern in giving in the
public interest.  These are only a few scattered examples of the
new trend of which Roosevelt was to serve as the chief galvanizer
and spokesman; people were showing a disposition to look about them
with fresh eyes, to investigate what was going on, and decide to do
something about it, something immediate and practical.

Thus began that revolt of the American conscience which was to be
the dominant phenomenon in American affairs until about 1915, when
it was submerged in the oncoming tides of World War I, and which
finally petered out about 1920--leaving behind it, however,
influences and patterns of thinking that were to continue to this


As the historians Hacker and Kendrick have pointed out, this revolt
was not an organized movement, but incoherent.  It had no overall
program.  Those who took part in it ranged all the way from rich to
poor, and were in many cases fiercely at odds with one another.  It
was rather a general movement of very diverse people working for
different specific ends who "had simultaneously hit upon the idea
of taking to the road."

There were the proponents of measures to permit more direct popular
government, unfettered by bosses--such as the direct election of
Senators, the initiative and referendum, the recall of judicial
decisions.  There were the advocates of municipal housecleaning,
the experimenters with commission government of cities, the budget
experts.  There were the battlers for workmen's compensation laws,
the people who were trying to get decent legislation on working
conditions in factories.  There were the conservationists, who
wanted to stop the headlong destruction of the nation's natural
resources, and particularly of its forests.  There were the
suffragists, campaigning for votes for women; the crusaders for
pure food and drug laws; the investigators and chastisers of
"frenzied finance"; and the men who, after the Panic of 1907,
labored to devise an adequate central banking system.

The same basic feeling that the nation and its citizens must look
out for the interests of all the people, not simply of a privileged
few, animated a great variety of other people who were little
concerned with legislation.  It was during this time that more and
more men and women, following in the footsteps of Jane Addams of
Hull House and Lillian D. Wald of the Henry Street Settlement, were
making social service a respected profession, and that clergymen
were increasingly seeing in their parishes opportunities for
institutional social work.  Meanwhile Gates was developing the
pattern for the great Rockefeller benefactions; the Rockefeller
Foundation and the Carnegie Corporation were established, with huge
endowments to be presided over by students of the public welfare.
The epoch-making campaign against hookworm began; and Abraham
Flexner prepared the report which led to the building of great new
medical centers that would help to revolutionize the methods of the
healing profession.  Woodrow Wilson moved into the governorship of
New Jersey--and thence into the Presidency of the United States--
from the presidency of Princeton, where in the spirit of the times
he had been waging war against the undergraduate eating clubs,
which seemed to him undemocratic.  Nor was it mere coincidence that
during those very years Edward Bok as editor of the Ladies' Home
Journal was trying to teach millions of American women how they
might live graciously on small incomes; and his magazine and others
of leaping circulation--notably the Saturday Evening Post--were
offering the advertising business a chance to present to vast
audiences the delights of mass-produced goods that had hitherto
been sold chiefly to the well-heeled; while Henry Ford was
beginning to produce a car that would not be a plaything of the
rich but an inexpensive and useful vehicle for the people.
Furthermore, it was during these years that Willford I. King first
set before the economists the concept of the national income.

Little as these people had in common, they were alike in seeing the
nation, not as a place where everybody went his own way regardless
of the plight of others, but as a place where people had a common
destiny, where their fortunes were interlocked, and where wise
planning, wise statesmanship could devise new instruments of
satisfaction for all men.

The contagion of reform reached even into the ranks of the very
richest and most powerful: witness Harry Davison of the House of
Morgan, Paul M. Warburg, and other influential bankers trying to
concoct a scheme for a central banking system; Mrs. O. H. P.
Belmont holding suffrage meetings for the lavishly dressed ladies
of Newport; and of course John D. Rockefeller, hitherto generally
regarded as the arch-villain of unregenerate capitalism, pouring
his millions into all manner of good works.


One must not exaggerate the impact of this revolt.  One must bear
in mind, for one thing, that although there was a gradual
improvement in the status of organized labor--marked by the
establishment in 1913 of the Labor Department and the passage in
1914 of the Clayton Act, which at least theoretically gave legal
standing to collective bargaining--there were still large areas of
industry in which labor was totally unorganized, and others where
the struggle between capital and the workers was a battle between
tyrants with hired thugs, on the one hand, and revolutionaries or
murderers, or both, on the other.  One need only recall the contest
between union structural workers and non-union stairway makers on a
building job in New York in 1906; during this contest bolts, bars,
and tools had such a way of falling from the upper levels upon the
heads of stairway makers below that the company hired special
watchmen, one of whom was killed by being beaten up and then
dropped from the eighth floor to the fifth.  Or the murder in 1905
of ex-Governor Steunenberg of Idaho, who had been a foe of the
Western Federation of Miners, by a man who named as his accomplices
William D. Haywood and other high officials of the union.  (The
verdict as to Haywood and the others was "not guilty," but in the
opinion of many who attended the trial this signified "not proven"
rather than "innocent.")  Or the dynamiting of the Los Angeles
Times building in 1910--twenty dead, and the building wrecked--
under the direction of the McNamara brothers, one of whom was the
secretary-treasurer of the militant Ironworkers International
Union, and the other of whom was "handy with the sticks."

Or one might cite the formation of the I.W.W. in 1905--the
International Workers of the World, the "Wobblies"--the preamble of
whose constitution stated that "the working class and the employing
class have nothing in common."  The actual methods of the I.W.W.
were by no means always lawless, but the great strikes which its
leaders managed, such as the Lawrence strike of 1912 and the
Paterson strike of 1913, were bitter and savage to a degree seldom
even approached in recent years, and its chief leaders were
undeniably revolutionists at heart.

Furthermore during these very years the Socialist party--which was
committed to an eventual total change in the management of American
industry--continued to gain, until in the 1912 election its
candidate, Eugene Debs, piled up no less than 897,000 votes.

In short, not all those who sought for changes in the face of
America were proponents of orderly step-by-step amelioration, or of
minor structural changes in the existing way of doing business.

Nor should one forget that during these years Pierpont Morgan still
moved with a mighty tread in Wall Street; and as old age came upon
him, the economic power which he had long exercised through the
terrific force of his personality was being institutionalized into
a smooth-working, though vaguely defined, pattern of influence
extending from his partners at the corner of Broad and Wall Streets
into the headquarters of scores of great banks and corporations.
When the congressional investigating committee headed by Arsne
Pujo studied what it called the "money trust" in 1912-13, it
produced impressive diagrams of the Wall Street "control" of large
sectors of American business.  These diagrams suggested a pattern
of direction much more sharply drawn than was the actual influence
exercised by the House of Morgan, Baker of the First National Bank,
Stillman of the National City Bank, and the other princes of
finance; but the power was there, however sketchy it might be in
outline, and it remained immense and far-reaching even after
Morgan's death in 1913.  For years after the turn of the century,
furthermore, the members of the Standard Oil crowd of speculators
were raking in millions through their smoothly managed operations
on the Stock Exchange.  Nor was there any conspicuous sign of
slackening in the activities of the more piratical traders in
stocks and bonds; they continued to horn-swoggle the trading public
right and left.  In general, the men of Wall Street viewed the
progress of reform with dismay; excoriated Theodore Roosevelt and,
later, Woodrow Wilson; contributed to the Roosevelt campaign chest
chiefly for fear of getting something worse--and continued to build
up, more discreetly than in former years but not necessarily less
effectively, the structures of power and wealth that the reformers
were resolutely trying to chip away.


So strongly, however, did the tides of reform run that in the
election of 1912 they reached an astonishing height.

Four years earlier, Theodore Roosevelt, deciding not to run for re-
election, had yielded the Republican nomination with his blessing
to his portly and genial Secretary of War, William H. Taft, upon
whom he relied to carry out his progressive policies.  But Taft, in
office, proved to be a pliant conservative; as Senator Dolliver
once remarked, he did indeed carry out Roosevelt's policies, but
"on a shutter."  When Roosevelt returned from Africa, where he had
been hunting wild animals, he presently succumbed to a variety of
emotions.  These included disgust at what he considered Taft's
betrayal of him, an inability to stay out of a good rousing battle,
a genuine crusading fervor, and a very human conviction that
Roosevelt followers and the forces of righteousness were
necessarily one and the same.  He attacked Taft savagely, ran
against him for the Republican nomination in 1912, and, failing to
get it, formed overnight his own Progressive party and sought the

Meanwhile the Democrats nominated the austere, long-jawed,
brilliant, energetic ex-professor, Woodrow Wilson.  Though there
were minor differences between the Roosevelt position and the
Wilson position, essentially they were both reformers, both
belonged on the same side of the fence.  And in the voting they
both, incredibly, outran the staunch Republican Taft.  And this
despite the fact that the Socialist party had collected nearly a
million votes (as against about 3 1/2 million for Taft, over 4
million for Roosevelt, and over 6 million for Wilson).  Reform was
at its apogee.

But Wilson had been in the White House only a year and a half--
pushing through Congress measure after measure of his New Freedom
program--when, unbelievably, war broke out in Europe.  And as the
conflict that we now call World War I grew in fury and scope, the
issues which it provoked began so to dominate the American scene
that gradually the impulse toward reform was overwhelmed.  Or
rather, the crusading spirit was translated, by the time the United
States entered the war against Germany in 1917, into making the war
a crusade for freedom--or a crusade, as Woodrow Wilson put it, "to
make the world safe for democracy."  People whose memories do not
go back to those days, but who recall vividly the dead-pan, let's-
get-the-nasty-business-over-with, let's-not-have-any-parades-or-
idealistic-talk spirit of World War II, may find it hard to
appreciate the fact that in 1917-1918 an American people much less
united in their acceptance of war than they were to be in 1941-1945
nevertheless went about their war tasks with genuine fervor.  The
great majority of American men and women had real faith that this
war could be the last one ever, that victory could bring a new day
of universal freedom, and they prosecuted the war with an almost
evangelical dedication.

Yet the crusading spirit was like a bank whose funds were being
overdrawn.  It lasted long enough, at the close of the war, to
complete the ratification of the woman suffrage amendment and--even
more remarkably--of that prize curiosity of reformist ardor, the
prohibition amendment, which at the time it went into effect in
January, 1920, was expected by almost everybody to end once and for
all the era of alcoholic drinking in America.  But then, abruptly,
the impulse to make over the nation and the world was discovered to
have faded away.  A people who had had enough of high causes and
noble sacrifice to hold them for a long time decided to take things
easy, to enjoy themselves; and although there remained many
American idealists who would not abandon their quest, they found
that they, too, were tired as well as outnumbered.  The revolt of
the American conscience was over.


Yet it had left behind it, embedded deep in the ever-changing
American tradition, a way of looking at public problems, and
particularly political and economic problems, of vast importance
for the American future.  This was the idea--an old idea, but
strengthened now by having been put to the test and having survived
intact--that when the ship of state was not behaving as it should,
one did not need to scrap it and build another, but could, by a
series of adjustments and improvements, repair it while keeping it
running--provided the ship's crew were forever alert, forever
inspecting it and tinkering with it.  And that the economic
machine, if it seemed to be producing the wrong kind of goods, need
not be destroyed but could be fitted with a new carburetor here, a
new belt there, and new spark plugs, and by observation and test be
made to produce to better advantage without skipping a beat.  The
stress and destruction of revolution were unnecessary--and might
destroy those skills and incentives which gave the machine its
accelerating motive power.  No need to send the designers to their
drawing boards to concoct plans for wholly new and untried
mechanisms; a few inspectors, a few specialists in the design of
this part and that, and a will on the part of all concerned to make
the machine do its true duty, would amply serve.

One realizes, as one looks back, how tentative and provisional, and
of what minor long-range influence, were most of the reform
measures of that time, taken one by one.  There are few things
deader, today, than the enthusiasms and angers which were
engendered by, let us say, the initiative and referendum, or by the
struggle to deprive Speaker Joe Cannon of his arbitrary authority
over the House of Representatives.  No wonder students yawn over
the history books which conscientiously take them through the story
of those battles, so dull and dry in retrospect.  Ironically, of
all the measures which went on the statute books during the reform
era, the one that was destined to have the most positive and
enduring effect upon the American economy was one which most
history books tend to pass over with minor mention, because there
was very little conflict over it and because its impact was at
first so slight.  This was the graduated income tax.

The income tax was made possible by a constitutional amendment
proposed to Congress by Taft, a President generally regarded as
conservative, and was passed by Congress and ratified by the states
with little opposition; people realized that the time for it had
come.  And when it was first imposed--by a provision in President
Wilson's tariff act of 1913--the rates were very low: only one per
cent on net incomes up to $20,000, with a modest surtax on larger
ones.  No single person paid on a net income of less than $3,000;
no married person on an income of less than $4,000.  Believe it or
not, on a $10,000 net income a married man paid only about $60, on
a $20,000 net income he paid only about $160.  (Are those sounds
that I hear the moaning of readers for the dear, dead days?)  Not
until 1917 did the income tax yield as much money to the federal
government as customs duties did.  But by 1920 it was contributing
ten times as much money as the customs; and that was only the
beginning of the rise of the graduated income tax to a predominant
place in the financing of a hugely expanded government, and to an
important place among the instruments for the redistribution of
wealth in America.

Yet it is not upon any individual piece of legislation during the
reform era that one should focus one's chief attention, nor even
upon the good works accomplished, or the sentimental follies
committed, by the men and women who in a hundred different ways
were laboring, as William Allen White said, to give the underdog a
better kennel.  It is rather at the basic idea which became
dominant that one should look.

Many people argued then--and have gone on arguing--that the United
States ought to have a conservative party and a liberal party (or
radical party, if you wish), each with its neat, logical program,
instead of two very similar parties each shopping for winning ideas
for platform planks and feeling its way by experiment, persuasion,
and compromise.  Many people argued then--and some still argue
today--that economic reform by patchwork is illogical and timid,
and that what is needed is an uprising of the dissatisfied to
effect a total transformation of the apparatus of business and
industry.  Both those ideas ran strongly for a time and then
weakened.  Roosevelt's third party, the Progressive party, made a
strong bid in 1912 and then disintegrated, leaving the other
parties to take over the more popular planks of its platform.  The
Socialists gained ground and then lost it again.  For both ideas
would have favored the division of the American people into
classes, and both would have run counter to their pragmatic temper.

The idea that won out was that the existence of sharply defined
economic and social classes was to be resisted as an offense to the
American democratic ideal.  That you got along much better when
people of all sorts and conditions worked together for what seemed
to them the benefit of all.  That the way to deal with a
proletariat was not either to suppress and bedevil it, or to help
it to overthrow its masters, but to give it a chance at education,
opportunity, automobiles, and vacuum cleaners, with plenty of
instruction in the middle-class way of living and plenty of
incentive to want more and more of these good things; and then in
due course the proletariat might be a proletariat no more, but a
body of upstanding, self-respecting citizens who could be counted
on to help keep the nation in good running order.  And that when
you found something amiss with the way things functioned you
examined what was happening and pragmatically made the necessary
changes and no more.  That the people who thought the machine would
stop dead if you tinkered with it were wrong, and the people who
thought you could invent out of hand a new machine that wouldn't
knock somewhere were also wrong.  The American citizenry saw the
benefits of continual, co-operative, experimental, untheoretical

There would be ferocious debate over every proposed reform.  There
would be endless friction all along the way.  There would be eras
of new experiment and eras of consolidation and re-examination.
But an America which had seemed to many people to be headed toward
a reign of plutocracy seemed likely to be able to remake itself, by
slow degrees, into something nearer the democratic dream, and to do
this by something approaching the common consent of free men.

Chapter 7

The Dynamic Logic of Mass Production

During the year 1903 a forty-year-old Detroiter named Henry Ford,
having left the employ of the little Detroit Automobile Company
with the idea of going into the manufacturing business for himself,
designed and built a big and powerful racing car.  Why did he do
this?  He had no great interest in speed; his idea was quite
different: he wanted to make a small, light, serviceable vehicle.
The reason he built a racing car was that he wanted capital, and to
attract capital he had to have a reputation, and in those days when
automobiles were thought of as expensive playthings in which the
rich could tear noisily along the dusty roads, the way to get a
reputation was to build a car that could win races.

Having constructed a car of terrifying power, Ford cast about for a
racing driver; and since it would require both strength and
reckless daring to control his monster at high speeds--strength
because it steered with an unwieldy tiller instead of with a wheel--
he hired a professional bicycle racer named Barney Oldfield, and
spent a week teaching him to drive a car.  Said Oldfield as he
climbed into the car for his first race at the Grosse Point track
late in 1903, "Well, this chariot may kill me, but they will say
afterward that I was going like hell when she took me over the

Oldfield did not go over the bank.  He won the race by a wide
margin.  Ford won his reputation.  And it got him enough capital--
$28,000 in cash--to start the Ford Motor Company, of which he
became vice-president, general manager, designer, master mechanic,
and superintendent.

During the next few years Ford produced, successfully, several
varieties of cars and his manufacturing business expanded rapidly.
In 1908 he put out what he considered the most satisfactory model
to date; he called it Model T.  And soon afterward he made a
decision which astonished his associates.  Let him record it in his
own words:  ". . . In 1909 I announced one morning, without any
previous warning, that in the future we were going to build only
one model, that the model was going to be Model T, and that the
chassis would be exactly the same for all cars, and I remarked:
'Any customer can have a car painted any color that he wants so
long as it is black.'"

This decision grew naturally out of Ford's experience and
temperament.  He was a Michigan farmer's son, a gadget-loving
Yankee with utilitarian and democratic instincts, uninfected by
higher education.  As a boy he had been so fascinated with
machinery that he had spent endless hours taking watches to pieces
and putting them together, and then constructing watches of his
own.  At the age of sixteen he had seen a "road engine"--a steam
engine that could use its steam power to propel itself in an
ungainly way from job to job--and had thereupon been fascinated
with dreams of horseless carriages, and also of machines that
farmers could use to do their hard work for them.  Six years later,
in 1885, he had seen an Otto gas engine--a European forerunner of
the automobile engines of today--and had gone to work on engine
design.  By the spring of 1893 he had built his first horseless
carriage and tried it out on the road.  During the next ten years,
while he held money-earning jobs, he was forever experimenting in
his spare hours, and gradually his ideas developed.

He wanted to build, not a showy car for the well-to-do, but a
practical, effort-saving car for ordinary people like himself.  He
wanted it to be light: few things offended him as did the
widespread notion that weight meant strength.  He wanted it to be
inexpensive; as he said later in his autobiography, "The public
should always be wondering how it is possible to give so much for
the money."  He felt that many manufacturers were mistaken in
fixing their attention upon profits, and that bankers had a bad
influence upon manufacturers because they thought about improving
profits instead of about improving the product.  If the product and
the price were right, he thought the profits would take care of
themselves.  And he believed that if he concentrated on a single
model, he could cut the cost of manufacture so sharply that masses
of ordinary people would flock to buy it.

As his sales of Model T increased, Ford deliberately dropped the
price--and they increased still further.  In 1913 he put in his
first assembly line, and by the beginning of 1914 he was producing
the entire car on the assembly-line principle.  Each workman
performed a single operation; each element of the car went on a
power-driven moving conveyor platform past a series of these
workmen, each of whom added or fixed in place some part of it; and
these various assembly lines converged upon a main conveyor
platform on which the chassis moved to completion.

In principle this method of manufacture was far from new.  It
depended upon Eli Whitney's great discovery of the principle of
interchangeable parts.  It owed much to the refinement of that
principle by such men as Henry M. Leland, who had shown what close
machining could do to make these interchangeable parts fit with
absolute precision.  Moreover, many a manufacturer had used the
assembly-line principle to some extent.  Cyrus McCormick, for
instance, had done so in his reaper works as far back as the
eighteen-fifties; and in particular the packers had used an
overhead conveyor to carry slaughtered animals past a series of
workers.  Ford was indebted, too, to Frederick Winslow Taylor for
his studies in "scientific management," the careful planning of
manufacturing processes so as to save steps and motions.  And
Ransom Olds had already put a single type of automobile into
quantity production--until his financial backers forced him back
into the luxury market.  Nevertheless the Ford assembly line, with
its subassemblies, was unique as a remorselessly complete
application of all these ideas.

When his manufacturing system was complete, in January, 1914, Ford
made an announcement which echoed round the world.

At that time the going wage in the automobile industry averaged
about $2.40 per nine-hour day.  Ford announced that he would pay
his men a minimum of $5 per eight-hour day.

The explanation was that he had been paying year-end bonuses to the
men, and now, as profits expanded, he thought he should put the
profit-sharing on a pay-as-you-go basis.  The morale in the plant
had been unsatisfactory; he thought this might improve it.  And he
also felt, however vaguely, that if more Americans got high wages,
there would be a market for more industrial products, including of
course Ford cars.  Because he was afraid that the sudden jump in
income might demoralize the spending habits in some families, he
made the raise conditional upon their demonstrating that they
didn't waste the money--a navely paternalistic idea which he later
had to modify.  But before long he was paying nearly all his
workmen the astonishing new wages.

The public reaction to the announcement was terrific.  Most
businessmen were indignant: Ford was ruining the labor market, he
was putting crazy ideas into workmen's heads, he would embarrass
companies which couldn't possibly distribute such largess, he was a
crude self-advertiser.  There was much scoffing of the sort that a
Muncie, Indiana, newspaper indulged in many years later:  "Henry
Ford thinks that wages ought to be higher and goods cheaper.  We
agree with him, and let us add that it ought to be cooler in the
summer and warmer in winter."  People with tenderer minds hailed
Ford for his generosity and said that he was showing what a noble
conscience could achieve in the hitherto unregenerate precincts of
industry.  Meanwhile the Ford plant was mobbed by applicants for

What Ford had actually done--in his manufacturing techniques, his
deliberate price cutting, and his deliberate wage raising--was to
demonstrate with unprecedented directness one of the great
principles of modern industrialism: the dynamic logic of mass
production.  This is the principle that the more goods you produce,
the less it costs to produce them; and that the more people are
well off, the more they can buy, thus making this lavish and
economical production possible.

Every successful manufacturer had followed this principle up to a
point.  But few had been able to follow it far; or, if able to, had
been able to resist for very long the human temptation to cease
expanding their output unduly and then to cash in by charging what
the traffic would bear.  Very few manufacturers, for that matter,
had a single product to sell for which there proved to be an almost
inexhaustible market if costs were reduced, or could go on, year
after year, turning out this identical product with very little
retooling.  With these special advantages, Henry Ford--a cranky and
self-willed man, in many respects an ignorant and opinionated man,
and a merciless competitor, but in his own special way a man of
stubborn democratic faith--followed the dynamic logic of mass
production all the way, and the results were uncanny.

In 1909-10 his price per car had been $950.  It went down to $780,
to $690, to $600, to $550, to $490, to $440, to $360; then, after
an increase due to the shortages and inflation of World War I, went
down again until by 1924 the price of a Ford (without self-starter)
was only $290.  Meanwhile production had expanded by slow degrees
from 18,664 cars all the way to 1,250,000 in 1920-21.

Ford followed the principle without compromise until 1927, when two
facts caught up with him.  One was that Americans wanted not only
cheaper cars, but better ones; rival manufacturers had discovered
that if you put out a new and improved model each year, the older
ones would become obsolescent, and thus you could turn old
customers into new ones; and these brighter and livelier new models
had succeeded in making the gaunt and tinny Model T obsolescent
indeed.  The other fact was that the thirst for new and up-to-date
vehicles was automatically producing a flourishing market in second-
and third- and fourth-hand cars, at dwindling prices, so that Model
T no longer had a monopoly of the bargain hunters' market.

In the meantime, however, Ford's experiment had had what Paul
Hoffman has called "multiplier value."  For he had advertised a
principle which, though more often honored in the breach than in
the observance, has a place of some sort in the thinking of every
industrial manager today.  The continuing discovery and
demonstration of this principle has been one of the most powerful
forces in the making of twentieth-century America.  For it has had
its corollaries: that a nation of men and women secure against
exploitation and acute poverty is a nation of delighted buyers of
goods, to everybody's profit; that it pays better to produce the
same sort of food, clothing, and equipment for people of all income
levels, than to produce luxury goods for a few; and that therefore
one can make money by lowering class barriers.  Thus is Marxism
confounded--not by dogma, but by the logic of advanced industrialism
itself; or, to put it another way, by capitalism turned to
democratic ends.


The great Ford experiment was only one element in the lively
industrial development of the United States during the first two
decades of the twentieth century.  For industry and business in
general were expanding and changing as the nation gradually came of

It was the golden heyday of railroading.  The great network of
railroad lines which linked the country together from sea to sea
was now virtually complete, and the amount of business which the
railroads did swelled hugely.  By 1920, for example, they were not
only carrying vastly more freight, but were carrying more than
twice as many passengers as in 1900, and carrying them longer
distances than before, so that the figures for "passenger miles"
almost tripled.  Shares in the big railroad corporations--New York
Central, Pennsylvania, Union Pacific, Northern Pacific, and so on--
were the pride, and sometimes the undoing, of investors; rare was
the man of means who did not have railroad bonds in his portfolio--
while bigger and more powerful locomotives hauled longer and
heavier freight and passenger trains from city to city, hooting
disdainfully as they crossed dirt roads as yet unpaved for
automobile traffic.

It was the heyday of the electric trolley lines, too.  Who
remembers, now, such bright flowers of the streetcar era as the
"Berkshire Hills," the extra-fare interurban trolley car that ran
between Great Barrington, Massachusetts, and Bennington, Vermont,
for several years after 1908--an elegant white car with buff trim
and gold-leaf lettering, with wicker seats inside, and red brocaded
curtains, and a Wilton carpet, all at the traveler's disposal for
an extra fare of fifty cents?  And who knows whether any of its
proud passengers had any notion that the trolley era was to be
short-lived, and that the "Berkshire Hills," like many another
relic of that era, would ultimately become a roadside diner?

It was the morning of the electrical age.  In 1900 Henry Adams had
stood transfixed at the sight of a dynamo at the Paris Exposition,
and had seen in it a "symbol of infinity"; during the years
thereafter, more and more dynamos--and turbines--were being built,
and transmission lines were carrying the magic power far and wide.
In 1889, less than 2 per cent of the power used in industry had
been electric; by 1919, over 31 per cent of it was.  The steel
industry grew mightily too as the open-hearth process of steel
making supplanted the Bessemer process.  By 1920 the output of iron
and steel per capita had almost tripled since that memorable day in
1900 when Andrew Carnegie, returning home from a game of golf with
Charlie Schwab, had scribbled down on a sheet of paper his terms
for the sale of Carnegie Steel to Morgan to form the United States
Steel Corporation.  Skyscrapers were shooting up in the cities; and
although most of the people who craned their necks at the 41-story
Singer Building, built in New York in 1908, or the 50-story
Metropolitan Tower which closely followed it, or the 60-story
Woolworth Building, completed in 1913, probably thought of them as
splendid symbols of the American zest for doing bigger and bigger
things, they were more especially triumphs of the steel industry
that had made their strength and grace possible, and of the
electric industry that had made their vital elevator service

If the skyscrapers looked like cathedral towers, the new department
stores looked like palaces.  And another sort of rival to the old-
time individually owned store was multiplying.  The chain stores
were on their way, paced by the Woolworth five-and-tens and by the
A & P, which was operating 200 stores by 1900, 400 by 1912 (when it
opened in Newark its first cash-and-carry store), and then--after a
terrific spurt of expansion--as many as 11,413 stores by 1924.
Here again, at the distribution end of the industrial process, the
dynamic logic of mass production was being demonstrated.  For if
you could build enough red-fronted stores, with standardized
methods and low selling costs, you could attract millions of
shoppers, and cut your prices way down by placing huge bulk orders
for goods--and still make money.

Meanwhile the automobile industry was going through the first and
second phases of an evolution that seems to be standard in the
industrial world.  First was the phase of numerous competition.
During these first two decades of the century automobile
manufacturers were legion.  Hundreds of mechanically-minded men
scrabbled for capital and set up their little factories to produce
cars: bicycle makers like Pope and Alexander Winton, electric-
company employees like Ford, plumbers' supply men like David Dunbar
Buick, wagon builders like the associates of Clement Studebaker,
axle manufacturers like Harry C. Stutz.  Innumerable makes were put
on the market, with names that now have nostalgic overtones for
people with long memories--Apperson, Briscoe, Stevens-Duryea,
Franklin, Chandler, Scripps-Booth, Peerless, Pierce Arrow,
Locomobile, Owen Magnetic, and so on endlessly.

And while this proliferation was still going on, the second phase
began.  Promoters with capital at their disposal--or with a smooth
gift for selling stock--went shopping for promising automobile
companies in order to merge them into combinations.  At the very
moment in 1908 when Ford was first putting Model T into production,
William C. Durant--a promoter who, unlike Ford, fixed his vaulting
mind upon properties and profits rather than upon machines--put
together the Buick company and the Olds company and a few others
under the management of a New Jersey holding company which he
called General Motors, and which--after extreme vicissitudes,
during which Durant lost control of it, recaptured it, and then
lost control once more, this time to the du Ponts and their allies--
was to become one of the giants of the third phase of the
industry.  This third phase was that in which competition pushed to
the wall, one by one, all but a few monster concerns and a few
minor rivals.

Meanwhile, too, this same motor industry was beginning to bring out
two other products which were to affect the working lives of
millions of people--the motor truck, which was destined to be the
deadly rival of the railroads, and the tractor.  The first crude
tractors had been built about 1902.  By 1910, production had
reached 4,000 a year; by 1920 it had passed 200,000 a year.  The
mechanization of the American farm and the planting of the
grasslands to wheat were getting under way fast.

All this growth and change, so various and so exciting, was
accelerated by the development of a rising idea--that of the
dignity and importance of national advertising.  In the nineties
Munsey and McClure had discovered that if you could sell a popular
magazine to enough people, and thus attract enough advertisers, you
could sell it for less than the cost of printing it, and still make
money through your advertising revenue.  It was during the next two
decades that Cyrus H. K. Curtis and his editors George Horace
Lorimer of the Saturday Evening Post and Edward Bok of the Ladies'
Home Journal provided spectacular demonstrations of this
journalistic version of the dynamic logic of mass production.  What
they did is summed up in the figures showing the growth of the
Saturday Evening Post during those years.  In 1902 it sold 314,671
copies per issue, and brought in an advertising revenue of
$360,125.  By 1922 it was selling 2,187,024 copies per issue--about
seven times as many as in 1902--while its advertising revenue had
climbed steeply to $28,278,755--over 78 times as much as in 1902!

What do those figures signify?  First, that through this five-cent
magazine, and others like it, millions of Americans were getting a
weekly or monthly inoculation in ways of living and of thinking
that were middle-class, or classless American (as opposed to
plutocratic or aristocratic or proletarian); and second, that
through the same media they were being introduced to the promised
delights of the automobiles, spark plugs, tires, typewriters,
talking machines, collars, corsets, and breakfast foods that
American industry was producing, not for the few, but for the many.
The magazine publisher, the copy writer, the advertising artist,
and the advertising agent were all abetting the mass-production

One further word about this principle.  It got a tremendous lift
from World War I.  For during that war--as during World War II--
manufacturers suddenly found themselves faced with one overwhelming
demand: to make as many guns or shells or ships as possible, and as
fast as possible.  No need to worry about glutting the market.  No
need to worry unduly about price.  Just concentrate on quantity and
speed.  The result took people's breath away: the volume of
production was terrific.  (And incidentally, it brought such
fantastic profits, in the absence of any machinery for the
renegotiation of contracts, that when the figures were paraded
before the public during the nineteen-thirties, many people arrived
at the interesting notion that there would be no more wars if it
were not for profit-hungry munitions makers.)

Between 1914 and 1918 many a man who had only half believed that
bigger production brought sharply reduced costs began to dream
dreams of an exciting future when he saw what mechanization,
unleashed, could accomplish.


During those same years the seeds of future industries were being

On January 10, 1901, Spindletop blew in: Anthony F. Lucas struck
oil at Spindletop near Beaumont, Texas.  Thus began a new era for
the Southwest--and a guarantee that the automobile business, then
in its feeble infancy, would have as it grew to maturity an
abundant source of power.

On December 17, 1903, on the sands of Kittyhawk on the North
Carolina coast, Orville Wright made a twelve-second flight--and
then his brother Wilbur made a fifty-nine-second flight--in an
airplane they had painstakingly built.  Several years went by
before the public grasped what the Wrights were doing; people were
so convinced that flying was impossible that most of those who saw
them flying about Dayton in 1905 decided that what they had seen
must be some trick without significance--somewhat as most people
today would regard a demonstration of, let us say, telepathy.
Never before or since, in all probability, have the newshawks of
America taken longer to apprehend a momentous story.  It was not
FIRST FLIGHT--that experienced reporters were sent to observe what
they were doing, experienced editors gave full credence to these
reporters' excited dispatches, and the world at last woke up to the
fact that human flight had been successfully accomplished--though
in the interval the Wrights had flown repeatedly and their longest
flight had lasted a full thirty-eight minutes!  The seed of the
great aviation industry had been sown in 1903; it began to sprout,
very belatedly, in 1908.

Wireless telegraphy had been discovered in 1895 by an Italian,
Guglielmo Marconi--but its future possibilities were not
comprehended in 1900, when Reginald A. Fessenden first transmitted
speech by wireless; or in 1904, when Sir John Ambrose Fleming
produced the radio detector or Fleming valve; or in 1907, when Dr.
Lee De Forest produced the audion; or in 1912, when Edwin H.
Armstrong discovered the electric generator circuit by means of
which the feeble impulses received by radio could be "fed back" and
multiplied many times.  For that matter, as late as 1915, when
David Sarnoff, assistant traffic manager of the Marconi Wireless
Telegraph Company, proposed a "radio music box" and suggested the
future possibilities of public broadcasting, he spoke to deaf ears.
But the seeds of the radio and television industries had been sown.

In 1903 was produced the first moving picture which told a
connected story, The Great Train Robbery.  About 1905 the first
nickelodeons appeared--crude motion-picture theaters, often
improvised in vacant stores.  And the movies began their slow march
to importance as a vehicle of popular entertainment and as an
inculcator of the assumptions of the classless American life.

In 1909 Leo H. Baekeland first put on the market a chemically-made
substance which he called bakelite.  It was not the first plastic--
that honor had gone to celluloid, much earlier--but it may justly
be called the seed from which the plastics industry grew.  And
along with the material which, when first clumsily produced before
1920, was known as "artificial silk," and which later came to be
known as rayon, it helped to beget one of the most important
concepts of twentieth-century invention: the idea that man could
produce materials to order--not simply synthetic imitations of
nature, but often materials superior to what nature could produce.
Witness the subsequent miracle of nylon.

One might add that in 1911 Willis H. Carrier read a paper on what
he called "Rational Psychrometric Formulae," which presented the
theory and the practical data on which the air-conditioning
industry was later based.  And that at the St. Louis Exposition in
1904 there was exhibited an oil engine built in Providence, Rhode
Island, after the plans of the great German inventor, Rudolf
Diesel.  Few people at the time seemed unduly excited by the fact
that they had met it at St. Louis, but the Diesel engine, too, had
a future.

To understand the America of today one must not only realize how
vital to its development was the revolt of the American conscience,
which implanted in Americans the idea that you could repair the
economic and political machinery of the country, so as to make it
work better for the majority, without stopping the machine; one
must also realize that the revolt of the American conscience might
have caused a mere redistribution of wealth rather than a
multiplication of wealth unless the machine had kept on running and
a host of men had been tinkering with it, revealing how it could
follow the dynamic logic of mass production, and also discovering
and inventing new things for it to do in the long and hopeful

Chapter 8

The Automobile Revolution

In the year 1906 Woodrow Wilson, who was then president of
Princeton University, said, "Nothing has spread socialistic feeling
in this country more than the automobile," and added that it
offered "a picture of the arrogance of wealth."  Less than twenty
years later, two women of Muncie, Indiana, both of whom were
managing on small incomes, spoke their minds to investigators
gathering facts for that admirable sociological study of an
American community, Middletown.  Said one, who was the mother of
nine children, "We'd rather do without clothes than give up the
car."  Said the other, "I'll go without food before I'll see us
give up the car."  And elsewhere another housewife, in answer to a
comment on the fact that her family owned a car but no bathtub,
uttered a fitting theme song for the automobile revolution.  "Why,"
said she, "you can't go to town in a bathtub!"

This change in the status of the automobile from a luxury for the
few to a necessity for the many--a change which, as we shall see,
progressively transformed American communities and daily living
habits and ideas throughout the half century--did not come about
abruptly.  It could not.  For it depended upon three things.
First, a reliable, manageable, and not too expensive car.  Second,
good roads.  And third, garages and filling stations in profusion.
And all these three requirements had to come slowly, by degrees,
each reinforcing the others; a man who had tried to operate a
filling station beside a dusty rural road in 1906 would have
speedily gone bankrupt.  But it was during the nineteen-twenties
that the impact of the change was felt most sharply from year to

When Woodrow Wilson spoke in 1906, and for years thereafter, the
automobile had been a high-hung, noisy vehicle which couldn't quite
make up its mind that it was not an obstreperous variety of
carriage.  It was so unreliable in its performance, so likely to be
beset by tire blowouts, spark-plug trouble, carburetor trouble,
defects in the transmission, and other assorted ailments, that a
justly popular song of the time celebrated the troubles of the
owner who "had to get under, get out and get under."  The country
doctors who in increasing numbers were coming to use the little
brass-nosed Fords of the day had to be students of mechanical as
well as human pathology.  Each car had a toolbox on the running
board, and tourists were accustomed to carrying with them blowout
patches, French chalk, and a variety of tire irons against that
awful moment when a tire would pop, miles from any help.  One had
to crank the engine by hand--a difficult and sometimes dangerous
business.  All cars except the limousines of the wealthy were open,
with vertical windshields which gave so little protection against
wind and dust to those in the back seat that dusters and even
goggles were widely worn; and a gust of rain would necessitate a
frantic raising of the folding top and a vexatious fitting and
buttoning of the side curtains.

Roads were mostly dusty or muddy, with no through routes.  Even as
late as 1921 there was no such thing as an officially numbered
highway.  In that year the Automobile Blue Book warned those who
proposed to drive from Richford, Vermont, to Montreal:  "Chains on
all four wheels absolutely essential in wet weather."  And it
advised tourists in general that "where mountain roads, sandy
stretches, and muddy places are to be met with, a shovel with a
collapsible handle" might prove very useful.  At the time when
Wilson spoke, panicky horses were still a hazard for the driver in
remote districts, and speed limits set by farmer-minded local
officials were sometimes low indeed: my personal memory tells me--
unbelievably but I think reliably--that in tranquil Holderness,
New Hampshire, the original legal limit was six miles an hour.

Ford's energetic driving down of prices helped to make the
automobile more popular, but equally responsible were a series of
vital improvements: the invention of an effective self-starter,
first designed by Charles F. Kettering and installed in the
Cadillac in 1912; the coming, within the next two or three years,
of the demountable rim and the cord tire; but above all, the
introduction of the closed car.  As late as 1916 only 2 per cent of
the cars manufactured in the United States were closed; by 1926, 72
per cent of them were.

What had happened was that manufacturers had learned to build
closed cars that were not hideously expensive, that did not rattle
themselves to pieces, and that could be painted with a fast-drying
but durable paint; and that meanwhile the car-buying public had
discovered with delight that a closed car was something quite
different from the old "horseless carriage."  It was a power-driven
room on wheels--storm-proof, lockable, parkable all day and all
night in all weathers.  In it you could succumb to speed fever
without being battered by the wind.  You could close its windows
against dust or rain.  You could use it to fetch home the
groceries, to drive to the golf club or the railroad station, to
cool off on hot evenings, to reach a job many miles distant and
otherwise inaccessible, to take the family out for a day's drive or
a week-end excursion, to pay an impromptu visit to friends forty or
fifty miles away, or, as innumerable young couples were not slow to
learn, to engage in private intimacies.  One of the cornerstones of
American morality had been the difficulty of finding a suitable
locale for misconduct; now this cornerstone was crumbling.  And if
the car was also a frequent source of family friction ("No, Junior,
you are NOT taking it tonight"), as well as a destroyer of
pedestrianism, a weakener of the churchgoing habit, a promoter of
envy, a lethal weapon when driven by heedless, drunken, or
irresponsible people, and a formidable convenience for criminals
seeking a safe getaway, it was nonetheless indispensable.

Furthermore, a car was now less expensive to maintain than in the
days when the cost of successive repairs might mount up to a
formidable sum each year.  And it could be bought on easy payments.
The installment selling of cars, virtually unknown before World War
I, spread so rapidly that by 1925 over three-quarters of all cars,
new and old, were being sold this way.

Over these same years more and more roads had been paved, as public
officials discovered that appropriations for highway surfacing were
no longer considered mere favors to the rich; and garages and
filling stations had multiplied.

The result of all these developments was a headlong rush to buy
cars on the part of innumerable people to whom the idea of becoming
automobile owners would have seemed fantastic only a few years
before.  In 1915 there were less than 2 1/2 million cars registered
in the United States.  By 1920 there were over 9 million; by 1925,
nearly 20 million; by 1930, over 26 1/2 million.

So it was that the years between 1918 and 1930 introduced to
America a long series of novelties which are now such familiar
features of the American scene that one might think we had always
had them: automatic traffic lights, concrete roads with banked
curves, six-lane boulevards, one-way streets, officially numbered
highways, tourist homes, and tourist cabins; and lined the edges of
the major thoroughfares with that garish jumble of roadside
services and businesses that Benton Mackaye and Lewis Mumford
called "road town"--roadside diners, hot-dog stands, peanut stands,
fruit and vegetable stalls, filling station after filling station,
and used-car lots.

Meanwhile an antidote to the increasing snarl and confusion and
frustration of traffic through the built-up areas of the East was
already in preparation.  For a generation the officials of
Westchester County, New York, had been disturbed by the polluted
condition of the little Bronx River and by its tendency to flood,
and had been planning to restrict and control its flow while making
it the chief attraction of a long strip of parkway--which almost
incidentally would contain a through automobile road.  When this
road was opened to the public in 1925, motorists and traffic
commissions and regional planners happily saw in it the answer to
their prayers: an ample highway, with traffic lanes separated at
intervals, uncluttered by local traffic, winding through a
landscape undefaced by commerce.  On such a highway one could make
time most agreeably.  Other parkways, wider and straighter, were
thereupon built, both in Westchester County and elsewhere; existing
through highways were rebuilt to by-pass towns along their way; so
that by August, 1931, Mackaye and Mumford, writing in Harper's,
could announce that it had at last been recognized that the
automobile was less like a family carriage than like a family
locomotive, and also could look forward prophetically to a now-
familiar scene.  The time would come, they predicted, when a
motorist with a long drive before him would ease into the fast
traffic on a "townless highway" and presently would be spinning
along "with less anxiety and more safety at 60 miles an hour than
he used to have in the old road-town confusion at 25."  When that
day came, they said, the automobile would have become "an honor to
our mechanical civilization and not a reproach to it."

In 1931 those days had not yet arrived.  There was still no Merritt
Parkway, no Pennsylvania Turnpike; there were no butterfly
intersections; there was no such majestic combination of separate
lanes of traffic as would be seen by the mid-century at Cahuenga
Pass in Los Angeles, where no less than fourteen lanes were to run
side by side.  Already motor busses had arrived in quantity, but
the progressive ripping up of trolley tracks had only begun.
Already motor trucks were taking freight business away from the
railroads, but there was still no such vast and humming all-night
traffic of trucks, truck tractors, and semi-trailers between our
great cities as later years were to bring.  And that perfect symbol
of our national mobility, the residential trailer, was only just
appearing: the first trailer had been built in 1929 by a
bacteriologist, for vacation use, but these houses on wheels were
not to arrive in force until the mid-thirties.  Yet already the
pattern of the automobile age had been set.


No such startling change in the habits of a people could have taken
place without having far-reaching social effects.  Let us glance at
a few of them.

1.  It developed the motorized suburb.  Where a suburb had
previously been accessible by railroad, but had been limited in
size because of the difficulty of reaching the station from any
place more than a mile or so away from it, it grew with startling
speed, as real-estate subdivides bought up big tracts of property
and laid out Woodmere Road and Edgemont Drive and Lakeside Terrace,
suitable for English-cottage-type or Spanish-villa-type or New-
England-salt-box-type (or, later, ranch-type) houses with attached
garages; where the children would have the benefit of light and air
and play space, and their parents would have the benefit of
constant battles over the policies of the local school board; where
the wife would gulp down her coffee at 7:52 to drive her husband to
the 8:03 train before driving her children to school and doing the
family errands.

In a suburb which had previously been inaccessible by railroad the
same phenomenon took place with only a slight variation: the earner
of the family drove all the way from his almost-rural cottage to
his place of work--and worried about the parking problem in the
city.  The number of Americans whose heart and treasure were twenty
miles apart, as Agnes Rogers has put it, was vastly increased.  And
as more and more people whose living was dependent upon work at the
center of the city fled to the leafy outskirts, urban planners
began to be concerned about the blighted areas around the center of
the city, where land values were falling and a general deterioration
was manifest.

2.  The coming of the automobile age brought other changes too.  It
caused a widespread shift of business, and of economic and social
importance, from the railroad town to the off-the-railroad one;
from the farm that was four miles from a railroad station but had
poor soil to the fertile farm that was twenty or fifty miles from
rail; and from the center of the small city to its outskirts.

The hotel on Main Street, that had formerly been the one and only
place for the traveling salesman to stop, lost business to the
tourist camp on Highway 84.  In due course this tourist camp was
transformed into a new kind of roadside hotel, which offered
overnight privacy--and sometimes luxury--without having to carry
the economic load of high land value and of maintaining a
restaurant and other public rooms.  The shops along Main Street
lost business to the new Sears Roebuck store at the edge of town,
with its ample parking lot.  City department stores, becoming
painfully aware of their dwindling appeal to commuters, opened
suburban branches to catch the out-of-town trade.  And by the mid-
century, shopping centers were beginning to be developed out in the
open countryside, where the prime essential of parking space would
be abundant.

The big summer hotel lost business, as the automobile opened up to
a vast number of people the opportunity either to range from motel
to motel or to have their own summer cottages, to which they could
travel not only for the summer, but even for occasional week ends
at other times in the year, by wedging the family into a car that
bulged with people, suitcases, and assorted duffle.  In resort
after resort a pattern of change was repeated: the big hotel on the
point, or at the beach, or on the hilltop was torn down, while the
number of cottages in the neighborhood of its site doubled,
tripled, quadrupled; and meanwhile the Friday afternoon traffic out
of the city to various points, beaches, and hilltops became denser
and denser.  The trunk manufacturers lost business to the suitcase
manufacturers, and the express companies languished.

During the single decade of the nineteen-twenties, railroad
passenger traffic was almost cut in half; only commuter traffic
held up.  (In the outskirts of New York, the next two decades were
to witness a decline even in railroad commuter traffic, as the new
parkways, bridges, and tunnels into Manhattan swelled the number of
commuters by bus and by private car.)

3.  The automobile age brought a parking problem that was forever
being solved and then unsolving itself again.  During the early
nineteen-twenties the commuters who left their cars at the suburban
railroad station at first parked them at the edge of the station
drive; then they needed a special parking lot, and pretty soon an
extended parking lot, and in due course a still bigger one--and the
larger the lot grew, the more people wanted to use it.  New
boulevards, widened roads, and parkways relieved the bottlenecks at
the approaches to the big cities--and invited more and more cars to
enter.  At the end of the half century the question, "Where do I
park?" was as annoyingly insistent as it had been at any time since
the arrival of the automobile.

4.  The new dispensation brought sudden death.  During the nineteen-
twenties the number of people slaughtered annually by cars in the
United States climbed from a little less than 15,000 in 1922 to
over 32,000 in 1930; eighteen years later, in 1948, it stood at
almost exactly the 1930 figure.  As cars had become more powerful,
and roads had become more persuasively straight and smooth, and
speeds had increased, the shocking death toll each week end had led
to the more cautious licensing of drivers and inspection of cars,
to the multiplication of warning signs along the roadsides, and to
the study of the causes and cures of death on the highway by such
organizations as the National Safety Council and the Automotive
Safety Council.  But meanwhile youngsters had learned to play
"chicken," and hot-rod enthusiasts had taken to the road; and many
older drivers, after a few drinks, found it easy to persuade
themselves that they should overtake and pass that damned old
creeping car at the crest of a hill, and even the most sedate
motorist sometimes fell asleep at the wheel--and now the accidents
that took place, while less frequent, were more lethal.  So that at
the turn of the half century one could still predict with
reasonable certainty that a holiday week end would bring several
hundred men, women, and children to an abrupt and gory end.

5.  Along with the telephone, the radio, and the other agencies of
communication, the automobile revolution ended the isolation of the
farmer.  In 1900 Ray Stannard Baker, describing a wave of
prosperity among the farmers of the Midwest, had said that when a
farmer did well, the first thing he did was to paint the barn; the
second was to add a porch to his house; the third was to buy a
piano; and the fourth was to send his children to college.  By the
mid-twenties the purchase of a car was likely to come even before
the painting of the barn--and a new piano was a rarity.  The
widening use of the tractor was enlarging farms; and with the aid
of the profusion of scientific information which was made available
through the publications and county agents of the Department of
Agriculture, the farmer was becoming less and less a laborer by
hand, using rule-of-thumb methods, and more and more a businessman
of the soil, an operator of machines, and a technologist.  No
longer, now, when he visited town, was he a rube, a hayseed, whose
wife and daughters looked hick in calico.  By 1939 the Sears
Roebuck catalogue was listing dresses "inspired by Schiaparelli,"
and in 1940 it solemnly announced that "The traditional lapse
between the acceptance of new fashions . . . in metropolitan
centers and on farms apparently no longer exists."

6.  The automobile broadened geographical horizons, especially for
people who had hitherto considered themselves too poor to travel.
One could still find, here and there, men and women who had never
ventured farther from home than the county seat, but their number
was dwindling fast.  For now the family who had always stayed at
home on their day off could drive to the lakes or the shore, and on
their vacation could range widely over the land, see new things,
engage in new sports, meet new people.  Even their daily radius of
activity lengthened startlingly: by the nineteen-forties it might
be a matter of routine for a rural family to drive ten or fifteen
miles to do their shopping, twenty or thirty to see the movies,
fifty to visit a doctor or dentist.

Furthermore, the automobile weakened the roots which held a family
to one spot.  Always a mobile people by comparison with the peoples
of Europe, now Americans followed the economic tides more readily
than ever before, moving by automobile--and before long by trailer--
wherever there might be a call for construction workers, or fruit
pickers, or airplane mechanics.  Sober intellectuals were wont to
deplore the growing American restlessness and to praise the man who
was rooted to the land where he and his forefathers had been born
and bred; but the automobile suited the American genius.  For that
genius was not static but venturesome; Americans felt that a
rolling stone gathers experience, adventure, sophistication, and--
with luck--new and possibly fruitful opportunities.

7.  The automobile revolution engendered personal pride.  When I
say this I am not thinking of the envy-in-reverse of the man or
woman who revels in having a finer model of car than the neighbors
can afford, but of something less readily defined but no less real.
Someone has said that the Asiatic, long accustomed to humiliation
at the hands of the lordly white European, will endure it no longer
after he has once sat at the controls of a tractor or a bulldozer.
Similarly the American who has been humbled by poverty, or by his
insignificance in the business order, or by his racial status, or
by any other circumstance that might demean him in his own eyes,
gains a sense of authority when he slides behind the wheel of an
automobile and it leaps forward at his bidding, ready to take him
wherever he may personally please.  If he drives a bus or a huge
truck trailer his state is all the more kingly, for he feels
himself responsible for the wielding of a sizable concentration of

This effect of the automobile revolution was especially noticeable
in the South, where one began to hear whites complaining about
"uppity niggers" on the highways, where there was no Jim Crow.  But
the new sense of pride was dispersed far more widely than that; in
some degree it affected almost everyone on the road.  In 1950 the
civilian labor force of the United States was estimated to number a
little less than 59 million men and women; in the same year the
number of drivers in the United States was estimated to be a little
larger: 59,300,000.  More than one driver for every jobholder!
Never before in human history, perhaps, had any such proportion of
the nationals of any land known the lifting of the spirit that the
free exercise of power can bring.

Chapter 9

Indian Summer of the Old Order

During the three or four years that followed the Armistice of 1918
there came a subtle change in the emotional weather.  The torch of
idealism that had kindled the revolt of the American conscience
seemed to have pretty well burned itself out.  People were tired.
In particular their public spirit, their consciences, and their
hopes were tired.

The returning soldiers were disillusioned about the crusade they
had been sent off on.  The war had proved to be a filthy business,
in which noble purposes had been less visible than barbarity and
cooties; and a good many American doughboys, allergic to foreign
manners and ways of living, had seen quite enough of their noble
British and French allies to hold them for some time.  Foreigners
began to seem a dubious lot anyhow; American enthusiasm for the
League of Nations petered out, and we decided--disastrously
perhaps, but under the circumstances almost inevitably--to play in
our own backyard.  People felt it was about time to relax; to look
after themselves, rather than after other people and the world in
general; and to have a good time.  The prohibition law--that
curious final product of the revolt of the American conscience--had
not been long on the books before people began to flout it right
and left; pretty soon a great many men and women who had always
considered themselves patterns of law-abiding respectability began
to patronize bootleggers, or home-brew very peculiar beer, or
concoct even queerer bathtub gin, or wear hip-pocket flasks to
parties.  Even the reformers themselves were tired, and wondered
why they now went limp at the thought of battling for great
political causes.

Weary of striving onward and upward, the electorate chose for
President in 1920 the handsome Warren G. Harding, a senator whose
greatest assets, aside from his magnificent good looks, were his
kindliness, folksiness, and humility.  An amiable man of no lofty
intellectual or moral stature, he had no conspicuous urge to
improve anything; he preferred to talk about what he called
"normalcy," meaning normality.  And he was subsequently discovered
to have had among his buddies in office some egregious grafters.
When Harding died--some time before the full enormity of the
scandals of his regime became known--he was succeeded by Calvin
Coolidge, an honest, careful, prudent man but one of the most
negative characters ever to attain high American office.  Coolidge
didn't grapple with any national problem until it was forced upon
his attention, could sit through a prolonged social occasion
without opening his mouth to utter more than an occasional
monosyllable, and liked to take afternoon naps in the quiet of the
White House--naps which according to Chief Usher "Ike" Hoover
lasted from two to four hours.  Coolidge's genius for inactivity
seemed to be all right with the majority of the American people,
who for the time being wanted to enjoy the sort of happiness that
has been said to be the lot of the nation that has no history.

A friend of mine who was a very small boy in 1918 was told by his
father that the Armistice had been signed, and asked, "Now that the
war's over, what will they find to put in the newspapers?"  His
father laughed, but in retrospect the question seems to have had
considerable point.  For the fact is that gradually military
affairs and foreign affairs and politics began to yield first place
in newspaper coverage to scandals, crimes, disasters, human dramas,
and sports, not simply in such sensational sheets as the new
tabloids, but also in the more severe and discreet ones.  Turn back
today to the yellowing pages of the newspapers of the latter part
of 1926, when the Hall-Mills murder case was unfolding, and you may
be surprised to find that even the New York Times--a paper
conscientiously devoted then, as later, to telling everything about
everything important--gave front-page, right-hand-column treatment,
day after day, to the news from Somerville, New Jersey, where Mrs.
Edward Wheeler Hall and her two brothers and her cousin were on
trial for the murder of the Rev. Mr. Hall and Mrs. Mills of his
church choir.  And when, the following spring, young Charles A.
Lindbergh flew non-stop from New York to Paris, the papers, along
with everybody else, behaved as if his feat had been the most earth-
shaking event since the Creation.  Nothing that Congress could do,
no triumph of the devisers of foreign treaties, no public crisis,
seemed to matter alongside the fact that a charming young man had
made a bold and exceptionally long flight.

Something like a World-Series-week spirit--a contagion of delighted
concern over things that were exciting but didn't matter profoundly--
was dominant.  People followed eagerly the sporting exploits of
Jack Dempsey, Babe Ruth, Bobby Jones, Helen Wills, Gertrude Ederle,
Red Grange, the Four Horsemen of Notre Dame, and other athletic
heroes of the hour; agonized over the attempts to rescue from a
Kentucky cave an obscure young man named Floyd Collins; hung on the
day-to-day reports from the Scopes trial in Dayton, Tennessee, and
from the murder trial of Leopold and Loeb; and welcomed to America,
with showers of torn paper in New York, heroes and heroines of
large and small renown.  Why stop to ask whether Queen Marie of
Rumania, for example, really rated a public welcome?  She was a
handsome woman and a queen, and anyhow the party itself, the
crowds, the noise, and the torn-up telephone books and streams of
ticker tape drifting down from upper windows made a wonderful show.


Along with this enjoyment of tremendous trivia there was a very
general desire, in the nineteen-twenties, to shake off the
restraints of puritanism, to upset the long-standing conventions of

There had been advance signals of this rebellion.  One had been the
dance craze which had arrived about 1912, and which had set stiff-
jointed elderly couples to fox-trotting or doing the tango along
with their juniors at innumerable th dansants, to the music of
Irving Berlin's jazz.  Another had been the Armory Show of 1913,
which had exhibited to an astonished public some remarkable samples
of highly non-academic modern art.  Still another had been an
outburst of free verse among poets in rebellion against accepted
poetic conventions.  Furthermore, the war had pulled millions of
young men and women out of their accustomed environments, and given
them a taste of freedom under circumstances in which it didn't seem
to matter very much what Mrs. Grundy said.  With many of these
young people the postwar reaction took a special form: it was easy
for them to think of themselves as a generation who had been
condemned to go through the hell of war because of the mistakes of
their elders, whose admonitions on any subject must therefore be
suspect.  At any rate, by 1920 the rebellion against puritanism and
stuffiness was widely visible, and it gained in impetus as the
decade progressed.

It was the girls who spearheaded it.  Did mothers think of corsets
as the armor of respectability?  A great many daughters decided
that dancing without a corset was much more personal and
satisfactory.  Did mothers think young girls shouldn't drink?
Daughters found that a gulp of illegal whiskey from the hip flask
of a swain in a parked sedan added an excellent note of zest to the
proceedings.  Did mothers converse in ladylike circumlocutions?
Daughters talked right out about sex and the libido, the latter
being a word one got from Freud, who had said, according to report,
that repressions were bad for you.  Had mothers been brought up in
the era of long skirts, when the exposure of an ankle to the public
gaze had been regarded as a virtual invitation to masculine lust?
Daughters reveled in the emancipation of the new styles, which by
the middle of the decade had lifted the hemline all the way to the

In a few short years American women in general changed almost
unrecognizably in appearance.  As late as 1919 they had worn amply
cut, ankle-length dresses over such underpinnings as corset covers,
envelope chemises, and petticoats; they had worn their hair long,
and had needed hatpins; and their daytime stockings had been mostly
made of black (or brown, or green, or blue) cotton or lisle; silk
stockings were considered somewhat luxurious.  By the latter
nineteen-twenties young women had reduced the yardage of their
garments by one-half, were increasingly wearing silk or rayon
underwear, and sought desperately to look pencil slim.  They wore
their hair short--bobbed or boyishly shingled--and made frequent
visits to that rising institution, the beauty parlor, which had
come into its own following the widespread acceptance of the
permanent wave.  And since the early twenties they had been
unanimously addicted to what proved to be the most durable fashion
innovation of our times--flesh-colored stockings.  (From their
color came the term "cheesecake" for leggy photography.)  Older
women followed these changes more slowly, and in some cases with a
reluctant feeling that they were succumbing to a pernicious cult of
youth.  But there was no resisting the trend.

For it fitted a changing pattern in the relations between the
sexes: the much more general acceptance of women's taking jobs,
whether they "needed to" or not; a sharp increase in feminine
smoking; the advent of mixed drinking and the introduction of that
standard social institution of later years, the cocktail party;
police protection of the speakeasy, which in most places was simply
a dive where one could get liquor, but in Manhattan might be a well-
guarded but discreetly managed restaurant-with-bar; the rising
vogue of the night club; a more playful attitude toward sex among
young people, and a more tolerant attitude toward divorce, and
indeed toward extramarital affairs, among people who considered
themselves sophisticated.  It was characteristic of the times that
during the nineteen-twenties Mary Pickford, the motion-picture
embodiment of girlish innocence, was succeeded as a movie goddess
by Clara Bow, the "it" girl.  What had happened was that feminism
had gone into a new phase.  Now that the vote had been won, the
promised entry of women into politics on a large scale had not
taken place; instead, women by and large were asserting the right
to enjoy themselves like and with men.

To this generalization one may perhaps add some footnotes from the
vantage point of the nineteen-fifties.  The first is that by
present-day standards the social conduct of those days was not
particularly loose; much more astonishing to us, in retrospect, is
the code of puritanical restraint against which the youngsters of
the nineteen-twenties were rebelling.  Which is another way of
saying that, although there have been considerable changes in the
accepted modes of social conduct since the nineteen-twenties, it
was during that decade that something approaching the present code
was established.  Yet the atmosphere was different then: there was
an air of novelty and self-conscious experiment about the relaxing
of the code which was intensely exciting to the participants and
shocking to observers who were out of step with the change.

The second footnote is that sages such as Dr. Kinsey insist that
there is little change from generation to generation in the amount
of actual illicit intercourse; to which one can only answer that
ardors of a merely preliminary or tentative sort, when conducted in
public or boasted of in public, tend to convey to all and sundry
the impression that the days of Saturnalia have arrived, whatever
the statistics of consummation may be.

The third footnote is that the prevailing mood was not one of
abandonment so much as of rowdiness.  Witness the women's fashions,
which made mature females look like short-skirted, long-waisted,
flat-breasted, short-haired little girls trying to look worldly
wise; witness, too, the bright vogue of dances such as the
"Charleston," which was a lively but unseductive romp.  The final
footnote is that of course not everybody let himself or herself go;
there were millions of Americans to whom such goings-on as I have
been hinting at were all but unthinkable.

Along with this relaxation of the social code went a wave of
religious skepticism--wasn't science making mincemeat of the old-
time religion?--and of hedonism.  Among young men and women who
prided themselves on their modern-mindedness there was a
disposition to regard church work or social service work or
anything else to which the word "uplift" could be applied as
"poisonous" and an unwarranted intrusion upon other people's
privacy; and besides, one had a right to enjoy oneself, and taking
a ride in the sedan of a Sunday morning was much more fun than
going to church.  Statistics of church membership showed no
conclusive evidence of loss, but it was clear that a lot of church
members were at the golf links on Sunday instead of in their pews,
and that the church was progressively losing its hold on the
brighter members of the younger generation.  People of a naturally
aspiring turn of mind were likely to be channeling their idealism
into a devotion for psychoanalysis, which looked to them like an
agreeably uninhibited sort of salvation-through-science; or for
progressive education, which was based upon a rebellion against the
strictness of the old educational tradition; or for humanism, a
rather vague sort of religion without theology.

Disillusionment and rebellion characterized the writers of the
time, too: disillusionment over the crusading spirit that had
accompanied the United States into World War I, anger at the way in
which the writers felt they had been repressed and tormented by
dogma and convention in their youth, and scorn for the supposed
vulgarity of the business civilization of the day.  Hence the
astonishing vogue of H. L. Mencken, who scoffed at religion,
respectability, Victorian propriety and sentimentality in the arts,
reformers, and politicians generally, and who at the same time was
a tub-thumper for such tough-grained writers as Dreiser.  Sinclair
Lewis wrote of the American small town and the American absorption
in business with photographic distaste, mingled with sympathy for
their victims.  Ernest Hemingway, in his sparing prose, convinced
those younger intellectuals whose spiritual home was Montparnasse
that they were indeed a lost generation, and that there was little
left for them but drink and sex.  Eugene O'Neill turned Freud and
the stream-of-consciousness literary technique to the uses of
intense if interminable drama on themes which an earlier generation
would have considered shocking.

Some of the writers of the day exhibited such disillusionment even
with disillusionment itself that they approached complete negation,
but on the whole the new mood was not frustrating; indeed it was
intensely stimulating.  Throughout the world of the arts, there was
a feeling that now at last one could shake off the traditional
restraints upon candor and could tell the truth.  And the result
was a sort of intellectual renaissance: the blossoming time not
only of Lewis and Hemingway and O'Neill and Dreiser but also of Dos
Passos, Sherwood Anderson, Maxwell Anderson, Willa Cather, Edna St.
Vincent Millay, Ellen Glasgow, F. Scott Fitzgerald, and a great
many other able novelists, poets, and dramatists.  Despite the rise
of the movies to the status of a vast industry which drew millions
of people into the theaters every twenty-four hours, the legitimate
stage had never fared so well: during the single year 1927 there
were no less than 268 openings on Broadway--a huge figure compared
with those of recent years.  It is true that the idols of the young
American writers and artists were predominantly foreign, or
transplanted: Proust, Joyce, T. S.  Eliot, Gertrude Stein, the
French modern painters, the Bauhaus architects; yet signs were
multiplying that the United States was coming of age culturally.


The highbrows scorned Babbitt, a gross and vulgar fellow in their
eyes.  Yet Babbitt himself was riding high.  More important in
retrospect, perhaps, than the loosening of conventions or the
enlivenment of letters and the arts was the brief triumphal march
of American industry and business during the seven fat years from
1923 through 1929--or, to be more precise, until October, 1929.

These were booming years, and for this fact there was ample basis.
For one thing, there was the great growth of the automobile
industry--which meant expanding business not only for automobile
manufacturers and parts manufacturers but also for dealers,
garagemen, filling-station operators, trucking companies, bus
companies, roadside businesses, and so on almost indefinitely.
There was the sudden blooming of the radio industry after Dr. Frank
Conrad put on the first scheduled broadcast in 1920; by the end of
the decade radio sales totaled over three-quarters of a billion
dollars a year, and the radio advertisers found they had struck pay
dirt.  There was the lively rise of the construction industry, as a
confident business community called for bigger and better office
buildings, and a more and more congested urban population called
for new apartment houses, and the motorized suburbs and booming
resorts called for new real-estate developments.  There was the
onset of the rayon industry and the multiplication of chain stores
and chain services of many kinds.  Better still, manufacturers had
been learning what new machines and a careful planning of
production could do to increase output.  During the years between
1922 and 1929 the physical production of the agricultural,
manufacturing, mining, and construction industries increased by 34
per cent--an astonishing figure--and between 1920 and 1930, output
per man hour increased by 21 per cent!

So far, so good.  The stuff could be produced all right.  The
question was whether it could be sold.  The consensus was that a
brisk enough salesman could sell it.  And so the nineteen-twenties
saw the canonization of the salesman as the brightest hope of

Sales quotas were imposed on young men setting out to vend their
wares.  Contests among salesmen--often merciless contests--were
devised.  Executives told their juniors that the day of the order
taker was over; that instead of waiting for customers, they must go
out and FIND them.  "Look down there," Charles E. Mitchell, the
sales-conscious head of the National City Bank, would say, leading
one of his bond salesmen to a window.  "There are six million
people with incomes that aggregate thousands of millions of
dollars.  They are just waiting for someone to come and tell them
what to do with their savings.  Take a good look, eat a good lunch,
and then go down and tell them."  Advertising firms produced copy
and pictures and layouts so glossily persuasive that they made the
advertising pages of an earlier day look amateurish, and exploited
to the limit the techniques of frightening the consumer into buying
and of appealing to the most primitive forms of social ambition.
("Four out of five lose"--in other words, they get pyorrhea if they
don't use the right toothpaste.  "Often a bridesmaid but never a
bride"--because she has unpleasant breath from not using the right
mouthwash.  "When your guests are gone--are you sorry you ever
invited them?"--because, not having studied the Book of Etiquette,
you have behaved boorishly.)  Sales conventions became more
plentiful and livelier, along with trade conventions--partly, of
course, because it was fun for gregarious men to get away from the
home folks to a place where their adventures with bootleg hooch
would be uninhibited by any fear of meeting their neighbors; but
also because the arts of salesmanship could be stimulated by a
comparison of notes on methods and procedures, conducted in an
atmosphere of positively revivalist fervor for bigger and better


What was there to hamper the furious onward march of business?  Not
the government, whose regulatory officials and commissions seemed
mostly to be napping along with Coolidge.  Not labor: after an
angry wave of strikes immediately after the war, unionism
languished; total trade-union membership in the United States
dwindled from over five millions in 1920 to less than four millions
in 1927 and three and a third millions in 1931.  (One reason for
this decline, possibly, was that union membership required effort
and devotion and that union members, like other people, preferred
to relax.  Another was that wages were rising anyhow, though not,
perhaps, as fast as productivity was rising.  A third was that the
prevailing union leadership was old-fashioned, large-waisted, and

What was destined to halt the forward progress of business was the
fact that the businessmen of America had become bemused with paper
values--with the piling up of speculative or artificially generated
wealth which had little relation to the production of goods.  At a
time when the greatest economic need of the nation was for devices
which would distribute as widely and fairly as possible the fruits
of industrial progress, without destroying the incentives (to
capital, to management, and also to workers) which sparked that
progress, there developed a speculative mania which benefited
immediately only those who could lay their hands on capital; and in
addition, there were invented or improved a series of devices for
distributing the fruits of prosperity--or what looked like them--
into the pockets of the few.

These devices included company mergers at inflated prices which
gave insiders a chance to line their own pockets; the piling of
holding companies one upon another until--as in the Insull and Van
Sweringen empires--they were sometimes five or six or seven deep,
with the result that the heaviest cream of the profits of the
concerns at the base of such a pyramid could be drawn off by the
owners of the concern at the top; the formation by banks of
"security affiliates" which in effect used the depositors' funds to
make investments, in securities and in real estate, such as were
denied to the banks themselves by law; the frequent practice of
inflating corporate profits by selling properties back and forth
among a group of companies at rising prices; and the formation of
stock-market pools in which the officers of a company would join
with brokers and well-heeled speculators to push up the price of
the company's stock--and then unload the stock on a new lot of
buyers, thus making money at the expense of those officers' own

These were only a few of the widely employed devices of that day.
Not only did they represent, collectively, an appalling breakdown
of the fiduciary tradition; but--this is the primary fact to bear
in mind--they tended, collectively, to knit speculative or even
phony values into the economic fabric of the country at so many
points that if values fell, bank after bank and company after
company--and their depositors and employees--would be hard hit.
The irresponsible actions of men who did not stop to think that
they were constructing a caricature of the capitalist system were
paving the way for disaster.

Accompanying the employment of these ingenious schemes--and
intensified by them--came an immense speculative boom.  Not long
after the fantastic Florida real-estate boom exploded, in 1926, the
Big Bull Market in common stocks began.  It really got under way in
1927, went into high gear in 1928, and after a series of convulsive
setbacks rose to its majestic climax in September, 1929.

Just how many people were speculating in stocks during those wild
years is unknown, but probably a million or so were buying on
margin--putting up only a fraction of the price of the stocks they
bought--and a million or two more, though they were paying cash in
full for their purchases, were following the stock-market
quotations in the financial pages with almost equally rapt
attention.  Not only were financiers and businessmen of high and
low degree speculating, but housewives, ranchers, stenographers,
clergymen, elevator men--whoever could lay hands on some cash to
put into General Motors or Radio common or Monty Ward or Case
Threshing or Electric Bond & Share.  The story is told of a young
man who went to a financier for advice on how to get a business
education and was told to buy such-and-such a stock and watch what
happened to it; a couple of weeks later he came back to the
financier agog:  "How long has this been going on?" he asked in
bewildered rapture.  During most of 1928 and 1929 buying stocks was
like betting at a race track at which, fantastically, most of the
horses won.  Prices climbed and climbed and climbed.  The Standard
Statistics index of common stock prices averaged 100 during the
year 1926; by June, 1927, it had reached 114; by June, 1928, it had
got to 148; by June, 1929, to 191; and by September, 1929, to the
dizzy height of 216!

As prices soared, some of the current wise men said they had
reached a permanent plateau; this was a New Era.  Others advanced
the bright idea that presently the whole nation would enrich itself
by owning common stocks.  Still others said that what was happening
was a wild gamble, and a lot of people would surely lose their
shirts, but a crash wouldn't matter much otherwise; after the smoke
had cleared away, things would hum along as before.  What they did
not realize was that the speculative market had now become so huge
that the mechanisms that were supposed to make it self-regulating--
the automatic selling out of unlucky buyers, for example, which was
supposed to cause a drop in prices which would invite new buyers--
would become mechanisms for compounding disaster; and that such a
large part of American business was geared to these inflated values
that the repercussions of a crash would shake the whole economy.

Who could have halted the march to disaster?  President Coolidge?
He knew little of finance, and a boom looked good to him; he even
innocently encouraged it on occasion.  Andrew Mellon, his astute
Secretary of the Treasury?  Perhaps; Mellon once went so far as to
make a mild statement, soon forgotten, to the effect that it was a
good time to buy bonds; but Mellon was apparently too wedded to the
idea that government must keep its hands off business to do
anything more.  The Federal Reserve System?  It tried hard to halt
the price inflation by means of banking regulations--and was
roundly denounced for so doing--and failed to bring about more than
a temporary halt.  Said Roy Young, governor of the Federal Reserve
Board, laughing one day as he looked at the rising prices on the
ticker tape, "What I am laughing at is that I am sitting here
trying to keep a hundred and twenty million people from doing what
they want to do!"

Herbert Hoover succeeded Calvin Coolidge as President in March,
1929.  Could he have stopped it?  By the time he reached the White
House it was too late to do so without causing at least a minor
panic--and what President would want to have a panic follow
immediately upon his accession to office on a campaign slogan of
"four more years of prosperity"?

Well then, could the responsible leaders of American finance--the
Morgan firm, for example--have stopped it?  Hardly; for the Morgan
firm was itself involved in some of the most ambitious of the
holding-company schemes whose fortunes depended on high prices; and
in any case, though it enjoyed such prestige that the lesser men of
Wall Street hesitated even to breathe its name in casual
conversation, preferring to refer merely to "the Corner" (meaning
the firm on the corner of Broad and Wall Streets), nevertheless it
wielded no such direct authority as it had in the days of the
implacable Pierpont Morgan the Elder.

No, there was no one in responsible power with both the will and
the ability to check the onrush.  So the gay summer of 1929 ran to
its end, and the autumn began. . . .

Let us pause for a second to look at some other figures.

During that very year 1929, according to the subsequent estimates
of the very careful and conservative Brookings Institution, only
2.3 per cent of American families had incomes of over $10,000 a
year.  Only 8 per cent had incomes of over $5,000.  No less than 71
per cent had incomes of less than $2,500.  Some 60 per cent had
incomes of less than $2,000.  More than 42 per cent had incomes of
less than $1,500.  And more than 21 per cent had incomes of less
than $1,000 a year.

"At 1929 prices," said the Brookings economists, "a family income
of $2,000 may be regarded as sufficient to supply only basic
necessities."  One might reasonably interpret this statement to
mean that any income below that level represented poverty.
GOLDEN YEAR 1929!  The Brookings economists added another cautious
observation:  "There has been a tendency, at least during the last
decade or so, for the inequality in the distribution of income to
be accentuated."

If the nineteen-twenties constituted a sort of Indian summer of the
old order, when Wall Street seemed more than ever to be the axis on
which America turned, and when bankers and brokers walked the earth
like kings, and it looked as if prosperity could be soundly based
upon making the rich richer and letting the gravy trickle down,
drop by drop, to those in the lower ranks of society, it was
nevertheless an Indian summer with a difference.  The warmth of it
was a false warmth because the values upon which it was founded
were unreal and destined to be self-destroying, and because it
deepened the gulf between the fortunate and the majority.

Chapter 10

The Great Depression

On the morning of October 24, 1929, the towering structure of
American prosperity cracked wide open.  For many days the prices of
stocks on the New York Stock Exchange had been sliding faster and
faster downhill; that morning they broke in a wild panic.  The
leading bankers of New York met at the House of Morgan to form a
buying pool to support the market; Richard Whitney, brother of a
leading Morgan partner, thereupon crossed the street to the great
hall of the Stock Exchange and put in orders to buy United States
Steel at 205; and for a time prices rallied.  Pierpont Morgan had
halted the Panic of 1907.  Surely this panic, too, would yield to
the organized confidence of the great men of the world of finance.

But within a few days it was clear that they could no more stop the
flood of selling than Dame Partington could sweep back the Atlantic
Ocean.  On it went, session after session.  On the worst day,
October 29, over sixteen million shares of stock were thrown on the
market by frantic sellers.  And it was not until November 13 that
order was restored.

In the course of a few brief weeks, thirty billion dollars in paper
values had vanished into thin air--an amount of money larger than
the national debt at that time.  The whole credit structure of the
American economy had been shaken more severely than anybody then
dared guess.  The legend of Wall Street leadership had been
punctured.  And the Great Depression was on its way.

At first business and industry in general did not seem to have been
gravely affected.  Everybody assured everybody else that nothing
really important had happened, and during the spring of 1930 there
was actually a Little Bull Market of considerable proportions.  But
in May this spurt was at an end.  And then there began an almost
uninterrupted two-year decline, not only in security prices, but
also--an infinitely more serious matter--in the volume of American
business: a vicious circle of ebbing sales, followed by declining
corporate income, followed by attempts to restore that income by
cutting salaries and wages and laying off men, which caused
increased unemployment and further reduced sales, which led to
increased business losses, which led to further wage cutting and
further firing of men, and so on toward disaster.

During these bewildering years President Hoover at first tried to
organize national optimism by summoning business executives to
Washington to declare that conditions were fundamentally sound and
that there would be no wage cutting.  This didn't work.  Then for a
time he was inactive, trusting to the supposedly self-correcting
processes of the market.  These didn't work.  Then, convinced that
the financial panic which was simultaneously raging in Europe was
the worst source of trouble, he organized an international
moratorium in war debts and reparations--a fine stroke of diplomacy
which alleviated matters only briefly.  Then he set up the
Reconstruction Finance Corporation to bring federal aid to hard-
pressed banks and businesses--while steadfastly refusing, as a
matter of principle, to put federal funds at the disposal of
individual persons who were in trouble.  Just when it seemed as if
recovery were at hand, in the winter of 1932-1933, the American
banking system went into a tailspin; even the RFC solution hadn't
worked.  The result was one of the most remarkable coincidences of
American history.  It was on March 4, 1933--the very day that
Hoover left the White House and Franklin D. Roosevelt entered it--
that the banking system of the United States ground to a complete
halt.  An able and highly intelligent President, committed to
orthodox economic theories which were generally considered
enlightened, had become one of the tragic victims of the collapse
of the going system.

Whereupon Roosevelt, declaring in his cheerfully resolute Inaugural
Address that "the only thing we have to fear is fear itself," swept
into a tornado of action--successfully reopening the banks and
initiating that lively, helter-skelter, and often self-
contradictory program of reform, relief, and stimulation which was
to keep the country in a dither during the middle nineteen-thirties
and bring at least a measure of recovery.

Distressing failures are readily forgotten, whether they are
personal or national; instinctively one tries to lock away the
memory of them.  It was quite natural, in later years, for
Republicans to try to gloss over what had happened during Hoover's
long ordeal; for believers in individualism to try to forget the
tumble that private enterprise had taken; and, for that matter, for
patriots generally to minimize what seemed a blot on the national
record.  And there were millions of Americans to whom the Great
Depression was associated with such painful personal memories that
they tried, unconsciously perhaps, to banish the recollection of it
from their minds.  Any writer who reaches it in his chronicle is
aware that at this point some readers will be tempted to put his
book down.  Yet there are several things about the Great Depression
that must be borne in mind if one is to understand the subsequent
fortunes of the American people.

1.  It was a collapse of terrifying proportions and duration.  At
the middle of the year 1932--more than two and a half years after
the crash of 1929--American industry as a whole was operating at
LESS THAN HALF its maximum 1929 volume.  During this year 1932, the
total amount of money paid out in wages was 60 PER CENT LESS than
in 1929.  The total of dividends was 57 per cent less; and these
dividends represented the earnings of the more fortunate concerns--
some might say the more ruthless toward their employees--while
American business as a whole was running at a net loss of over five
billion dollars.

As for stock prices, which were traditionally related to the amount
of optimism in the business community, take a look at a few
samples.  General Motors common, which had been priced at 72 3/4 at
the peak of the Bull Market in 1929, and had fallen in the Panic to
36, reached a 1932 low of 7 5/8.  Radio Corporation common, which
had been 101 at the peak, and 26 after the Panic, got as low as 2
1/2.  And United States Steel, long considered the bellwether of
the market, with a 1929 high of 261 3/4 and a post-Panic quotation
of 150, sank to 21 1/4.

In that year over 12 million Americans were unemployed.  In the
industrial towns the proportion of jobless people was staggering.
In Buffalo, for instance, a house-to-house canvass of nearly
fifteen thousand people who were ready and able to work showed that
31 per cent of them could not find jobs, and less than half of them
were working full time.  And meanwhile the farmers were in
desperate straits, with cotton bringing less than 5 cents, wheat
less than 50 cents, and corn only 31 cents.

It was an oddly invisible phenomenon, this Great Depression.  If
one observed closely, one might note that there were fewer people
on the streets than in former years, that there were many untenanted
shops, that beggars and panhandlers were much in evidence; one might
see breadlines here and there, and "Hoovervilles" in vacant lots at
the edge of town (groups of tar-paper shacks inhabited by homeless
people); railroad trains were shorter, with fewer Pullmans; and
there were many factory chimneys out of which no smoke was coming.
But otherwise there was little to see.  Great numbers of people were
sitting at home, trying to keep warm.

2.  The Great Depression was part of a world-wide collapse: what
Karl Polanyi has aptly characterized as the collapse of the market
economy that had been established during the nineteenth century.

3.  It marked millions of people--inwardly--for the rest of their
lives.  Not only because they or their friends lost jobs, saw their
careers broken, had to change their whole way of living, were
gnawed at by a constant lurking fear of worse things yet, and in
all too many cases actually went hungry; but because what was
happening to them seemed without rhyme or reason.  Most of them had
been brought up to feel that if you worked hard and well, and
otherwise behaved yourself, you would be rewarded by good fortune.
Here were failure and defeat and want visiting the energetic along
with the feckless, the able along with the unable, the virtuous
along with the irresponsible.  They found their fortunes
interlocked with those of great numbers of other people in a
pattern complex beyond their understanding, and apparently
developing without reason or justice.

Even if they tried to hide their dismay, their children sensed it
and were marked by it.  The editors of Fortune wrote in 1936:  "The
present-day college generation is fatalistic . . . it will not
stick its neck out.  It keeps its pants buttoned, its chin up, and
its mouth shut.  If we take the mean average to be the truth, it is
a cautious, subdued, unadventurous generation. . . ."  As time went
on there was a continuing disposition among Americans old and young
to look with a cynical eye upon the old Horatio Alger formula for
success; to be dubious about taking chances for ambition's sake; to
look with a favorable eye upon a safe if unadventurous job, social
insurance plans, pension plans.  They had learned from bitter
experience to crave security.

4.  The Great Depression brought the abdication of Wall Street from
the commanding position which it had achieved in the late
nineteenth century, had consolidated under the personal leadership
of Pierpont Morgan, and had institutionalized since his death in
1913.  Not only had the big bankers of 1929 failed to stop the
Panic, but as time went on the inability of financiers generally to
cope with the down trend, their loss of confidence in their own
economic convictions, and the downfall of the banking system itself
all advertised their helplessness.  If after 1933 a part of their
former power passed to the big corporation executives who had
formerly regarded them with deference, and a much larger part of it
passed to Washington, which now became the economic as well as
political capital of the nation, this was at least partly because
nature abhors a vacuum.

5.  The Depression sharply lowered the prestige of businessmen.
The worst sufferers were the bankers and brokers, who found
themselves translated from objects of veneration into objects of
public derision and distrust--the distrust being sharply increased
by the evidences of financial skullduggery which came out in
successive congressional investigations.  But even business
executives in general sank in the public regard to a point from
which it would take them a long time to recover; and in this
decline the conscientious and public-spirited suffered along with
the predatory.

6.  Yet the world-wide Depression--though it brought Hitler to
power in Germany, and in many other lands seemed to have sounded
the death knell of capitalism--brought to the United States nothing
approaching a revolution.  It brought an epidemic of proposals for
economic panaceas--the cult of technocracy, Upton Sinclair's EPIC,
the Townsend Old Age Revolving Pensions Plan, and suchlike; it
brought the dictatorlike Huey Long to brief regional power; it
brought riots at farmers' bankruptcy sales, a Communist-led "march"
on Washington, and the briefly ominous Bonus Army march of 1932.
It also saw a rapid growth in the intellectual Influence and labor-
union influence of the Communists--though not in their voting
strength, which remained extremely small.  But despite the dismay
of uncounted Americans at their lot, there was no revolution--just
a shift of power from one political party to the other, after the
time-honored custom.  And although Roosevelt's New Deal introduced
a hodge-podge of reforms and regulations and interferences with
what had been known as economic law, only a few people--some of the
starry-eyed zealots of the Washington bureaucracy, on the one hand,
and a few die-hard haters of the regime, on the other--thought of
these reforms as introducing a total change in the political or
economic structure of the United States.

To the New York Times of December 31, 1933--when Roosevelt had been
in office less than a year--the English economist John Maynard
Keynes contributed an open letter to the President.  "You have made
yourself," he wrote, "the trustee for those in every country who
seek to mend the evils of our condition by reasoned experiment
within the framework of the existing social system.  If you fail,
rational change will be gravely prejudiced throughout the world,
leaving orthodoxy and revolution to fight it out."  As things
eventuated, orthodoxy and revolution were not left to fight it out.
Experiment within the framework of the existing social system was
the order of the day.  Once more, as during the revolt of the
American conscience, the American way of coping with a revealed
defect in the national machinery was to make a series of
experimental repairs while the machine was running--and to do this
through the traditional party machinery of America.

The long-standing political coolness between the Oyster Bay
Roosevelts and the Hyde Park Roosevelts should not blind us to the
striking parallels between the approach to public affairs of
Franklin Delano Roosevelt and of his wife's uncle Theodore
Roosevelt.  Both men had wealth.  Both championed the underdog out
of conviction, though they were upperdogs themselves.  Both were
men of abounding energy and captivating charm, though Theodore's
was the more rugged, Franklin's the more gracious.  Both were
exuberantly interested in people, people of all sorts and
conditions.  Neither had a systematic economic philosophy; both, in
devising their policies and programs, played by ear; and both
thought of economic problems as essentially moral problems.  Each,
in his own time, was curiously fitted to bring change without the
ideology or the violence of revolution.


There is no need to rehearse here in detail the familiar story of
the New Deal: how the country was cheered and galvanized by
Roosevelt's convincing and contagious confidence in the spring of
1933; how in his very first "fireside chat" over the radio, when
the banks were still closed, he conveyed a serene assurance that
they could be successfully opened--as they shortly were; how during
the wild first hundred days he jammed through Congress, at record-
breaking speed, a jumble of hastily improvised legislation; how the
conservatives, and well-to-do people generally, began before long
to foam with rage at him as he continued to push his reform
program, and tinkered with the price of gold, and ran up big
federal deficits as Harry Hopkins furnished relief through the WPA
to millions of families; how he gathered about him two successive
Brain Trusts composed of bright young Idealists who furnished him
with economic ideas and oratorical ammunition; how he defeated the
Republican Landon in 1936, tangled with the Supreme Court in 1937,
and faced and overcame--with the aid of further federal spending--
the sharp "recession" of 1937-1938; and how he thereafter was
distracted from his New Deal objectives by the storm clouds over
Europe moving nearer and nearer.  It is necessary only to note the
hard fact that the New Deal did not at any time bring a full return
of prosperity; that was not to come until defense spending went
into high gear in 1940-41.

But in many ways the New Deal permanently altered the nature of the
American economy, and we may well pause for a moment to look at
some of the changes it brought about and the new forces it

In the first place it rewrote a good many of the rules of the
economic game as played in America.  For instance, in order to
prevent any recurrence of the financial follies of the nineteen-
twenties, it divorced commercial banks from the securities
business, forbade the issue of securities without exhaustive
disclosure of pertinent facts, circumscribed pool operations on the
stock exchanges and set up a federal agency to police these
exchanges, and dismantled the more illogical holding-company
structures in the utilities business.  Not only was there a new
rule book, but at many points the federal government moved in as
umpire to interpret and enforce the rules.

In the second place, it intervened extensively in the economic game
as protector of the underdog.  For instance, because the operations
of one of the old-time rules of the game, the law of supply and
demand, appeared to be doing damage to the American farmer, it
stepped in to jack up and then to guarantee the prices he got.
(The anomalous result was that the farmers of the United States, as
conservative a group temperamentally as were to be found in the
land, became dependent for their very economic lives upon
government decisions in their behalf!)  Similarly, the New Deal
continued to prop up ailing corporations through Hoover's RFC; made
arrangements to prevent near-bankrupt firms from going broke; aided
farmowners and homeowners in meeting their mortgage payments;
underwrote the financing of new housing enterprises; insured bank
deposits; gave a measure of aid to unemployed people and old people
through Social Security; and wrote a minimum wage and hours law for

All this was as if Washington were saying, "Do a lot of people seem
likely to get gypped through the unhindered workings of economic
law?  All right, we'll make it up to them through subsidies,
guarantees, or insurance."  In short, while the New Deal did not
abolish the market place as the determiner of values and rewards,
it rigged the market plenty.

In the third place, it went into the active business of stimulating
employment, by building dams, bridges, parkways, and playgrounds on
the grand scale, and by putting even the recipients of relief to
work at all manner of enterprises carefully concocted so as not to
interfere with private business; and it set up the Tennessee Valley
Authority to do a combined job of competing with the private
electric utilities, preventing floods, and teaching farmers some of
the principles of conservation.

In the fourth place, the New Deal gave a go-ahead signal to
organized labor.  Up to this time such laws as seemed to authorize
collective bargaining, like the Clayton Act, had frequently been
nullified by the courts.  But now the Norris-LaGuardia Anti-
injunction Act of 1932 was followed by Section 7a of the National
Industrial Recovery Act of 1933, and--after that law had been set
aside by the Supreme Court--by the Wagner Act.  The authorization
to organize being clear and specific, there was a rush to join
unions.  In 1935 John L. Lewis formed the CIO, which on being
expelled from the A F of L became a rival outfit specializing in
industrial unions.  The CIO moved into the hitherto unorganized
heavy industries, especially the automobile and steel industries,
and a terrific struggle ensued: unreconstructed employers spending
hundreds of thousands of dollars on hiring industrial spies and
plug-uglies; angry workers organizing violent strikes.  Within a
few months from the fall of 1936 to the spring of 1937, almost half
a million American men and women quit their jobs, mostly using the
new--and illegal--sit-down technique fostered by Communist
organizers and taken up by others too; there was a tension in the
industrial towns almost as of civil war, with riots and bloodshed.
But at the height of the tension Myron Taylor, chairman of the
board of the great United States Steel Corporation, voluntarily
entered into a union contract with a unit of the CIO; and although
the little steel companies continued the struggle, it was presently
clear that unionization was the order of the day.

By the end of the decade the number of union members in the United
States had climbed from the 1933 figure of less than three millions
to nearly nine millions; office workers who had never in their
earlier years dreamed of joining a union found themselves
organizing and threatening to strike; executives and their
employees found themselves separated from one another by a wall of
mutual distrust; and, partly because of union pressures, the
average work week in business and industry was about five hours
shorter than it had been at the beginning of the decade (one
estimate gave a decline from 49.3 hours to 44 hours), and the two-
day week end was becoming standard.

Through its general sympathy with labor, the New Deal had unleashed
what J. Kenneth Galbraith has subsequently called a "countervailing
force" in the American economy--a force which, acting in opposition
to business managements, and generating for the time being a
formidable amount of friction, served to bring about a redistribution
of the national income downward to those in the lower income

Finally, the New Deal tried to do a job of managing the national
economy as a whole.  It abandoned the automatically operating gold
standard and introduced something approaching a managed currency.
It abandoned the idea that the first duty of a government was to
balance its budget, and embraced the Keynesian idea of deficit
spending, with the highly optimistic notion that deficits in bad
years would be counterbalanced by surpluses in good years.
Whatever the dangers inherent in such a dream, at least the idea
became pretty solidly established that it was the job of the
authorities at Washington so to manipulate their spending and their
fiscal controls that the economy would run on a reasonably even

The result of all these interventions--the reform measures, the
subsidies and guarantees, the public works, the encouragement of
labor, and the attempt to steer the economy as a whole--was
certainly not a socialist order, at least in the old sense of the
government's taking over the management of business and industry.
For the management of the vast variety of concerns remained in
private hands (though it was so often hedged in by regulations,
bedeviled by taxes, and opposed by unions that many an executive
felt himself a prisoner of government and labor).  Nor was it a
free economic order, at least in the old sense of an order in which
everybody's economic fortunes were determined by the action of
buyers and sellers in the open market, with the government standing
aside as Herbert Hoover had tried to stand aside in 1930-1931.  It
was something between the two: one might call it a repaired and
modified form of capitalism in which--to revert to our earlier
figure of speech--the government umpires were forever blowing their
whistles and rushing onto the field to penalize this player or
that, or to pace off a fifteen-yard gain for a hard-pressed team.

Nor, for that matter, was this new order planned in any
comprehensive way by Roosevelt and his Brain Trusters.  It was a
patchwork of measures devised almost without regard for one
another; and as a result the American economy, after a few years,
was less like a new and statelier mansion than like an old house
extensively remodeled, with a new bit of roofing here, a new wing
there, new supports under part of the flooring, and a greatly
enlarged staff of servants.

Nor did the new order seem to work particularly well.  Full
disaster had been averted, it is true, and many people long
forsaken by fortune had been given new hope.  But it was not until
the shadows of war began to deepen, and the United States began to
arm feverishly for defense, that this new, hybrid American system
began really to work.

However, the grim decade of the nineteen-thirties had left a number
of legacies to the American people, of major importance to their

The first of these, and the most fundamental, was the idea that the
fortunes of individual Americans are interlocked, that they are
"all in the same boat."  Never before had a national crisis so
challenged the ability of economists, sociologists, students of
government, and intelligent citizens generally to find out what was
actually happening to their fellow countrymen, how they were
variously affected by the actions of bankers in Wall Street,
manufacturers in Detroit, legislators and bureaucrats in
Washington, and how they lived from day to day.  During the years
1930 and 1931, when I had been at work on Only Yesterday, an
informal history of the United States in the nineteen-twenties, my
best sources had been the daily papers and magazines of the period;
the books of reportage or appraisal which I really needed to
consult could have been ranged on a single shelf.  In 1939 I wrote
a similar book about the nineteen-thirties, Since Yesterday; this
time, the books on which I might have drawn, had I had the time and
energy, would have filled a large library building, so diligently
had the pollsters, social analysts, economic statisticians, and
authors of assorted surveys been examining the conditions of their
contemporaries.  And there was manifest, too, among great numbers
of men and women, including not only scholars but; comparatively
untutored folk, the gradual expansion of a sort of half-mystical
faith in the American people--a faith all the more striking because
the ability of these people to order their affairs successfully was
being so gravely tested.  It was as if men and women of different
circumstances and antecedents, having discovered that their fates
were interdependent, had begun to regard one another with a fresh
understanding and had found that on the whole they liked one
another.  Contending as this faith did with the political and
social frictions of the times, it was hard to measure and its
durability was uncertain.  But I wonder if a good many readers of
these pages, recalling, let us say, their reactions to the New York
World's Fair of 1939, will not remember feeling--as they enjoyed
the fountains, the illuminated trees, the fireworks, the artificial
waterfalls streaming down the sides of buildings, the imaginative
General Motors Futurama, the girls swimming to waltz time at the
Aquacade, and the brightly colored sideshows--a sort of inner
exhilaration which, if it had found words, might have said
something like this:  "All these things, the beautiful and the
silly alike, reflect in their various ways the one hundred and
forty million people of this land, friendly, inventive, hopeful
people who have found that their lot is cast together."

Two more legacies of the nineteen-thirties were based upon the
first one and supplemented it.  One was the idea that if individual
Americans are in deep trouble, it is the job of the rest of the
people, through their government, to come to their aid.  The other
was that it is their job, again through their government, to see
that there is never another Great Depression.  Each of these ideas,
born in travail and fiercely contested for years, was by 1940
implicitly accepted by the vast majority.  Whether they could be
lived up to remained to be seen.

Chapter 11

The Reluctant World Power

During the early and middle nineteen-thirties there were occasional
grim reminders from overseas that the world contained warlike
nations bent on conquest.  But at first these seemed hardly more
than offstage noises during the drama of the Great Depression.
When the Japanese invaded Manchuria in 1931, when Mussolini's
Fascist Italy invaded Ethiopia in 1935, when Hitler entered the
Rhineland in 1936 and gave manifest signs of an inclination to push
farther, American disapproval was intense but the great majority of
us felt that it wasn't up to us to do anything about such foreign
depredations.  For the country was in an overwhelmingly
isolationist mood, convinced that it could live in safety and
satisfaction behind a wall of neutrality, regardless of what was
going on in the rest of the world.

This was a belief at which individual men and women had arrived by
a great variety of routes.  There were, to begin with, the natural-
born distrusters of all things foreign.  Their logic appealed to
many people of Irish descent (who bore England no love) and of
German descent (who dreaded another conflict with Germany) and
likewise to numerous Midwesterners and Great Plainsmen who
suspected Easterners generally of an undue susceptibility to the
blandishments of European diplomats in striped pants.  There were
also men and women who had suffered deeply from the Depression and
who, attributing their troubles to the greed of financiers and big
businessmen, proceeded naturally to the belief that it was the sly
maneuvers of "international bankers" and "merchants of death" that
sucked nations into war.  There were also the Communists and their
dupes, whom the party line of the moment directed to join in the
hue and cry against Wall Street and the munitions makers.  There
were men and women who so deeply distrusted Franklin D. Roosevelt
that they suspected him of trying to drag the country into war in
order to fasten his hold upon it the more securely.  Still others
conscientiously believed that, with a Depression on its hands, the
United States had enough to cope with at home without venturing
into foreign expeditions, and that the best contribution that
America could make to democracy and freedom was to demonstrate that
these ideals could be realized within its own borders.

Finally there were those men and women who, as members of the
disenchanted younger generation after World War I, had become (to
borrow Lloyd Morris's phrase) "truculently cynical" about that war.
These youngsters of the previous decade were now coming into their
middle years, and many of them, now solid and influential citizens,
had settled into the conviction that America's entry into World War
I had been the great tragic blunder of their parents' generation.
When in the mid-thirties a Senate Committee headed by Gerald P. Nye
of North Dakota exposed the huge profits made by some American
corporations during that war, and succeeded in conveying the
impression that the Morgans and du Ponts and their like had got us
involved in it, many members of these various groups felt that
their worst suspicions had been confirmed.  The "revisionist" view
of World War I was becoming the orthodox view.

Thus it happened that when in January, 1937, the Gallup pollsters
asked the question, "Do you think it was a mistake for the United
States to enter the World War?" no less than 70 per cent of those
who expressed an opinion answered "Yes"; and that when, in the fall
of 1935, they asked whether Congress should get the approval of the
people in a national vote before declaring war, as many as 75 per
cent said "Yes."  It is doubtful, of course, whether many of those
who gave this answer realized how long it would take to organize a
national referendum (imagine our waiting for one after Pearl
Harbor!); yet the answer was significant as revealing the
prevailing view that peaceable people got inveigled into wars by
villains and fools in their own land.

During the years 1935, 1936, and 1937 Congress expressed this
isolationist mood by passing three successive Neutrality Acts aimed
at preventing the United States from selling arms or munitions to
any warring powers.  President Roosevelt and the State Department
didn't like these acts--felt that they were unrealistic, tied
America's hands, and negated its influence and its rights abroad--
but public opinion was too strong to counter.  And when in October,
1937, Roosevelt made a speech in which he said that aggressors must
be "quarantined," the uproar of protest was deafening.

Already, however, events were marching at an accelerating and
ominous pace, and the offstage noises bore overtones of increasing
menace.  By 1937 Hitler and Mussolini were both actively aiding the
dictator Franco in the Spanish Civil War.  In that same year the
Japanese attacked China.  In March, 1938, Hitler occupied Austria.
In the fall of that year, at the Munich conference, he browbeat
England and France into consenting to his partial occupation of
Czechoslovakia.  The next spring he brazenly occupied the rest of
Czechoslovakia, and Mussolini invaded Albania.  In the late summer
of 1939 Hitler made an alliance with Stalin and then attacked
Poland; this time England and France could stand aside no longer,
and World War II was under way.  By the next summer--the summer of
1940--the horrified American people had seen Finland attacked by
Russia, Denmark and Norway overrun by Hitler, and the Low Countries
and even France unbelievably smashed; only Britain now stood
between Hitler and the total conquest of Europe, and Britain's
ability to endure hung in the balance.

This dismaying sequence of events--plus Roosevelt's increasingly
persuasive efforts to awaken his countrymen to the full meaning of
Hitler's onrush--shocked the American people into a gradual but
decisive change of conviction as to the ability of the United
States to live by itself and to itself.  One by one the apparent
moral certainties of the mid-thirties--such as the notion that wars
are fomented by munitions makers--were engulfed by the news from
abroad.  With each portentous event American opinion shifted;
sometimes the shift was so rapid that one could trace its progress
in successive Gallup polls.  For instance, in March, 1939, 52 per
cent of those polled thought that if war broke out in Europe we
should sell Britain and France airplanes and other war materials;
the very next month--after Hitler's total occupation of
Czechoslovakia--the percentage had gone up from 52 to 66.
Naturally, then, when war did break out in the autumn of 1939 the
Neutrality Act was amended to permit the cash sale of munitions.
Yet still the majority of Americans, despite the nightmare change
that they were witnessing across the seas, remained stubbornly
reluctant to commit themselves; their neutralism died hard.  It was
not until France fell and Britain stood alone, confronting the
prospect of "blood, toil, tears, and sweat," that their sense of
the implacable necessities of the new situation began really to
overcome their suspicion that somebody must be putting something
over on them.

When France collapsed in June, 1940, the United States was
beginning to step up its defense production very sharply.  On the
desperate need of the country to arm itself almost everybody could
unite.  Within a few weeks thereafter, Roosevelt was offering guns
and over-age destroyers to Britain.  By the early autumn of 1940,
the American draft law was going into operation.  Yet in that very
season the two Presidential candidates--Roosevelt, breaking
precedent by running for a third term, and Wendell Willkie, the
last-minute choice of the Republicans--though they agreed upon aid
to Europe, were both insisting that they opposed taking the United
States into war.  The orators of the "Committee to Defend America
by Aiding the Allies," and of "Fight for Freedom," were vehemently
opposed by the equally positive orators of "America First."  During
the following year, as Hitler desolated British cities with bombs,
overran the Balkans, and invaded Russia, and as the Japanese began
to threaten the subjugation of the Far East, opinion swung by
degrees toward more and more direct intervention; the Lend-Lease
Act went through Congress with a strong majority, American warships
began convoying American supplies part way to England, and the
United States found itself in a virtual state of undeclared war
with Germany.  Yet as the month of December, 1941, arrived, the
country was still sharply divided emotionally.

At that moment a very large number of Americans, perhaps a
majority, believed that Hitler must imperatively be defeated, even
at the risk of complete American involvement.  A small minority
were in favor of plunging in with all we had.  But a considerably
larger minority regarded Roosevelt's warlike gestures with a
vehement distrust.  Only a handful of this latter group regarded
Hitler or the Japanese imperialists with any favor; the prevailing
feeling among them was simply that, despite our loathing for
aggression, we must not go to war to stop it unless or until it
immediately threatened the Western Hemisphere.

Then, on December 7, 1941, came the stroke which ended all doubts.

It came, ironically, not from Hitler's Germany, but from Japan.
The attack on Pearl Harbor was a challenge that could not be
denied.  And it was promptly followed by the astonishingly obliging
action of Hitler and Mussolini in declaring war on the United
States, and thus relinquishing whatever hope they might have
cherished that a lingering disagreement about Europe would keep
America divided.  The die was cast.  Suddenly we were a people
united in our intent to prosecute World War II to victory against
the aggressors both in Asia and in Europe.

Reluctantly--like a man walking backward--we had been pushed by
events into a recognition of the fact that we were not a lone
nation secure on our own continent, but a world power which must
live up to the opportunities and responsibilities inherent in that
fact.  We resented the idea.  We felt we would much prefer to look
after ourselves by ourselves; and we continued to feel so.  But we
had no choice.


During World War I there had been a lively crusading spirit--and
there had also been considerable opposition to the war.  This time
there was no opposition.  During the whole three years and eight
months that the United States fought, there was no antiwar faction,
no organized pacifist element, no objection to huge appropriations,
no noticeable opposition to the draft.  Yet there was also a
minimum of crusading spirit.  For the popular disillusionment over
World War I and the controversy over involvement in World War II
had left their marks.

A generation of men and women who had heard again and again how men
could be seduced by war slogans and martial parades were inevitably
skeptical in their inner minds.  This new war was astonishingly
like that of 1917-1918, in Europe at least; and despite the obvious
differences and the hard logic of circumstance, something remained
in the subconscious of millions of people to rise and accuse them
whenever they heard a patriotic peroration.  They didn't want to be
victims of "hysteria."  They felt uncomfortable about flag waving.
They preferred to be matter-of-fact about the job ahead.  Morale
officers reported an astonishing indifference to instruction on
American war aims; the chief war aim in most soldiers' minds
appeared to be to get back home, by vanquishing the enemy if there
was no quicker way; and the strongest force making for valor and
endurance was apparently pride in one's outfit and loyalty to one's
buddies.  Few bands played, few trumpets blew, there were no
parades, and people who became demonstrative about America's war
ideals sensed a coolness in the air about them.

Furthermore, the emotional misgivings of those who had been anti-
interventionist--and of some of those who had been merely reluctant--
remained to condition them: to make them move skeptically,
grudgingly, and with strenuous opposition to specific war policies
that called for drastic government controls and sharp civilian
sacrifices.  These people were unstintedly loyal, and went to
battle--or saw their brothers and sons go--without reservation; yet
they remained emotionally on guard--distrustful of Britain,
suspicious of our high command's disposition to put the war in
Europe ahead of the war in the Pacific, and derisive over our
civilian officials in Washington, who looked to some of them like
another crop of Brain Trusters using the war as an excuse for
getting former professors to interfere with American business.

And the Depression, too, had left its scars.  People who for years
had felt that fate was against them and that the next turn of its
wheel might plunge them into full disaster felt that their whole
future had become a huge and ominous question mark.  Sure, they
would fight--but where would they come out afterward?  What
positive thing was there that they could look forward to with
genuine hope, once the enemy had been smashed?  They didn't know.
Talk about war aims sounded hollow to them.  They would do their
job, but without positive hope.  And meanwhile some of them would
nourish a shrewd distrust of anybody who looked like a big tycoon;
it was a safe rule to follow that the boss was out to feather his
own nest.  It may have been a sign of the nearness of the Great
Depression that the average GI felt more active resentment for his
own general, who lived comfortably in the house on the hill with a
shower and plenty of cocktails, than for the enemy that confronted

Yet, with isolated exceptions, the armed forces of the United
States fought magnificently.  It is very doubtful if they could
have done so if in their inner beings they had deeply questioned
the validity of the cause for which they were fighting.  By and
large, the civilian population of the United States likewise met
adequately the major challenges of total war, and of them too the
same thing can be said: they too fully believed in the justice of
America's mission, however distrustful they might be of rhetoric
about it.  And even when things went worst, neither the military
nor the civilians ever doubted the eventual coming of victory,
however dubious they might be that it would insure a harmonious and
comfortable peace.  The American people were their nation's--and
freedom's--disillusioned and deadpan defenders.


It is not for this chronicle to rehearse the military story of
World War II, from the first agonizing days when the Japanese held
most of the Pacific, and our troops were being smashed at Bataan,
and German submarines were sinking ships in a smear of oil off Cape
Hatteras, to the stunning success of D-Day, the sweep across
France, the setback of the Bulge, the push into Germany, and--
following a series of island-hopping Pacific victories--the
dropping of the atomic bomb on Japan and the surrender of August,
1945.  The generals, diplomats, military historians, and
autobiographers have rung the changes on this great story again and
again, describing and debating each strategic decision and each
tactical move; correspondents and novelists and playwrights have
taken us through the swamps of Guadalcanal and the hedgerows of
Normandy, and onto the beaches of Tarawa and Salerno, and through
the long nights of Pacific patrolling, and into the sky battles
over Germany.  Less adequately told--and yet of continuing
significance to us today--is the staggering story of American
production during those anxious years.

The miseries of the Great Depression had obscured a striking fact:
that under the spur of necessity American industry had gained
sharply in efficiency during the nineteen-thirties.  The figures
are revealing.  According to the best estimates of which economists
are capable, output per man hour had increased during the decade
1900-1910 by 12 per cent; during the decade 1910-1920, by only 7
1/2 per cent; during the brash decade 1920-1930, by an impressive
21 per cent.  During the Depression decade of 1930-1940--when many
plants were shut down or working part time, and there was intense
pressure for efficiency and economy--it had increased by an amazing
41 per cent.  But always, in most industries, the brakes had been
on, as it were.  They must not overproduce.  Now, with the coming
of the war emergency, the brakes were removed.

For the military planners at Washington had conceived their plans
on a truly majestic scale.  By the end of the war the United States
had a total of over twelve million men in service, as against less
than five million in World War I.  The devisers of the effort had
resolved that these forces of ours would be the best armed, best
equipped, best supplied, and most comfortably circumstanced in
history which they were.  And we had to supply not only our own
forces, but others too.  The result, in terms of output and of
cost, was astronomical.

By the end of 1943 we were spending money at FIVE TIMES the peak
rate of World War I.  During the nineteen-thirties, critics of the
New Deal had become apoplectic over annual federal budgets of seven
or eight or nine billions, which they felt were carrying the United
States toward bankruptcy; during the fiscal year 1942 we spent, by
contrast, over 34 billions; during 1943, 79 billions; during 1944,
95 billions; during 1945, 98 billions; during 1946, 60 billions.
For the last four of these years, in fact, our ANNUAL expenditures
were greater than the total national debt which had been a matter
of such grave concern during the Depression.  That national debt
had risen from 19 billions in Hoover's last year in office to 40
billions in 1939--and here was the government, only a few years
later, spending up to 98 billions PER YEAR, and thus piling the
national debt up to 269 billions by 1946!  These colossal sums made
anything in the previous history of the United States look like
small change.

And how was the ambitious and expensive job of military production
accomplished?  By paying little attention to costs, and asking
producers--as in World War I--to concentrate on volume and speed.
"How many can you make, and how fast?"

The American manufacturer responded to the challenge with zest.
For it appealed to that peculiar enthusiasm for record breaking
which seems to blossom in the air of a land where radio listeners
to ball games are informed by record-conscious broadcasters that so-
and-so's triple with the bases full is the first triple made in the
first game of a World Series since 1927, and where schoolboy
runners dream dreams of being the first man in history to achieve a
four-minute mile.

New plants were built, and built fast.  The entire automobile
industry was diverted from the manufacture of passenger cars into
the production of tanks, trucks, weapons.  All manner of new
products and devices were assigned to American plants to produce in
a hurry--ranging from synthetic rubber to radar, from landing ships
to proximity fuses, from atabrine and penicillin and DDT to the
Manhattan project for the atomic bomb.  Always the call from
Washington was for speed, speed, speed, and for quantity.

The result: in the year 1945 the gross product of goods and
services in the United States came to $215 billions--well over
twice the dollar total of 1939, which had been $91 billions.  Even
when one makes allowance for the wartime rise in prices, one finds
that the product of 1945 was more than two-thirds bigger than that
of 1939.  American industry had achieved probably the most
extraordinary increase in production that had ever been
accomplished in five years in all economic history.


What happened to the national standard of living when the federal
government poured into the national economy war orders by the
billions, and then by the tens of billions, and then by the scores
of billions?  Roaring prosperity.  During the nineteen-thirties the
New Dealers had been conscientiously trying to "prime the pump" by
government expenditures of a few billions a year; what they had
done with a teaspoon was now being done with a ladle.

By 1943 the last appreciable unemployment--except of people
transferring from job to job, or waiting for a promised opening to
materialize--had been soaked up.  By 1944 the signs of prosperity
were everywhere.  It was hard to get a hotel room in any city.
Restaurants in which it had always been easy to find a table for
lunch were now crammed by a few minutes after twelve.  Sales of fur
coats and jewelry--many of them for cash across the counter--were
jumping.  Luxury goods for which there had long been a dwindling
market were suddenly in demand: the proprietor of a music store
reported that he was selling every grand piano, new or renovated,
that he could lay his hands on.  And visitors to New England mill
towns which had been depression-ridden since long before the
nineteen-thirties were noting newly painted houses, fences in fresh

This gush of prosperity was a strange phenomenon to witness in a
nation supposedly stripped down for the supreme effort of war--a
nation in which airplane spotters sat under the stars of a cold
winter's night to listen for an improbable enemy; in which air-raid
wardens put on their armbands for practice blackouts, and waited
endlessly for the dreadful moment when the word would go out,
"Signal 50 received, post your wardens"; in which first-aiders took
lessons in triangular bandages and talked sagely about pressure
points; in which women went stockingless because they were running
out of nylons, and cigarettes, butter, sugar, and coffee were in
short supply, and beefsteak became the rarest of treats, and draft
boards puzzled over the latest changes in the regulations from
Washington, and the ubiquity of soldiers and sailors in uniform was
a constant reminder of everybody's obligation to make sacrifices
for the common safety.  The government was doing what it could to
reduce spending and thus slow down inflation--through price
ceilings, rationing of scarce and essential goods, wage freezing,
excess-profits taxes, and record-high personal income taxes--and
with some success.  Yet the prosperity was there, paradoxically
overflowing.  And after the long drought of the nineteen-thirties
there was something undeniably welcome about it.

Who was getting the money?

Generally speaking, the stockholders of the biggest corporations
were not getting very much of it.  These corporations were in many
cases getting huge war orders, and thus consolidating their
important positions in the national economy; but excess-profits
taxes, along with managerial caution over the uncertainties of the
future, and with the recollection of the embarrassing scandals of
1918 war profits, combined to keep their dividend payments at
modest rates.  The stock market languished.  Big capital, as such,
was having no heyday.

Some smaller companies which had barely been able to keep alive
during the Depression and now were receiving big war orders were
making extraordinary money--subject both to taxes and to
renegotiation of their contracts.  There were also numerous small
concerns, in the textile business for example, that got no war
orders but profited hugely--again before taxes.  But other
businesses were in definite trouble.  Tourist camps and roadside
taverns and automobile dealers, for example, suffered because of
gas rationing, and there were many manufacturers and dealers who
were hard hit by shortages of materials, could not shift into war
production, and went deep into the red.  But what was more
interesting than the sort of concerns which were getting the money
was the sort of individual people who were getting it.

The rich were getting some of it, but those of them who were honest
were keeping very little because of high income taxes.  Most of the
extravagant spending which was manifest in so many places was the
result either of tax dodging or of the lavish use of company
expense accounts.  "It's all on the government" was the theme song
of many a sumptuous party.  Although the war was making a few
legitimate millionaires--mainly among oil men who by reason of
"depletion allowances" did not feel the full weight of federal
taxes--in general the rich AND honest did not gain much.

People outside the war industries whose salaries or wages were
frozen by the War Labor Board were not gaining at all, though some
of them were helped by "reclassification of jobs" or by "merit
increases," with or without quotation marks.  People who were
dependent on dividends and interest likewise were seldom among the
gainers; indeed in many cases inflation brought a real deterioration
in their circumstances.

The principal beneficiaries, generally speaking, were farmers;
engineers, technicians, and specialists of various sorts whose
knowledge and ability were especially valuable to the war effort in
one way or another; and skilled workers in war industries--or
unskilled workers capable of learning a skilled trade and stepping
into the skilled group.

The farmers were in clover; and it was about time.  For they had
long been faced with adversity after adversity.  During the
nineteen-twenties few of them had had seats on the prosperity band
wagon; a boom in the price of farm land after World War I had
overextended many of them, the failure of numerous rural banks had
been disastrous to these and to others, and the prices they had got
had seemed perpetually inadequate.  During the Depression these
prices had dropped to ruinous depths; and just as recovery was
setting in, a series of droughts and dust storms had desolated
whole areas of the Great Plains, sending miserable "Okies" on the
desperate trek to California, where at least there was a faint hope
of something better.  But now prices were good, the demand for farm
products was overwhelming, the weather was favorable, their methods
were vastly improved, and by 1943 their total purchasing power was
almost double what it had been at the end of the nineteen-thirties.

The engineers, technicians, and workers in the war plants benefited
by an interesting circumstance.  Since at the beginning of the war
emergency there had still been millions of unemployed men and
women, there had been no need for an official allocation of
manpower; the war industries could absorb large numbers of workers
from other occupations without crippling the economy.  And they
lured them largely by offering high pay.  A young chemist would
find himself sought out by a chemical concern at a salary he hadn't
expected to earn for many a year.  Mrs. Smith's waitress would
leave for a job in an electrical plant that would bring her $50 a
week with evenings free.  A soda jerker would double his income by
walking down the street to the factory that was going to make parts
for tanks.  And a salesgirl at a department-store stocking counter
would fetch up in an airplane plant at two or three times her store

Later, it is true, workers in essential industries were "frozen" in
their jobs and the rulings of the War Labor Board tended to keep
their pay within bounds; but the essential fact remained that these
war workers became, as a group, the chief beneficiaries of the new
prosperity.  Look at the figures for workers in manufacturing
industries.  Between 1939 and 1945 their average weekly earnings
went up by 86 per cent.  Meanwhile their cost of living went up by
an estimated 29 per cent--but even so they were far better off than
in 1939.  They had experienced a sharp and welcome gain in "real

By and large, what the war boom did, then--with numerous exceptions--
was to give a lift to people with low incomes.

We shall come back to that fact in a later chapter.  It was a very
important fact for the future of America.


During these war years there was an imposing growth in the size,
authority, and complexity of the federal government, superimposed
upon the growth that had already taken place under the New Deal.

At this point a word of amplification is necessary.  This growth
was nothing wholly new.  Both the federal government and the state
and local governments had been growing almost continuously even in
earlier years (subject only to the principle that in wartime it is
the federal government which swells while the others do not).
During the years 1915-1930, for example, the cost of running the
federal government had jumped by 352 per cent; and, although
military and veterans' expenditures accounted for much of the
increase, even the civil administrative costs had gone up by 237
per cent.  As for the state governments, the cost of running them
had leaped upward even during the time when the parsimonious Calvin
Coolidge was holding federal outlays more or less in check; how
could it help doing this when even the most conservative citizens
wanted new state highways and bigger and better schools?  This
trend toward growth was the unavoidable result of the increasing
interdependence of people in a society that is becoming ever more
urbanized and more complex: anybody who has lived for any stretch
of time in a rising suburb, and has seen its governmental budget
swell as its population grows, will recognize the phenomenon.

But the New Deal did accelerate this trend, sharply; and the war of
1941-1945 gave it a much stronger push.  In 1930, when Hoover was
in the White House and the Depression was still young, there had
been some 6/10 of a million federal civil employees.  By 1940, when
the New Deal had done its utmost and the war boom was just
beginning, the number had risen from 6/10 of a million to a little
over a million.  By 1945, when the war was ending, it had shot up
to more than 3 1/2 million.

And in the years following World War II, did it shrink back again
to only a little over a million?  It did not.  It shrank back only
part way--just as after World War I it had shrunk back only part
way.  In 1949, some four years after the war, and before the Korean
crisis, there were still over 2 million federal civil employees.

For the failure of the roster to contract more sharply one may
blame, if one wishes, the Fair Deal Administration, so anxious to
be a modified carbon copy of the expansive New Deal Administration;
or one may blame the inherent tendency of bureaucrats to hang onto
office at all cost.  In any case a major cause was our prolonged
tension with Soviet Russia.  Yet another cause, in all probability,
was our still increasing interdependence.

I remember a talk I once had with a number of men who were deeply
interested in conservation.  They included a public-spirited but
very conservative ex-banker.  When he said that to achieve some end--
I think it was the protection of watersheds--a new federal law was
needed, I asked whether interstate compacts wouldn't serve,
suggesting that I preferred to see such things managed if possible
without conferring new authority on Washington.  The ex-banker
explained to me patiently that only federal action would do the
trick.  On the growth of federal power in general I am sure my
friend would have been sulphurous.  But in this field he recognized
the inexorable principle that as our lives become more closely
interlocked, we must needs depend more and more on federal
legislation, federal regulation, federal funds.

Diligently as public-spirited bodies like the Hoover Commission,
apprehensive over the groaning weight of taxes, may work for
efficiency and economy in administration, and earnestly as others
may strive to limit government action to fields in which it will
not stifle individual enterprise and personal freedom, there seems
to be little prospect of a real shrinkage.  Big government appears
to be with us to stay.


The year 1945 was a year of great events.  As it opened, the German
counteroffensive of the Bulge in the snowy Ardennes was being
turned back, while at the other end of the world General
MacArthur's troops were storming through the Philippines.  In
March, American troops seized intact a bridge across the Rhine at
Remagen, and the way was opened for an offensive across Germany.
In April, when this offensive had just reached the Elbe, Franklin
D. Roosevelt--who had proved himself a masterly war leader, well
fitted to work in cordial partnership with the incomparable
Churchill--died, exhausted by his long labors toward victory; and
the massive burdens of the Presidency of the United States fell
upon the shoulders of the inexperienced and unassuming Vice-
President, Harry S. Truman.  Later in the same month there began,
at San Francisco, the international conference which set up the
United Nations organization.  By early May, Mussolini was dead,
Hitler was dead, and Germany had surrendered.  In July, the first
atomic bomb explosion took place in New Mexico.  In August, the
bomb was used on two Japanese cities, and Japan surrendered--just
after Stalin, like a football coach sending a senior into a game
during the last minute of play to get his letter, had belatedly
moved his troops against the Japanese.  V-J Day brought wild
rejoicing.  Now for an era of peace!

As soon as possible we began bringing our troops home in response
to a vociferous public demand.  Whereupon we encountered two

The first was a happy one.  There was no postwar depression such as
innumerable people had expected.  On the contrary, the new
prosperity went right on, with the public spending money at such a
pace that, with the relaxation of federal controls, there began a
progressive inflation more severe than the wartime one.  (From 1940
to 1945 the rise in the cost of living for moderate-income families
had been 28.4 per cent; from 1945 to 1949 it was 31.7 per cent--
with prices still going up.)  A series of strikes brought a series
of federal mediations, which usually gave labor at least a part of
what it had asked for; and these wage increases were followed by
price increases to absorb them--with, sometimes, a margin to spare.
We saw a first round of wage increases, a second round, a third
round--and then we lost track of the number.  The rising cost of
almost everything bore down heavily upon some businesses, and upon
individuals with fixed incomes, but as to the continuing actuality
of prosperity there could be no doubt whatever.  With government
expenditures continuing at a high level, the economic question of
the day was not whether America could absorb all it could produce,
but whether it could produce all it wanted to absorb.

The other surprise was deeply disturbing.  With Hitlerism dead and
done with, and with Japan docile under MacArthur's imperial rule,
we no sooner started to relax than it was borne in upon us, with
increasing ominousness, that Soviet Russia in her turn was bent
upon world conquest.  Not only must we keep large occupation forces
both in the Far East and in Europe; we must also prop up exhausted
Britain with a loan, come to the aid of Greece and Turkey under the
Truman Doctrine, launch the Marshall Plan to the tune of billions a
year for aid to the non-Communist governments and peoples of
Western Europe; run for months a hazardous airlift to Berlin to
prevent the Soviets from starving that city into submission; forge
an Atlantic Pact to protect Western Europe, and contribute heavily
to its defense; and, in 1950, hold off a Communist attack upon
South Korea--meanwhile confronting, at every session of every
council, assembly, and commission of the new United Nations
organization, an unremitting barrage of obstruction and
vilification from the Soviet representatives.

So our dreams of victorious relaxation ended almost as soon as they
began.  The draft had to be continued.  The military establishment
had to be built up again--at a cost which unhappily prolonged
inflation.  We found ourselves the uneasy proprietors of a big
atomic-power industry, government controlled (how strange to
American experience!) and supersecret.  We made intermittently
successful efforts at bi-partisan management of our foreign policy,
but under the strain of our bewildering responsibilities there were
constant political frictions and recriminations over the blunders
or alleged blunders that had given communism the initiative in so
many parts of the earth.  We discovered that the American
Communists had infiltrated into the management of many labor
unions, many supposedly liberal public-service organizations, and
some government departments; and so intense had the anti-Soviet
feeling become that this discovery led--as we shall see in another
chapter of this book--to the besmirching, often on the flimsiest or
falsest of evidence, of the reputations of many estimable citizens.
But on the other hand, our very distrust of the Soviets led to the
passage, by large majorities, of measure after measure for the
relief, upbuilding, and defense of Europe.  In our deep anxiety we
were carrying through a policy of aid which--however it might be
resented by people in Europe who knew well that we had never
suffered as they did, and whatever the final outcome of it might be--
was generous and statesmanlike.

As the international tension mounted again, still another surprise
became manifest.  Real isolationism had virtually disappeared.

What had happened, paradoxically, was that most of those Americans
who had formerly been isolationist, or would have been isolationist
had the international skies been clearer, had become interventionists
in a special area, the Far East.  When they looked across the
Atlantic Ocean, they looked with the old eyes of skepticism, voting
against appropriations for Britain, paring down appropriations for
the Continent.  But when they looked across the Pacific Ocean,
their mood was not skeptical, but full of faith in Chiang Kai-shek,
whom they wanted to support fully; and they were angry at American
officials, not because these officials had been too lavish in aid
to a foreign government, but because they had been too lukewarm and
too niggardly.  Some of the critics even pushed their attack upon
these officials to the point where it was implied that anyone who
was not a wholehearted interventionist in Asia was suspect of
Communist sympathies--an implication which they would hardly have
accepted if it had been applied to full support of, let us say, the
Marshall Plan.

What did this all add up to?  To the fact that we had
interventionists-in-Europe and interventionists-in-Asia, but few
true isolationists any more--at least for the time being.  However
acrid the disputes over foreign policy, there was general agreement
that the United States faced an inescapable assignment as chief
guardian and financial helper and adviser of the non-Communist

That was a development which the American of 1935, had he been able
to foresee it, would have regarded with complete incredulity.

Because it was so new, it was a development for which we ourselves
were unprepared.  The United States was gravely lacking in experts
who knew China, Korea, Indo-China, Iran, Egypt, and other lands
where crisis loomed; we had to begin hurriedly training them.
Foreign-policy problems were new and strange to most of us.  By
nature we resented having to engage in government propaganda
abroad.  Emotionally we were unready for the commanding role that
had been thrust upon us; for our inherited instincts--and most of
our acquired instincts--told us that where we belonged was in the
United States, looking after our own affairs.  More than ever, we
were the reluctant world power.

Chapter 12

Ole Ark A'Moverin'

By the mid-century--as a small army of technicians, diplomats,
exchange scholars, and journalists left the country to administer
its new world responsibilities--Americans abroad found that they
were repeatedly asked the question (partly as a result of
persistent Communist propaganda):  "What about your race relations
in the United States?"  To the Asiatic, to the African, to the men
of color in every land, it made a great deal of sense to judge
American promises of a Brave New World against American performance
at home.

To this stock question the new missionaries of Fulbright, Point
Four, ECA, and the technical assistance programs of the United
Nations could find no stock response.  They were unable to deny
that a degree of discrimination continues to exist in the United
States.  Yet they were also aware that the impressions in men's
minds abroad were outdated, and to that extent at least were
distorted.  And they found themselves wanting to tell the world,
"But you must understand how much these things have changed in the
past few decades."

In 1900 there were not quite nine million Negroes in the United
States (as compared with some fifteen million in 1950) and they
were overwhelmingly concentrated in the South.  Not only did nearly
nine-tenths of them live there, but nearly three-quarters of them
were to be found in the RURAL South.  For a generation they had
enjoyed the nominal status of free men and women; but they were
desperately handicapped by poverty, ill health, bad housing,
inadequate education, scanty opportunity, and--in the South--an
inferior position before the law.  No less than 44.5 per cent of
them were illiterate.  By and large they held the most servile,
heaviest, dirtiest, and worst-paid jobs; and their most
characteristic occupation was as cotton-pickers, victims of an
uneconomic and demoralizing system of farm tenantry which a cynic
might have imagined to have been deliberately devised in order to
inculcate in the tenants the very traits of shiftlessness and
irresponsibility which were attributed to the Negroes.  Many of
them lived in virtual peonage by reason of debt.

The prevailing view of them among the Southern whites was that they
were virtually subhuman and incapable of profiting by education;
when a Negro manifested exceptional intelligence, this was taken to
be a sign that he must have white blood in his veins.  The colored
people were to be regarded with affection and amusement so long as
they kept their place, but must be intimidated the moment they
showed any signs of stepping out of it; for underlying the
enjoyment which the Southern whites took in their agreeable
deportment, their gentle humor, their gift of song, their zest for
rhythm, their instinct for courtesy, was a profound fear of them--a
fear heightened by long memories of Reconstruction days, and by the
realization that in many parts of the region they outnumbered the

This fear had brought about their gradual disfranchisement by such
devices as the "grandfather law": in 1900 it was estimated that out
of 181,471 Negro males of voting age in Alabama only 3,000 were
registered.  Lynchings were numerous: in 1900 no less than 115 were
recorded, and in 1901 the figure rose to a record 130 (as compared
with an average of less than four a year during the nineteen-

The million or so Negroes who lived outside the South fared on the
average much better, partly because the wage level tended to be
higher in the North and West, the schools better, the sanitary
conditions less primitive, but also because there was as yet little
fear of them in these regions; in some smaller communities the few
resident Negroes were highly regarded and occupied positions of
virtual social equality with their neighbors.  But even in the
North, Negroes in general were customarily regarded as comic or
picturesque minor characters in the drama of American life, and the
latest quaint saying of a colored servant played a part in the
conversation of the well-bred, somewhat like that of the latest
quaint saying of an amusing child.

There had long been a tendency to move northward among those
Negroes who could afford the trip, but it was not until about the
year 1915 that the northward migration reached flood proportions.
What accelerated it was a rising demand for unskilled workers in
northern industry by reason of the war boom.  Year by year it
continued, as word spread through county after county in the South
that colored friends and relatives in Harlem or Philadelphia or
Chicago were eating regularly and appreciating the absence of Jim
Crow restrictions.  But as the Negro population in the North
swelled--especially in the big cities which absorbed an
overwhelming majority of the migrants--the same sort of fear that
had previously been acute only in the South began to possess many
Northerners.  Efforts to keep Negroes out of jobs which whites
might want, and to pen them within their own slum districts, lest
their presence elsewhere lower real-estate values, became more
deliberate, more organized; during the mid-twenties the vicious Ku
Klux Klan flourished not only in the South but in many parts of the
North too.  The colored people were learning to their cost that the
amount of organized discrimination against any group considered
alien is likely to be proportionate to the relative size of that
group in the community, and that as they moved north they brought
their problems with them.

Then came the Great Depression, and its impact upon the Negro
population was appalling.  In those days when apprehension over the
loss of one's job became an obsession with millions of Americans,
inevitably the worst sufferers were those who traditionally had
been the last to be hired, the first to be demoted, the first to be
fired.  If the northward migration continued--as it did--this was
largely because the chances of getting on relief were on the whole
better in the North than in the South.  In the year 1935 the median
incomes of colored families were computed in a number of cities; in
the northern ones, they averaged about half, or a little less, of
the median incomes of white families (which themselves were nothing
to brag of in that Depression year); in southern cities they
averaged even less.  In Mobile, Alabama, for example, the median
Negro family took in only $481 during the year, as against $1,419
for the median white one.  And in that same year SOMETHING LIKE

The Communists made terrific efforts to capitalize upon this
situation, and no wonder: was there not here a proletariat made to
their order?  They signally failed to make more than a small number
of Negro converts, however; partly, perhaps, because the Negroes
constituted something closer to a caste than to a class, and had
stratifications in their own communities which made such an appeal
unpalatable to many, including most of their natural leaders;
partly because communism was unpopular and, as one Negro put it, it
was "bad enough to be black without being red too"; and partly
because they were by nature allergic to the alienness of Communist
theory and action.

The approach of World War II brought a sharp economic improvement.
As the general level of wages rose, Negroes could hardly escape
getting some of the benefits.  These reached them laggingly,
however, for the desire of white workers to keep the best of the
new jobs for themselves had hardened into an attitude much more
conscious and deliberate than during the industrial boom of World
War I.

By this time another factor was at work.  Innumerable white
citizens were becoming uncomfortably aware that the existence of an
underprivileged caste in the United States was a blot upon the
record of a nation enlisted in a fight for democracy.  Negro
leaders took every opportunity to add to their moral discomfort by
reminding them that Negroes, drafted into the armed forces like
whites, were segregated there and assigned to menial duties.  The
agitation against this segregation, and for a code of "fair
employment practices" in war manufacturing plants, won strong
backing among whites in the North; and even in the South, though
there remained Rankins and Talmadges to shout the old battle cries
of "white supremacy," there was manifest among great numbers of
decent people the same sort of stirring of the conscience.  They
were becoming aware of how heavy an economic load weighs upon any
community which deliberately condemns a part of its consuming
public to poverty; and they were making a conscientious effort to
find, by quiet accommodation, sympathetic solutions for the ancient
problems of Negro poverty and misery in the Southern States.

For a time the upshot was uncertain.  Wrote Gunnar Myrdal,
completing during the war his massive, dispassionate study of the
condition of the colored people, An American Dilemma:  "Reading the
Negro press and hearing all the reports from observers who have
been out among common Negroes in the South and the North convinces
me that there is much sullen skepticism, and even cynicism, and
vague, tired, angry dissatisfaction among American Negroes today."
And expecting--as most people did during 1943, 1944, and 1945--that
the war would be followed by another depression, Myrdal wondered
whether the friction that would result might set back Negro
progress.  For a time it looked as if the mutual antipathy of
Negroes and whites might not remain within peaceful bounds,
especially when, shortly after the war, some colored leaders
advised their fellow Negroes to resist the draft so long as the
armed forces of the United States did not put the two races on a
footing of equality.


But there was no postwar depression.  And all this time the uneasy
American conscience was steadily at work.  The result was that the
postwar years saw a change that would have seemed unbelievable only
a decade earlier.

A series of Supreme Court decisions set aside many of the laws and
practices which had kept Negroes from the polls and from
educational opportunity.  One decision weakened the force of
racially restrictive real-estate covenants.  A number of Southern
states repealed the poll-tax laws which had prevented great numbers
of poor people, white and black, from voting; in the election of
1948 over a million Southern Negroes went to the polls.  The Air
Force and Navy officially ended segregation and the Army modified
its former segregation practices.  The pressure of "fair
employment" laws in several Northern states, combined with the
eagerness of many employers to set an example of enlightened
employment policy, brought about the entry of colored workers in
many fields of employment new to them.  In New York, for example,
anybody returning to the city after a long absence would have been
struck by the large numbers of colored men and women in the midtown
busses and on the midtown streets, traveling to jobs that had
previously been for whites only, or to shop in stores where colored
customers had previously been few and far between.  In Northern and
Western cities generally there was a noticeable breakdown of Jim
Crow restrictions in hotels, restaurants, and theaters.

Ever since the nineteen-twenties there had been a rising
appreciation, among intellectuals, of the Negro contributions to
the arts, and especially to jazz music; and as time went on there
developed among the more ardent students of jazz such a reverence
for the pioneering contributions of the original, jazz musicians of
New Orleans and Memphis, and for the inheritors of the traditions
of Basin Street and Beale Street, that men like Duke Ellington and
Louis Armstrong found themselves the objects of a deep and
deferential respect among thousands of music lovers.  Meanwhile, in
quite another area, the statesmanship and dignity of Ralph Bunche,
as mediator in the Near East, was winning for him the admiration of
innumerable whites.  But still more important for Negro prestige,
because it involved such an enormous public, was the prowess of Joe
Louis, the great heavyweight champion, of whom Jimmy Cannon said
that he was a credit to his race--the human race; and also the
performance of a number of colored baseball players after the Jim
Crow restrictions in professional baseball were broken down in the
late nineteen-forties.  Not only did the remarkable playing and
exemplary behavior of men like Jackie Robinson make the earlier
color line in baseball seem preposterous to the fans, but by 1950
most of the enthusiasts for baseball seemed to choose their
favorite players with almost no regard for the color line; and so
carefully did radio reporters of baseball games refrain from
mentioning the color of the players that there were actually stay-
at-home fans who could tell you Roy Campanella's approximate
batting average but were not aware that he was a Negro.

"Probably the most important thing that has happened in the United
States in the field of race relations," wrote Mrs. Eleanor
Roosevelt, "is that so many things are now taken for granted where
the integration of the two races is concerned.  This was brought
home to me at the Inauguration of 1945 in the White House when a
group of newspaper women who had been watching the receiving line
came to me at the end of the day and said:  'Do you realize what
twelve years have done?  If at the 1933 reception a number of
colored people had gone down the line and mixed with everyone else
in the way they did today, every paper in the country would have
reported it.  We do not even think it is news and none of us will
mention it.'"

No longer did magazines, newspapers, and moving pictures show
Negroes almost exclusively as comic or menial characters.  Those
ancient stereotypes had been largely eliminated.

Most striking of all the changes, perhaps, was a new attitude on
the part of younger white Americans, both North and South--a very
widespread resolve to accept Negroes as people without regard to
their color.  This attitude was manifest when, following Supreme
Court decisions, a number of universities in the southern and
border states admitted Negroes to unsegregated standing.
University administrators were uneasy: would some hothead whites
among the students raise a ruckus?  Up to the end of 1951 there had
been no ruckus anywhere.  Uniformly, the students took the
innovation in their stride.

Meanwhile a profound change in the economic pattern of the Old
South was having a further effect upon Negro fortunes.  The
invention of the cotton-picker and cotton-stripper was bringing an
end to the reign of King Cotton in the Southeast and was slowly
undermining the ancient institution of farm tenantry.  Little by
little the former cotton plantations of Georgia, Alabama, and the
Carolinas were being abandoned as cotton planters in the
Mississippi Delta, Texas, Oklahoma, New Mexico, and Arizona proved
themselves able to harvest cotton economically on large tracts of
land fully adapted to mechanized operations.  Little by little the
southeastern states were shifting from cotton to dairy farming,
livestock raising, vegetable raising, and the growing of pine trees
for cellulose.  And the result was a further drift of the former
tenant farmers, black along with white, to the industrial cities
and towns the country over.

The census figures of 1950 showed the extent of the shift.  In
1900, as we have seen, nearly three-quarters of the Negroes in
America had lived in the rural South; by 1950, LESS THAN ONE-FIFTH
OF THEM DID.  (And less than half of these were tenants.)  In
several Southern states--Alabama, Arkansas, Georgia, and
Mississippi--the total colored population showed an actual decline
since 1940; and although South Carolina registered an increase, it
was exceedingly small.  Meanwhile the figures for various Northern
states illustrated how widely the Negro population was becoming
distributed.  In Connecticut, for example, the number of colored
residents had leaped in ten years from 33,835 to 54,953; in
Wisconsin, from 24,835 to 41,884.  The northward tide was not
simply flooding into the biggest and most congested centers; it was
seeping out into other parts of the land.

And what of the economic fortunes of the colored people?  During
World War II Gunnar Myrdal had written:

The economic situation of the Negroes is pathological.  Except for
a small minority enjoying upper or middle class status, the masses
of American Negroes, in the rural South and in the segregated slum
quarters in Southern and Northern cities, are destitute.  They own
little property; even their household goods are mostly inadequate
and dilapidated.  Their incomes are not only low but irregular.
They thus live from day to day and have scant security for the
future.  Their entire culture and their individual interests and
strivings are narrow.

By the mid-century there was still a degree of truth in this
generalization.  Yet there were signs that during the nineteen-
forties the rising tide of prosperity had to a very considerable
extent carried the Negro population with it.

True, it was estimated in 1948 that the median Negro family income
was 47 per cent lower than the comparable white family income.  But
in the National Economic Review for the year 1950, published by the
President's Council of Economic Advisers in January, 1951, there
was an estimate of the proportion of Negroes in various income
groups which put the situation in somewhat different terms.  Among
those "spending units"--which means families and individuals--whose
money income before taxes was less than $1,000 for the year, 83 per
cent were found to be white; 15 per cent, Negro (leaving two per
cent classified as "unascertainable").  Among the next higher
group, with annual incomes between $1,000 and $2,000, 89 per cent
were white, 10 per cent Negro.  In the $2,000-$3,000 class, 92 per
cent were white, 7 per cent Negro.  And in the large group with
incomes of $3,000 or over, 97 per cent were white, 3 per cent were
Negro.  When you examine those figures, remember that the Negroes
of the country constitute just about one-tenth of the population.
Therefore par for each of these classifications would be 10 per
cent.  The figures reveal a marked shortage of colored people in
the more well-to-do groups, and an excess of colored people in the
lowest group.  But I wonder if many readers will not feel, as I did
when I first saw those figures, some surprise that the overloading
in the lowest brackets was not more extreme.  The movement of
Negroes away from tenant farming and into industry, and out of the
Old South into other parts of the country, was combining with the
general change in public attitudes to mitigate the deplorable
situation described by Myrdal.

There were other favorable signs.  Negro illiteracy had been cut in
fifty years from 44.5 per cent to 11 per cent, and Negro expectancy
of life had been increased by nearly 26 years.  Lynchings--the
endless topic of Communist propaganda the world over--had virtually
ceased: in the entire United States only one lynching was recorded
in 1945; six in 1946; one in 1947; two in 1948 (of which one of the
victims was white); three in 1949; and two in 1950 (of which one
victim was white).  One would find it hard to find a disease so
rare, or a type of accident so unusual, that in a land of a hundred
and fifty million people they would not produce death rates larger
than those.

By the mid-century there were 94,000 Negro students in American
colleges and universities.  And a colored woman who had been
serving as an exchange professor in France told me that she was
constantly having to explain to French audiences that there were a
great many people like herself who were able to lead their
professional lives with a minimum sense of belonging to a special
caste.  "Are you allowed to walk on the sidewalk in Washington?"
she would be asked; and would have to explain that of course she
was.  One noted an increasing number of Negro policemen in Southern
cities--often arresting white lawbreakers; and such symbolic events
took place as the election of a Negro to the city council in
Richmond, Virginia.  All in all, the evidence was strong, not only
that the status of the Negro had risen far above what most
Europeans--influenced despite themselves by Communist rantings and
also by the writings of earlier rebels against the American color
line--imagined it to be, but above what most Americans still
imagined it to be.

There was little prospect that this major American problem would
move toward a solution without further friction and mutual
antagonism.  No era of amiable harmony was in sight.  Yet at least
the battleground of opinion was moving slowly toward a location
less disadvantageous to the Negro.  As Walter White wrote in the
summer of 1951, America was making progress toward rubbing out the
darkest blot on its democratic record--"often painfully slow, but
it is still progress."

Chapter 13

Faster, Faster

Writing in the year 1904, Henry Adams--"an elderly and timid single
gentleman in Paris," as he described himself--recorded his
astonishment at the year-by-year expansion of steam power and
electric power, and at the discovery of radioactivity; and he
propounded a "law of acceleration."  The amount of force at the
disposal of mankind was increasing faster and faster, he noted.
"The coal output of the world, speaking roughly, doubled every ten
years between 1840 and 1900, in the form of utilized power, for the
ton of coal yielded three or four times as much power in 1900 as in
1840."  And he looked forward to a fantastic future, in which the
forces available to man would multiply until "the new American--the
child of incalculable coal power, chemical power, electric power,
and radiating energy, as well as of new forces yet undetermined--
must be a sort of God compared with any former creature of nature."

At the rate of progress since 1800, continued Adams, "every
American who lived into the year 2000 would know how to control
unlimited power.  He would think in complexities unimaginable to an
earlier mind.  He would deal with problems altogether beyond the
range of earlier society.  To him the nineteenth century would
stand on the same plane with the fourth--equally childlike--and he
would only wonder how both of them, knowing so little, and so weak
in force, should have done so much."

At the mid-century a thoughtful observer of the startling progress
of American technology is likely to feel a bewilderment akin to
that which Adams felt in 1904.  For the application of power to the
circumstances of American life has not only increased at a dizzy
pace since Adams's time, but has seemed to be accelerating sharply,
with the promise of further leaps ahead.  In the latter nineteen-
thirties many economists had come to the conclusion that the United
States had arrived at a "mature economy"; instead, we have been
witnessing a technological revolution comparable to that which
followed the introduction of steam, and far more rapid.  During the
fifteen years from 1935 to 1950 American technology took a stride
forward at least as impressive as that which Henry Ford's assembly
line dramatized in earlier years; and from all appearances this was
not the culmination, but merely a preliminary phase, of a process
of change which in time would profoundly alter the working and
living conditions of the people.

We have already noted, in Chapter II, how the coming of World War
II unlocked the productive powers of American industry; how the
manufacturers, when asked to go ahead and produce with little
regard for cost or for anything else except quantity and speed,
went into a burst of activity which astonished the world.  But we
have given only passing mention to the way in which the war
stimulated invention and technological change.  What the
government, through its Office of Scientific Research and
Development and other agencies, was constantly saying during the
war was, in effect:  "Is this discovery or that one of any possible
war value?  If so, then develop it and put it to use, and damn the
expense!"  The result has been likened to a team of experts combing
through a deskful of scientific papers, pulling out those which
gave promise of usefulness, and then commandeering all the talent
and appropriating all the money that might be needed to translate
formulae into goods of military value.

The classic example, of course, is the way in which, following the
splitting of the atom in 1939 and the confirmation of this event by
American experiments in 1940, the government presently launched the
Manhattan Project, at a cost of billions, and compressed into less
than five years of research and engineering and manufacturing
experiment and development what might otherwise have taken a
generation to accomplish.  But there were other examples
innumerable.  For instance, it was in 1929 that Alexander Fleming
first described penicillin.  Long years went by before the
possibilities of what he had discovered were realized.  Not until
the war came was penicillin adapted for medicinal use.  But then
the work was pushed with such speed that before the end of the war
the drug was being supplied in vast amounts.  Still another example
was the pioneer work done by Robert Watson-Watt and other British
investigators in the development of radar, under the awful
necessity of protecting England from German bombs; the utilization
of their findings in the American manufacture of radar equipment on
the grand scale; and the resulting education of thousands of young
Americans in the principles and possibilities of electronics.

Each of these developments which I have cited was based, in large
part, upon scientific discoveries made abroad.  We should remember
that the metaphorical deskful of papers of which I have spoken was
international; much if not most of the fundamental work out of
which grew the new wartime products and devices was European.  What
the United States contributed most effectively was a capacity for
the organization of research, especially in applied science; the
ability to set up brisk production lines; and a zest for doing big
things at top speed.

The war crisis brought together as never before the pure scientist,
the applied scientist, the manufacturing executive, the military
officer, and the government administrator, and put them into a
partnership which mightily affected their future understanding of
one another.  The physicist or chemist who had been cloistered in a
university laboratory, and had taken a special pride in paying no
heed to the possible practical application of his findings, was
thrust into emergency work of the most lethally practical sort, and
hauled off to Washington to consult with generals and admirals and
bureaucrats and engineers and manufacturers; and these others
acquired a new respect for his scholarly ardor, now suddenly so
vital to them.  The question has been raised whether the quality of
disinterested academic investigation was not somehow tarnished in
the process, and especially whether the continuing diversion of
much scientific talent into specific projects for the government
even after 1945 may not have slowed our advance in pure science.
But certainly there took place during the war a cross-fertilization
of thinking which was stimulating to all concerned.  Many a
professor was enlivened by his new contacts, and many an industrial
executive went home from Washington with a new insight into the
future potential of scientific research.

All in all, during the war American technology underwent a hothouse


Meanwhile the war-induced prosperity was speeding technological
change on a quite different level.  The jingle of cash in the
pocket was preparing innumerable ordinary Americans to buy and use
more machines just as soon as these became available.  And after V-
J Day the rush was on.

Everybody, to begin with, seemed to want new automobiles, which had
been unavailable for purchase during the war.  There was hot
competition for the joy of getting a new car fresh from the
assembly line; people talked about the number of months or years
that they had "had their name in" with dealers; there was a lively
racket in ostensibly used cars; and it was years before the
automobile manufacturers could catch up with the demand.  After
they had done so, in the single year 1950 they sold more than eight
million vehicles--which was more cars than had existed in the
entire United States at the end of World War I.

But that wasn't the half of it.  During these postwar years the
farmer bought a new tractor, a corn picker, an electric milking
machine; in fact he and his neighbors, between them, assembled a
formidable array of farm machinery for their joint use.  The
farmer's wife got the shining white electric refrigerator she had
always longed for and never during the Great Depression had been
able to afford, and an up-to-date washing machine, and a deep-
freeze unit.  The suburban family installed a dishwashing machine
and invested in a power lawnmower.  The city family became
customers of a laundromat and acquired a television set for the
living room.  The husband's office was air-conditioned.  And so on

Few of these machines for working and living were new in principle.
Many had been on the market and in use for a long time.
Essentially it was prosperity which put these and other machines
into widespread use--prosperity plus a variety of sometimes
mutually antagonistic forces, such as, for example, the electric-
utility industry, enemy-to-the-death of the New Deal, and the Rural
Electrification Administration, offspring of the New Deal, which
between them were at least partly responsible for the remarkable
progress in the electrification of American farms.  In 1935 only
about 10 per cent of American farms were electrified; by 1950, more
than 85 per cent were.

A one-time resident of Arkansas, returning to Fayetteville at the
mid-century after a prolonged absence, remarked that the most eye-
opening thing about the farms he saw in the neighborhood was that
almost all were electrified; in his boyhood an electric-lighted
farm had been a rarity.  At about the same time the editors of a
popular magazine planned to publish a picture story on the daily
routine of a farmer's wife; they abandoned the project because the
farmers' wives that their correspondents and photographers had
encountered had so much mechanical kitchen equipment that they
could hardly be distinguished photographically from other
housewives.  In 1950 a British "productivity team" visited America
to study the agricultural methods in use, and visited a large
number of farms from New Jersey to Nebraska, with their interest
focused, not on the spectacularly large farm with its intensive
mechanization, but on the family-size farm run by the farmer and
his family with the aid, perhaps, of one hired hand.  They noted
not only the widespread and increasing use of such things as
tractor plows, disk harrows, corn planters, corn pickers, combine
harvesters, milking machines, self-unloading trailers, and so on,
but also the fact that on farm after farm the work was being
reorganized to take advantage of machinery.  The farmer no longer
thought of a machine simply as an efficient and untiring substitute
for a horse, or for human effort, but as a device which would
enable him to go about his business in a new way using a hay dryer
to preserve the vitamins in his cattle feed, for instance, or
substituting for the electrical milking of cows in a traditional
stanchion barn the building of a "milking parlor" adjacent to an
open cattleshed or "loafing barn."

During the nineteen-forties the number of farm workers shrank from
9 1/2 millions to only a little over 8 millions.  Nevertheless farm
production increased by 25 per cent.  This was partly, of course,
because prosperity at home and food shortages abroad had broadened
the market; but partly it was because farmers, like other
Americans, were using more and more machines, old and new, in their
daily life.


Simultaneously the rising wage rates in American factories were
prompting a restless search for labor-saving methods of production.
These took innumerable forms, some of them based upon sheer
elementary common sense--"Can't we dream up a machine to do the
work that those unskilled workers are sweating over?" or "Why not
redesign this floor of the factory so that the work won't have to
be lifted by hand from this point to that, but will move smoothly
from job to job by conveyor belt?"--while others involved
scientific formulae and mechanical assemblies of the utmost

The common-sense labor-saving devices would make a long list--
overhead cranes, conveyors of all sorts (gravity rollers, skate
rollers, belt conveyors), power grabs for picking up unit loads,
power-driven hand tools, the use of compressed air for cleaning,
and so forth.  Typical, perhaps, in its simplicity and its
significance is the use of the fork truck and pallet: the fork
truck being a sturdy little truck equipped with a fork--or pair of
metal fingers--with which it can pick up goods, lift them high, and
carry them from point to point; and the pallet being simply a
double-bottomed tray on which cartons or bundles of goods can be
piled for such transportation.  The fork truck can insert its metal
fingers between the two layers of a loaded pallet on a freight car,
lift it, carry it to its appointed place in the factory, put it
carefully in place, and then withdraw the metal fingers and return
for another load.  All very simple; nothing abstruse about it.  But
anybody who has watched the laborious unloading of trucks across a
city sidewalk--one man lifting cartons out of the track, another
man toting them indoors, to be taken by a third man to their proper
place in the building--can realize the amount of human heaving and
hauling that the fork truck and pallet eliminate.  For all this
effort is substituted the work of one man, driving about in his
fork truck and manipulating with precise skill the metal fingers of
his fork.  Such contraptions are symbolic of a whole class of labor-
saving devices in that they regard human labor as expensive and
therefore to be conserved, while the wood or plastic that goes into
the making of pallets is plentiful and comparatively expendable.

Anybody can understand the basic principle of a fork truck.  But
the layman can only stand in awe before some of the complex
electronic machines which came into use during the period between
1935 and 1950--machines for measuring materials with microscopic
exactitude, or for watching the performance of a machine and
automatically correcting flaws in its performance.  The language
used by engineers in talking about them is quite unintelligible to
him, as are the processes involved.  But at least he can appreciate
the miraculous results they achieve.  They can count and inspect
the goods coming off an assembly line, passing or discarding them
as faithful or unfaithful to the specifications.  They can check,
with incredible precision, the exact thickness of a sheet of steel,
or discover the hidden flaws inside a mass of metal.  They can
watch the work of a machine with an eye of superhuman vision, and
start, stop, regulate the machine in accordance with their
observations.  Here again, though the scientific principles at work
are far beyond lay comprehension, the symbolic significance is
clear: you can not only dispense with even a reasonably skilled
workman by building into a machine all the foreseeable motions with
which he might react to variations in the task before him, but you
can even provide the machine with eyes much sharper and reactions
much prompter than his.  With such appliances coming into use, no
wonder the most striking thing about many a factory floor, today,
is the multiplicity of machines and the almost total absence of
machine tenders.

Another innovation which came into use during this same period has
a somewhat different significance.  It does not eliminate the
workman; instead, it makes him a less wasteful and more responsible
performer.  This is "quality control"--a system of taking an
occasional sample of the work produced by a given machine,
submitting this sample to the most minute electronic inspection,
and recording on a chart just how it deviates from absolute
perfection.  The workman, consulting this chart, can thereupon
regulate the adjustment of his machine, not by guesswork, but with
exact knowledge of just how it is functioning.  This device--which
in many a factory has saved large amounts of money by reducing the
number of defective products--has the effect of raising the status
of the workman by making him in a special sense his own boss, the
informed critic and judge of his performance.

What has been the cumulative effect of the introduction of such
varied machine methods?  First, it has reduced sharply the demand
for unskilled labor.  In 1900 there were some eleven million
"common laborers" (including those on the farms) in the United
States; by 1950 there were less than six million.  At the other end
of the spectrum it has increased tremendously the demand for
engineers and technicians.  At the beginning of the century,
according to President Conant of Harvard, chemical engineering had
not developed as a profession; "today [he was speaking in 1951]
there is a great shortage of chemical engineers in spite of the
fact that more than 15,000 have been trained in the last five
years."  As for engineers in general, they increased in number from
about 40,000 in 1900 to about 400,000 in 1950, and still there was
such a furious demand for them--intensified by the Korean war--that
in 1951 the students graduating from engineering schools were being
looked over by talent-scout teams from over four thousand
companies, and one university placement officer declared, "Even our
worst students have had at least three offers."

The economist Colin Clark has called attention to the fact that as
an industrial civilization becomes more advanced, there tends to be
a movement of people out of farming into industry, and then out of
industry into what he calls the "services"--meaning business,
trade, transportation, entertainment, the professions, etc.  This
movement has certainly been taking place in the United States.
Since 1900 the proportion of Americans engaged in farming has taken
a big drop; the proportion engaged in industry, overall, has
changed very little; the proportion engaged in the "services" has
jumped upward.  Take this fact in conjunction with the facts about
the shift within industry and we emerge with a general finding:  At
the mid-century there are fewer and fewer people working with their
hands, more and more people working at desks; fewer workers with
brawn, more workers with brain; fewer whose jobs require only a
limited education, more who need an advanced education.

There are still many dark satanic mills in the United States.
There are still numerous jobs of grinding effort or wearisome
monotony.  Even the most automatic factory has to employ
maintenance men, sweepers, cleaners; these men's work has been very
little mechanized, and they tend to form a sort of new proletariat
of the machine age.  Yet the general trend is toward an enhancement
of the dignity of labor.

Ever since Henry Ford set up his assembly line we have been hearing
lamentations over the tendency of the factory to turn a man into a
robot, to make him a mere mechanical bolt-tightener, hour upon
hour.  Dreadful pictures have been drawn of the completely
mechanized future day when man would be dehumanized by such labor.
But what has actually been happening, increasingly, is that a
machine has been put to work tightening those everlasting bolts;
that the man who formerly tightened them, or his counterpart, is
either managing a more intricate machine, or sitting at a desk
studying engineering reports; while the man who formerly broke his
back lifting bundles of goods is sitting at the controls of a
conveyer.  For the principle that has been at work is this:  If the
job is unendurably heavy or monotonous, that's a pretty good sign
that you can get a machine to do it.


Like scouts moving before an advancing column of troops, the
investigators and engineers of pure and applied science have
meanwhile been moving ahead.  For well over a generation, now, the
chemists and chemical engineers have been ringing the changes on an
idea mentioned in an earlier chapter of this book, the idea that
"synthetic" materials can do better than merely imitate nature:
they can actually improve on nature.  It was before World War II--
on October 25, 1939, to be exact--that they produced the climactic
demonstration of this idea; that was when nylon stockings first
went on sale.  During the nineteen-thirties and the war years,
other pioneers of technology succeeded in adapting the Diesel
engine--that long-neglected source of power--to widespread use on
the railroads and in industry.  They developed high-octane gasoline
into a plentiful source of power for airplanes.  They brought the
production of synthetic rubber to a point where it served, not
merely as a war substitute, but as a product of continuing value
for a nation on wheels.  They found out how to use tungsten-carbide
cutting tools for immensely rapid machine-tool operations.  And
they made medical history by discovering the merciful possibilities
of the antibiotics.

As for atomic power--their most imposing achievement--we already
have been shown its deadly possibilities; what its beneficent ones
may be is still uncertain, in view of the fabulous cost of
producing it, but they might well, in time, make man--in Adams's
words--"the child of incalculable power."

In the field of aviation the working of Adams's law of acceleration
has been strikingly exemplified.  In 1935 there was no transoceanic
flying except on an adventurous and experimental basis; scarcely a
dozen years later, the first question asked of anybody who said he
was leaving for Europe was, "Are you going to fly or go by boat?"
By the end of the war we saw the arrival of the jet plane; within a
few years thereafter, the speed of planes was reported to have
passed the supposedly impassable sonic barrier; by 1950 the
exploration of the upper air had reached a point where sober men of
science were talking in matter-of-fact tones about the chances for
space travel.

In quite different fields one encounters startling evidence of the
way in which the advance of research has been transforming American
businesses--as when one hears from an official of the Corning Glass
Works that more than 50 per cent of Corning sales in 1950 was in
products which did not exist commercially ten years earlier.

The nineteen-forties were a heyday for the chemists and chemical
engineers.  The oil industry, for instance, happily discovered
that, as Carroll Wilson has put it, "there were things more
valuable than fuel in a barrel of crude oil," and, beginning about
1942, built a number of continuous-flow chemical plants which
rivaled the wildest fantasies of an H. G. Wells.  In these strange
new factories with their shining fractionating towers and their
latticeworks of bright-colored pipes, "the raw material, fluid or
gas, flows continuously in at one end, passes through intricate
processing stages, and debouches in a twenty-four-hour stream of
products at the other," wrote the editors of Fortune in their 1951
book, U.S.A., the Permanent Revolution.  And what a variety of
products--ranging from fertilizer to detergents, from cosmetics to
refrigerants, from synthetic rubber to printer's ink!  Nowadays the
petrochemists, sitting in their laboratories and drawing pictures
of arrangements of molecules that look like diagrams of football
plays, see themselves as the architects of a multifold new
industrial era.

But perhaps it is not to the chemists, but to the physicists, that
one should look for the most startling future discoveries; or to co-
ordinated efforts by physicists, chemists, biologists, and
mathematicians.  In the year 1948 chemistry gave us cortisone, that
minister of comfort and shaker of medical theory; in the same year
physics produced the transistor, a tiny device which may well
supersede the vacuum tube.  The half century was hardly over before
co-ordinated researches developed krilium, a soil conditioner of
unguessed potentialities.  And there are hardheaded men who believe
that the joint efforts of physicists, chemists, and biologists may
be taking us to the threshold of accomplishing the miracle of
photosynthesis--of producing food from light as plants produce it.

Perhaps Henry Adams was not so far wrong with his prediction that
"every American who lived into the year 2000 would know how to
control unlimited power."  Certainly things have been accelerating
at the mid-century.

Chapter 14

More Americans, Living Longer

During the year 1932 a huddle of social scientists put the
finishing touches on a massive study of American life which they
called Recent Social Changes, and in this book some of them made
cautious estimates of the probable increase in the future
population of the country.  Noting that the rate of growth appeared
to be slowing down, they figured that a "continuation of present
trends" would produce a 1940 population of 132 or 133 millions.  In
the event they were not far wrong; when the year 1940 rolled round,
the actual figure proved to be a trifle smaller--presumably because
of the discouragements of the Great Depression--yet only a trifle:
it was 131,669,275.  But on the same tentative basis the social
scientists made a prediction for 1950, and on this one they were
spectacularly wrong.  Their prediction: between 140 1/2 and 145
millions (which, you will agree, allowed considerable leeway for
error).  The actual 1950 figures: 150,697,361 people--more than
five millions more than their outside estimate!  There had been a
huge, unexpected, and altogether astonishing increase.

The chief reason for the increase was a big jump in the birth rate
during the nineteen-forties.  To ascribe this flatly to "war and
prosperity," as some people have done, seems a little oversimple;
for World War I had brought no such big bulge, and during the
reasonably prosperous nineteen-twenties the birthrate had not risen
but had declined a little.  Yet undeniably the draft regulations,
deferring husbands with children, were a factor.  Another was the
natural tendency of young people facing the prospect of being
separated for months or years--or perhaps forever to plunge into
marriage in a hurry.  Still another was the eagerness of young men
returning from the notably undomestic life of the armed services,
and of girls who had been waiting for them, to want to begin to
enjoy domesticity just as soon as possible, with terminal pay and
in many cases the G.I. Bill of Rights to help finance the venture.
And at a time when wars and rumors of wars seemed to jeopardize
one's career and threaten one's very life, there was not only a
human need for seizing whatever satisfactions were within reach but
also, perhaps, a desire to make some sort of contribution to the
future, to perpetuate one's blood--or if not an outright desire
(since most births are in some degree accidental) at least a
slackening of the resolution not to perpetuate it for the time

In any case the birth rate, which--after a long decline--in the
nineteen-thirties had hovered in the neighborhood of 17 or 18 per
thousand of population, went to 20.9 in 1942 and 21.5 in 1943;
declined a trifle to 20.2 in 1944 and 19.6 in 1945 (when a good
many million potential fathers were in Europe or on Pacific islands
or at sea); and then rose abruptly to 23.3 in 1946 and 25.8 in 1947--
after which it declined, but only very slightly, to 24.2 in 1948,
24.1 in 1949, and 23.5 in 1950.

Surely here was a very interesting reaction to the dislocations and
carnage of war.  It came at a time when many of the more articulate
intellectuals appeared to have reached the conclusion that the
hazardousness of life, the helplessness of the individual in the
grip of blind destiny, and the general decline of firm convictions
as to the value of human effort, were reducing mankind to despair.
What happened to the birth rate would seem to give grounds for
wondering whether the population in general was not taking a
cheerier view of the future.  Even among American college graduates
as a group (who for a long time had been reproved for not
reproducing themselves) the trend in the birth rate was upward;
records of the alumni and alumnae of 167 colleges showed that the
class of '41 had produced, by 1951, more children per graduate than
the class of '36 had done when ten years out.

Was the institution of the family taking on a new lease of life in
America?  This notion may seem odd, to one who notes that while the
marriage rate, which had lagged during the Great Depression, rose
during and after the war to a lofty peak in 1946, so did the
divorce rate.  But the large number of divorces at that time was
surely due in part to repentance at leisure from hasty wartime
alliances.  For if it is true, as a cynic has said, that proximity
and opportunity are responsible for most marriages, so a lack of
proximity and a variety of opportunity will break up many
marriages.  And even though during the rest of the nineteen-forties
the divorce rate remained higher than in prewar years--2.6 per
thousand population in 1949, for example, as against the high
figure of 4.3 in 1946 and a mere 2 in 1940, 1.6 in 1930, 1.6 in
1920, 0.9 in 1910, and 0.7 in 1900--this gave evidence, perhaps, of
a declining conviction that marriages should be durable, but not of
any doubt that they were desirable.

The figures seem to bear out one's impression that most American
young people of the nineteen-forties had no such cynical or
disillusioned reservations about marrying and bringing up a family
as had possessed many of the bright young people of earlier
decades.  They did not want to prolong indefinitely the delights of
single adventure.  They did not regard marriage as a bourgeois
expedient for enforcing a conventional monogamy upon free spirits.
Nor did they, despite many warnings of the forthcoming collapse of
civilization, regard with undue dismay adding to the number of
human creatures who must allegedly confront that collapse.  No,
they wanted to marry and have babies, preferably in a ranch-type
house with a dishwashing machine for the joint use of husband and
wife, and with a TV set which would entertain them right beside the
conjugal hearth.  They had been around a lot and had decided that
east, west, home was best.


Another reason why the population of the country grew so
startlingly during the nineteen-forties was that fewer people were
dying.  The nation had never before been so healthy.

Indeed the cumulative change in this respect since 1900 had been
prodigious.  The death rate for a number of diseases which in 1900
had struck dismay into people's hearts had been cut way down: for
influenza and pneumonia, from 181.5 (per 100,000 people) to 38.7 in
1948; for tuberculosis, from 201.9 to 30; for typhoid and
paratyphoid, from 36 to 0.2; for diphtheria, from 43.3 to 0.4; for
scarlet fever, from 11.4 to a small fraction of 0.1--a figure which
in 1948 represented only 68 deaths in the entire country.  Since
immortality is denied to mankind and in the end people usually die
of something, it was natural that startling reductions such as
these should have been accompanied by increases in the death rate
from degenerative diseases, notably heart diseases and cancer,
which took the places formerly occupied by pneumonia and
tuberculosis as the leading causes of death.  But the net change in
an American's expectation of life between 1900 and 1950 could
hardly have been more impressive: it went up from 49 years to 68

What had brought this miracle about?  An interlocking series of
advances in medical knowledge, medical training, medical practice,
sanitation, public health measures, and general popular
understanding of the principles of health.  According to Dr. Alan
Gregg, "The Harvard biological chemist Lawrence J. Henderson once
remarked that somewhere around 1910 the progress of medicine in
America reached the point where it became possible to say that a
random patient with a random disease consulting a physician at
random stood better than a 50-50 chance of benefiting from the
encounter."  Since then the medical profession had not only learned
a vast lot about the treatment of numerous ailments, but had
acquired for use such extraordinarily effective drugs as
sulfanilamide (dating from 1935), penicillin (discovered in 1929,
but not put to clinical use until the early forties), antibiotics
such as aureomycin (even more recent), and the revolutionary ACTH
and cortisone (not clinically used until 1948).  So effective were
public health measures such as mosquito control for the prevention
of malaria that in 1950 the State of Mississippi offered a bonus of
$10 to any doctor who could find a new case of malaria, and not a
single case was reported.  Nor should one overlook the contribution
to general public health made through the discovery of the vitamins
(beginning with vitamin A in 1913) and through popular education
about them; by the mid-century it was a rare family which had not
yet heard that there were special virtues in tomato juice, fruit
juices, green vegetables, and salads, to say nothing of milk.

Let Brigadier General Simmons, dean of the Harvard School of Public
Health, produce a neat statistical comparison of the gain in the
effectiveness of the medical services of the armed forces since the
days when young Dr. Harvey Cushing, meeting at Baltimore a
trainload of typhoid victims of the Spanish-American War, was
horrified by the dirt and squalor that he witnessed:  "In the
Spanish-American War the rate for deaths from disease among our
troops was about 25 per thousand per annum. . . .  In World War I
the rate was reduced to about 16. . . .  In World War II . . . [it]
was only 0.6 per thousand per annum."

The increasingly successful war against infectious diseases had
brought about during the nineteen-forties a great increase in the
number of old people, a new interest in pension plans, and--since
the tendency of business concerns to lay off employees at sixty-
five or even sixty was still gaining headway--an acute question
whether pensions beyond that age would not constitute a burden too
heavy for most companies to carry.  Meanwhile the jump in the birth
rate was beginning by 1950 to swamp an already overcrowded
elementary school system, and threatened to do so increasingly for
many years to come.  So it was that as the nineteen-fifties began,
Americans in their wage-earning years were faced with the prospect
of having to support, in one way or another, more human creatures
senior and junior to themselves than ever before in recent history.


Not only were Americans, by and large, much healthier; they were
also physically bigger.  This was not readily demonstrable by
reference to the medical records of the two world wars, for the
average height of registrants for the draft in the first two years
of Selective Service for World War II was exactly the same as that
of recruits examined during World War I--5 feet, 7 1/2 inches
though the men of 1941-1942 averaged 8 pounds heavier than those of
1917-1918--150 pounds as against 142 pounds.  (Registrants classed
by local boards as available for general military service in 1941-
1942 averaged 5 feet 8 1/10 inches in height and were heavier
still--152 pounds.)  Such comparisons were bound to be somewhat
misleading, however, since they involved men selected under
differing conditions and representing differing proportions of men
of various ancestries.  Comparisons made for reasonably comparable
groups among well-to-do old-stock Americans indicated a lively
increase in size.  For instance, Harvard students of the eighteen-
seventies and early eighties averaged 5 feet 8.12 inches tall and
138.40 pounds in weight; Harvard students of the nineteen-twenties
and early thirties averaged over two inches taller--5 feet 10.14
inches--and over ten pounds heavier--149.05 pounds.  And there was
almost precisely the same degree of difference between the
measurements of Vassar students of the class of 1885 and of the
class of 1940: the younger girls averaged, 5 feet 5.1 inches tall,
as against 5 feet 3.1 inches for the earlier group; weighed 126 1/8
pounds, as against 115.7 pounds for the earlier ones; and
incidentally had slightly larger waists 25 1/4 inches as against 24
7/8 inches.  (The Vassar female waist, incidentally, reached its
minimum in girth in 1905--23 7/16 inches--and its maximum in the
belt-around-the-hips era of 1927--26 3/16 inches.)

Whatever may be the difficulty of securing precisely comparable
statistics, it was certainly a common observation throughout the
half century that sons tended to be taller than their fathers,
daughters than their mothers, and that young girls especially, at
the mid-century, were requiring shoe sizes that struck their
mothers with dismay.  During the nineteen-forties a graduate of an
eastern preparatory school for girls, returning as a teacher,
remarked with surprise to the school doctor on the dimensions of
her young charges.  "But they're so BIG!" she said.  "Big?" said
he.  "That's the tomato-juice generation you're seeing.  Wait till
you see the grapefruit-juice generation!"

By the mid-century the population statistics showed an impressive
drift westward--especially to California and the Pacific Northwest.
They showed also a steadily continuing movement from the farms and
the smaller towns toward the centers of population.  However much
devotees of the character-building value of homespun living might
lament the urbanization of American life, there seemed to be no
stopping it.  Behind it was economic logic, for farm production was
requiring fewer and fewer workers, and the service occupations
flourished best in big communities; behind it, too, was the
irresistible centripetal pull of opportunity--or fancied
opportunity--for the talented.  Did the automobile, the telephone,
the popular magazines, the radio, and TV enhance the life of
farmers and villagers by enabling them to keep in touch with the
great world?  Yes, but they also brought to the girl or boy in
Hagerstown or Paducah or Grand Forks an almost irresistible
invitation to taste the delights of Los Angeles or Chicago or New
York, where the doings of people were news, where the lights were
bright, and where glamour had its recognized headquarters.

Finally, the melting pot had long been successfully at work.  Since
immigration had been sharply limited in the early nineteen-
twenties, the number of foreign-born Americans had been steadily
shrinking as one by one men and women who had come across the seas
by steerage during the flood tide from Europe came to the end of
their lives.  Less and less often did one hear foreign languages
spoken in American cities and industrial towns.  The sons and
daughters of the immigrants had resolutely acquired American
customs and manners; the third generation--who possessed, as one
New Yorker of Italian parentage put it, the "great advantage of
having English-speaking parents"--were as American as Mayflower
descendants, though to the latter their names might still seem
foreign.  During the nineteen-twenties, sports writers had been
wont to comment with amusement on the European names that were
showing up more and more frequently in the lineups of winning
football teams; but by 1950 the cosmopolitan origins of the
American people had become so thoroughly taken for granted that one
would have been uttering a clich to comment on, for instance, the
interesting combination of names possessed by the men who played in
the World Series of that most American of sports, baseball.  Here
is the batting order of the winning nine of 1950 in the first game
of the Series: Woodling, Rizzuto, Berra, DiMaggio, Mize, Brown,
Bauer, Colman, Raschi--Yankees all!



Chapter 15

The All-American Standard

As we enter upon the second half of the twentieth century and pause
to take stock of our situation, let us look to see, first, what has
happened to the gap that once yawned so widely between rich and

In money terms--income terms--the change has not been overwhelming.
There are still islands of deep poverty in the United States, and
there are families and individuals by the millions who through
illness, age, adversity, or marginal ability, live on the ragged
edge of want.  And the average represents nothing like affluence.
Yet even so, what has happened over half a century, but most
impressively since 1940, has been striking enough to be described
by the definitely unhysterical director of research of the National
Bureau of Economic Research as "one of the great social revolutions
of history."

Nobody should produce figures on the current distribution of income
among the American people without warning the reader that they are
approximations merely.  Different groups of conscientious economic
investigators, working with different sets of data--such as income-
tax returns, census returns, and various special surveys--produce
very different calculations.  Nevertheless our statistics today are
far more accurate than any that could have been produced at the
turn of the century, when there was no income tax, when Andrew
Carnegie's income was something like twenty thousand times greater
than that of the average American workman, when the slums were full
of miserable immigrants living in stench and filth, and when many a
thoughtful citizen shared with Edwin Markham a vague apprehension
of the day when the toiler--"the emptiness of ages in his face"--
would rise to judge the world.

The figures I shall cite here are based upon the data reported by a
subcommittee of the Joint Committee on the Economic Report of the
Congress of the United States, which dealt with the distribution of
income in 1948; they are roughly parallel to the figures included
in the January, 1951, report to the President by his Council of
Economic Advisers, and probably come somewhere near the truth.*

* The Council of Economic Advisers, figuring in terms of "spending
units"--which may be families or individuals--say that in 1949 the
lowest fifth of these spending units were scrimping on incomes of
under $1,280 a year; the next fifth, on incomes of between $1,280
and $2,289; the middle fifth received incomes of between $2,290 and
$3,199; the next-to-the-top fifth, incomes of between $3,200 and
$4,499; the top fifth, $4,500 and over.

If you compare the Council's figures with those of the Joint
Committee's subcommittee, remember that the Council's calculations
are loaded downward by the fact that in the lower brackets there is
a heavy concentration of single people (as distinguished from
families).  But you should then bear in mind another fact: that
what is a deplorable income for a family of five may be a
manageable one for a single person.  If you will also meditate upon
the infinite diversity of human circumstance, and the difficulty of
drawing a clear line, even among your own acquaintances, between
dependents and separate spending units, you will begin to realize
why such figures give us only a very smudgy outline of the actual
state of affairs.

According to them, in recent years some 10.6 per cent of all the
families in the United States have been living on individual or
family incomes of less than $1,000 a year.  That is about one
family in ten, trying to make out on a dismally inadequate money

About 14.5 per cent have been living on incomes of between $1,000
and $2,000--approximately one family in seven.

About 20.6 per cent--say one family in five--have had incomes of
between $2,000 and $3,000.

A very much larger number, about 33.6 per cent, or something like a
third of all our families, have had between $3,000 and $5,000.

Only about 17.9 per cent--say one family out of seven--have had
between $5,000 and $10,000.

And a very small group--about 2.9 per cent, or only one family in
thirty-four--have been in the over-$10,000 bracket.

There are also a great many individuals not living in any family;
in 1948 there were estimated to be some eight million of them in
all.  Their incomes follow more or less the same pattern, except
that they are more numerously represented in the lowest brackets.

Now let us look for a moment at the lowest of these groups: the
10.6 per cent of the families (or thereabouts), and also the
individuals, who are living on annual incomes of less than $1,000.
Who are they?

They include, to begin with, some farmers and private businessmen
who have simply had a bad year--have had to sell crops or goods at
a loss, let us say.  But some or most of these have savings enough
to tide them along.  (No grinding poverty there, in most cases.)
They include a great number of rural poor: people working poor and
worn-out land, tenants, sharecroppers.  (A good many of these--we
don't know how many--may be able to raise enough food for their own
use so as to manage somehow on even a grimly small money income.)
Another group, not quite so large, consists of old people, who in
some cases have families depending on their meager savings or
earnings, and in other cases are fending for themselves alone, with
or without old-age relief.  (One out of every four families
dependent on elderly people and two out of three single elderly men
and women had to get along in 1948 on less than $20 a week, said
Robert L. Heilbroner in a study of American poverty in Harper's
Magazine for June, 1950.)  Others of the lowest group are victims
of broken families--women, for example, who have been divorced or
deserted and are unable to support themselves properly.  Some are
disabled people--the crippled, the mentally ill.  (Many of these,
to quote Mr. Heilbroner, "will be wards of the community as long as
they live.")  Some, probably, are chronic ne'er-do-wells, useless
derelicts of society, seldom hired and then not for long.  One
should add that among the rural poor and the stranded old people
and suchlike a disproportionate number are Negroes.

Step up into the next lowest rank of poverty, the group with family
or individual incomes of between $1,000 and $2,000 a year, and we
find more businessmen who have been encountering tough sledding,
more marginal farmers, more old people, more divorced or deserted
wives, more disabled people, more marginal laborers who have been
laid off again and again, and also some members of another group:
those whose wages, even in this time of plenty, have been so low as
to keep them in a constant struggle with poverty.  Again, among
most of these groups there is an unduly large representation of

Perhaps the most striking thing about the make-up of these two
groups, comprising the lowest third of the nation, income-wise, is
that--with the partial exception of the Negroes whose special
situation I have discussed in Chapter 12--these are not "the
masses."  They are not a proletariat.  They are a great number of
people, very widely scattered, who are in very different sorts of
trouble, economic and otherwise.

They may range all the way from the elderly man who lives so neatly
and proudly that you would never guess, to see him, that he
sometimes goes hungry, and the upstanding farmer whose crops for
this year have been ruined by storm, to the bum who panhandles to
buy himself another drink, and the moron who hasn't the wit to hold
a job.  Our facilities for helping these misfits and victims of
adversity are far from ideal, heaven knows, but they are far more
adequate than they were at the beginning of the century.  And there
are no such huge pools of mass misery as existed then.

During the Depression Stuart Chase once wrote something to the
effect that in a fluid society there would always be people
climbing up the economic staircase and others tumbling down it, but
that if it was a decent society there should be some way of
preventing the latter from falling all the way to the cellar.  What
with the helpfulness of relatives and neighbors, and the efforts of
private charitable organizations, and our city and county relief
organizations, we succeed nowadays in catching most of them at the
ground floor.

It is when we examine the next two or three brackets--those
representing incomes of $2,000 to $10,000--that we encounter the
central fact of our present prosperity.  This is that millions upon
millions of families have risen out of the under-$2,000 class and
the $2,000-$3,000 class and have climbed a bracket or two.  These
fortunate families have been getting their money from a wide
variety of occupations; among them have been farmers, office
workers, professional people, semiskilled and skilled industrial
workers; but it is the industrial workers who as a group have done
best--people such as a steelworker's family who used to live on
$2,500 and now are getting $4,500, or the highly skilled machine-
tool operator's family who used to have $3,000 and now can spend an
annual $5,500 or more.  Consider a single salient statistic: that
the AVERAGE earnings of workers in all manufacturing industries in
America in 1950 were $59.33 a week.  During the past decade these
earnings, as they climbed, have been pursued by rising prices, but
on the average they have kept well ahead.

What do these figures mean in human terms?  That millions of
families in our industrial cities and towns, and on the farms, have
been lifted from poverty or near-poverty to a status where they can
enjoy what has been traditionally considered a middle-class way of
life: decent clothes for all, an opportunity to buy a better
automobile, install an electric refrigerator, provide the housewife
with a decently attractive kitchen, go to the dentist, pay
insurance premiums, and so on indefinitely.

Whether these industrial workers, farmers, and other assorted
people have been the ones most deserving of such a lift in fortune
is uncertain.  One might have wished that intellectual workers--
teachers, for example--had been among the principal beneficiaries
of the new order.  (They certainly have not.)  Nevertheless the
effect upon the rest of us of the dwindling away of what used to be
the lower class has been impressive.  For as the families which
have moved up a bracket or two have been able to buy more goods,
their expanded purchasing power has given an immense lift to
business in general.  America has become more prosperous by making
the poor less poor.

At the top of the scale there has likewise been a striking change.
The enormous lead of the well-to-do in the economic race has been
considerably reduced.

Let us see what has happened to the top five per cent of the
population, income-wise--roughly speaking, the people who have been
living on incomes of $8,000 or over.

According to the elaborate calculations of Simon Kuznets of the
National Bureau of Economic Research, during the period between the
two wars the people in this comparatively well-off group were
taking a very big slice of the total national income--no less than
30 per cent of it, before taxes; a little over 28 per cent after
taxes.  But by 1945 their slice had been narrowed from 30 to 19 1/2
per cent before taxes, and from 28 to 17 per cent after taxes.
Since 1945 this upper group has been doing a little better,
relatively, but not much.

As for the top one per cent, the really well-to-do and the rich,
whom we might classify very roughly indeed as the $16,000-and-over
group, their share of the total national income, after taxes, had
come down by 1945 from 13 per cent to 7 per cent.

A question at once arises.  Have we, in reducing the slice received
by these upper groups, and increasing the slice received by lower
groups, simply been robbing Peter to pay Paul?  (It often looks
that way to Peter, especially around March 15.)

The answer is that Peter has been getting a smaller relative slice
of a much larger pie.  Even after one has made allowance for rising
prices, one finds that the total disposable income of ALL Americans
went up 74 per cent between 1929 and 1950.  That is a very
considerable enlargement.  So that although the well-to-do and the
rich have suffered RELATIVELY, it is much less certain that they
have suffered ABSOLUTELY.

And one might add at this point an interesting footnote.  The big
hike in wages that we were speaking of a moment ago has not, by and
large, reduced profits.  In fact when we compare the 1929 totals
with the 1950 ones, we discover that total profits rose in the
interval a little more sharply than total wages and salaries!  To
quote the apt slogan of the New England Council:  "The rising tide
lifts all the boats."  (And why did the rich not gain heavily
thereby?  Because the profits were in part retained for business
expansion; because dividends were more widely distributed; and
also, of course, because taxes were much higher.)

Nevertheless the shift in the position of the rich has been very
striking.  It has been cynically said that there are no
legitimately rich men any more; there are only tax-dodgers and
people who live very well on expense accounts.  That is by no means
true.  One can hold on to most of the profit from some financial
deals by adroit and quite legal use of the capital-gains provisions
of the federal income-tax law.  Oil men have made out very
affluently indeed with the advantage of the 27 1/2 per cent
allowance for depletion in the same law.  And there are still some
tax-exempt securities which are very useful to those whose capital
is large enough to provide them with a goodly income even at low
interest rates.  But by and large, the big incomes are hacked to
pieces by the Collector of Internal Revenue.

To offer a somewhat hypothetical example, the highest compensation
listed in the public records of the Securities and Exchange
Commission for the year 1950 was $626,300 earned by Charles E.
Wilson, president of General Motors.  Part of this was in stock and
cash which he was to receive over the next five years; but let us
suppose that it had all been handed to him in cash in 1950 and that
he had had to pay a federal income tax on the whole $626,300, and
on nothing else--without any exceptional deductions.  The
government would have taken some $462,000 of it, leaving him only
some $164,300.  That is not exactly penury, but it is not the sort
of income on which one puts aside many millions.

As for those who possess large inherited fortunes, or self-acquired
fortunes piled up in a day when taxes were lower, and have big
establishments to keep up, and have acquired in the course of time
all manner of moral obligations to less well-heeled relatives and
friends--and who know furthermore that it is upon the likes of them
that colleges and schools and hospitals and charities depend for
sizable gifts (since the tax-dodgers, the gamblers, and even many
of the worthiest of the newly prosperous recognize no such duty and
opportunity)--their plight, as taxes and prices both rise, may
often be summed up in the words of one of them who said, "There is
no such thing as being rich; there is only being poor on a much
larger scale."

Hence the affection of the rich for state and municipal bonds,
which bring in a small but tax-exempt return; for the capital-gains
tax, which is much lower than the regular income tax; for extra
remuneration in company stock, which may appreciate in value; and
for various devices by which remuneration is spread over a long
term of years.  (You make a thirty-year contract, let us say, which
includes payment for your full services for ten years and for
"advisory" services after that, so that you will still be keeping
the wolf a long distance from the door long after your active
services have ended.)

Hence, too, the disposition of many people whose winnings are
stronger than their consciences to live as far as possible on a
cash basis in the hope of eluding the eye of the tax collector--
which, if their prosperity is new, they can do for a time.  (The
known rich, the inheritors of wealth and the executives of big
corporations, can scarcely do it, for the eagle eye of the tax
collector is upon them.)  If I were an investigator for the Bureau
of Internal Revenue, I should want to follow up people who pay for
fur coats or diamonds by peeling bills off a roll, and I do not
wonder that these investigators watch the papers for news of big
jewel robberies.

Hence, also, the briberies and implicit briberies of tax collectors
which have been such a stench in our nostrils in recent years.

Hence, furthermore, the growing practice, not only among members of
the wealthiest class but among many others who consider themselves
only modestly well off, of living partly on the company.

You wouldn't need to get any salary at all if everything you might
need or want--housing, transportation, entertainment, for yourself
and your family and guests unlimited--were provided for you without
charge.  Some approximation of this enviable state is apparent in
the lives of many company executives.  They get about by company
car, when needed, or company-bought railroad accommodations, or
company plane; and if the plane takes them and their guests to the
Kentucky Derby or a Rose Bowl game, why that's all right too:
that's "making contacts."  They hold prolonged business conferences
at delightful resorts, with golf or bathing for relaxation, and of
course the company pays for everything.  They may enjoy holidays at
a company camp, or play golf at a company country club.  If they
want to throw a cocktail party at a fashionable hotel for a couple
of hundred people, the company foots the bill for that, too: that,
too, is making contacts.  The proprietor of a big New York hotel
described to me during World War II the lavish parties--shocking,
for wartime, in their extravagance--that were thrown in his ample
rooms; and I asked him whether they were paid for by individuals or
by companies.  "Oh, all of them by companies," he said.  In the
May, 1950, issue of Flair, John O'Hara, describing what he aptly
called "the new expense-account society," spoke of the difficulty
that ordinary visitors to New York had in getting tickets to South
Pacific except at preposterous prices, and added, "There are
customers at $100 a pair, and the customers are the big
corporations. . . .  The big corporation has first claim on
everything, from restaurant tables to Pullman reservations home."

Even somewhat smaller fry can do very well on expense accounts.  In
the restaurant life of midtown New York, where there is a heavy
trade in the prestige that goes with eating or drinking in the
immediate neighborhood of movie actresses, advertising big-shots,
senators, gossip columnists, successful authors, publishers, ex-
champion athletes, and television comedians, there is a wide circle
of men and women, some of them on modest salaries, who lunch day
after day, and dine often, on expense accounts.  Sometimes they are
dazzling out-of-town clients; sometimes they are just taking one
another to lunch.  In either case the company pays.  I asked the
proprietors of two of the most exalted of these restaurants what
proportion of their guests, from day to day, were eating and
drinking on expense accounts.  One said nearly half at lunch, and
also for dinner in his most favored room; fewer for dinner
elsewhere in the establishment.  The other said three-quarters of
the guests at lunch, fewer at dinner, very few in the late evening;
but he guessed that at a night spot with entertainment the ratio
would again be high.  It is quite possible that a good many clients
and prospects are really snared by such entertaining; but in any
case the theory that this is how clients and prospects are snared
makes for delightfully lavish living on the part of both hosts and
guests for at least part of the twenty-four hours, at no cost to

The wife of the Cleveland machine-tool executive or Pittsburgh
steel executive who lives so grandly away from home may sometimes
find there is something a little lopsided in their family scale of
living.  "The company has spoiled Jim terribly," said a
businessman's wife quoted by William H. Whyte, Jr., in Life
magazine for January 7, 1952.

Even when he was only earning $7,500 a year he used to be sent to
Washington all the time.  He'd go down in a Pullman drawing room
and, as J. R. Robinson of the General Company, take a two-room
suite.  Then he used to be asked by some of the company officers to
a hunting and fishing lodge that the company kept in the north
woods.  When he went to New York, he'd entertain at Twenty-One, the
Barberry Room, and the Chambord.  Me, meanwhile I'd be eating a 30-
cent hamburger and, when we went away together on vacation, we
would have to go in our beat-up old car or borrow my sister's
husband's.  This taste of high life gives some of these characters
delusions of grandeur.

There are many highly placed businessmen, of course, who will not
take advantage of such opportunities.  An executive with an income
of well over two hundred thousand a year (before taxes) told me
that when he was in Florida he was constantly amazed by the number
of people who were obviously paying for things on a scale that he
couldn't afford.  As for himself, his taxes and obligations were
such that it was all he could do to keep out of the red for the
year.  Some of the men and women he had been seeing in Florida may
have enjoyed living on a minimum scale for fifty weeks and on a
grand scale for two; others may have been tax-dodgers; but it is
more than likely that a good many of them had discovered, and were
exploiting, the current substitute for real wealth: a company that
is willing to foot the bills.


Much more impressive, however, than the narrowing of the gap in
INCOME between rich and poor has been the narrowing of the gap
between them in their WAYS OF LIVING.

For instance, consider the matter of personal appearance,
remembering that in 1900 the frock-coated, silk-hatted banker and
his Paris-gowned wife were recognizable at a distance, if they
ventured among the common herd, as beings apart.  Forty or fifty
years ago the countryman in a metropolis was visibly a "hayseed";
the purchaser of inexpensive men's clothing was betrayed by his
tight-waisted jackets and bulbous-toed shoes.  Today the difference
in appearance between a steelworker (or a clerk) and a high
executive is hardly noticeable to the casual eye.  Not long ago, at
a tennis tournament, I sat two or three rows behind the chairman of
the board of one of the most famous banking houses in the world,
and looking at his veteran Panama hat and his ordinary-looking sack
suit I wondered how many of the people about him would have guessed
that he was anybody of great financial consequence.  And there is
many a man with an income in six figures (before taxes) and with
thousands of employees who, though his suit may be a little better
cut than those of most of the men about him on a New York subway
train or a transcontinental plane, attracts no curious notice at
all; he looks just about like everybody else.

As for women, the difference in appearance between the one who
spends $5,000 a year on clothes and the one who spends only a small
fraction of that is by no means as conspicuous as the difference
between the woman who has good taste and the woman who lacks it.
The fact that the wealthy woman has thirty dresses to the poor
woman's three is not visible on the street, and the fact that her
dresses are made of better materials and are better cut is
observable only by the expert eye at close range.  Fashion used to
be decreed by Paris, imported by the most expensive dress shops,
then modified by the more expensive American dress manufacturers,
and finally--after an interval of six months to a year--modified
still further, almost beyond recognition, by the manufacturers of
cheap dresses.  The process is now quicker and the differences much
less sharp.  Unless the poor woman is exceptionally poor--or
indifferent--she like the rich woman has a permanent--probably in
her case a home one.  And women of every income group wear nylon

Consider for a moment a contrast with regard to those stockings.
At the turn of the century silk stockings were a mark of luxury.
In the year 1900, in a nation of 75 million people, only 155,000
pairs were manufactured.  In the year 1949 the American sales of
nylon stockings--considered by most people at least as fine as
silk, if not finer--were not 155,000, but 543 MILLION pairs: enough
to provide every female in the country, from the age of fourteen
up, with between nine and ten pairs apiece.  How is that for an
example of the dynamic logic of mass production producing luxury
for all?

A generation ago the great mail-order houses produced different
clothes for the Western farmer's wife and for the city woman in the
East; today there is no such distinction, and a friend of mine
whose train stopped recently at a small Oklahoma town remarked that
the girls on the railroad platform there were virtually
indistinguishable in appearance from girls on Madison Avenue or
Michigan Boulevard.  It could almost be said nowadays that the only
easily visible mark of wealth which a woman can put on is a mink

At this point an explanatory word is in order.  The trend that I am
describing is not a trend toward uniformity.  Among both men and
women there is a great diversity in attire.  The point I am making
is that the diversity is more a matter of preference, or of custom
among the members of a local or vocational group, than of economic

Does this trend toward the breakdown of class lines in clothes seem
unimportant?  I do not think it is.  The consciousness that one is
set apart by one's appearance is a great divider; the consciousness
that one is not set apart is a great remover of barriers.

Let us proceed from clothes to the equipment of daily living.  As
Professor H. Gordon Hayes pointed out in Harper's in 1947, the rich
man smokes the same sort of cigarettes as the poor man, shaves with
the same sort of razor, uses the same sort of telephone, vacuum
cleaner, radio, and TV set, has the same sort of lighting and
heating equipment in his house, and so on indefinitely.  The
differences between his automobile and the poor man's are minor.
Essentially they have similar engines, similar fittings.  In the
early years of the century there was a hierarchy of automobiles.
At the top were such imported cars as the Rolls-Royce, Mercedes-
Benz, and Isotta Fraschini; to possess one of these was a mark of
lively wealth.  There was also an American aristocracy of the
Pierce Arrow, Peerless, and Packard.  Then came group after group,
in descending scale, till you reached the homely Model-T Ford.
Today, except for a few survivals such as the obstinately
rectangular Rolls-Royces of the old school, and a few oddities such
as the new British sports cars, which to the American eye would
seem to have been constructed for exceptionally dashing midgets,
there is a comparative absence of class groupings.  And, although
the owner of a big, brand-new car probably has a large income, he
may merely be someone who adjusts a slender income to cover the
costs of the machines that entrance him.

In the matter of running water and plumbing, the breakdown of
distinctions has proceeded much more slowly but nevertheless
steadily.  There have been, it is true, some injuries to Southern
mountaineers who at their first glimpse of a water closet decided
that one was supposed to stand in it to wash one's feet; but today
only the older and poorer tenements and dwellings in American
cities and towns lack running water, bathtubs or showers, and water
closets, and these conveniences are fast being installed in
farmhouses the country over.

Meanwhile the servant class has almost vanished, especially in the
North and West, although servants' wages have a purchasing power
today from five to ten times or more greater than in 1900 (and, if
the servants live in, offer an exceptional opportunity for saving).
Their virtual disappearance, which has imposed upon all but a tiny
fraction of American families the chores of cooking and cleaning
and washing, not only marks the absorption of the immigrant
proletariat of yore into general American society, in which
domestic service has been regarded as humiliating, but also removes
another contrast between the ways of living of the prosperous and
the poor.  Today the daughter of comfortably circumstanced parents
had better know how to cook well--and their son, too, may find the
knowledge pretty nearly essential.

What has been responsible for this convergence between the ways of
living of rich and poor?  The causes are numerous and complex, as
we have seen in previous chapters; some are economic and political,
like the income tax and trade-union pressures, or political and
social, like the development of public parks and playgrounds.  The
dynamic logic of mass production is a leading cause, of course; it
accounts for the virtual disappearance from the market of one sort
or another of luxury goods, whose makers and vendors have found
themselves in hopeless competition with the makers and vendors of
mass-produced goods of adequate quality.  For example, the tailor,
bootmaker, and shirtmaker wage an uphill fight for existence.  I
have a perverse liking for wearing pumps with evening clothes.  Of
recent years they have been almost unobtainable, and a couple of
years ago I had to pay through the nose for a new pair.  When next
I want one, which would be in about 1960, I shall not be surprised
to find they are no longer made--that there has been no market for
them that would justify making them.  Mass production rules us; and
mass production permits diversity only within limits.

Another important factor in the change has been the immense spread
of education.  In 1900 less than one American boy or girl out of
ten of high school age was actually at high school; now over four
out of five are.  This means not only book learning for them; it
means also a considerable social education in the ways of living of
a variety of families of the community.  Also the number of
students at American universities, colleges, and teacher-training
institutions has increased eightfold.

Still another factor in the change was World War II, which sent
several million young men on foreign travels, gave the teachable
ones remarkable chances to learn about other modes of life, and
provided some of them--such as flying officers--with opportunities
to live on a scale they had never before known.  I remember during
the war going to a shabby little photographer's shop to get a
passport photograph taken, and hearing from the proprietor that his
son was a pilot flying planes across the South Atlantic.  And I
wondered whether, two or three years earlier, that boy would have
dreamed that he would ever have a chance to see Brazil and Liberia
while enjoying the favored status of an army officer.

Nor should we overlook the immense influence of the mass-
circulation magazines, the movies, the radio, and television in
imposing upon Americans of all income levels the same patterns of
emulation: in other words, making them want to be the same sort of

Take, for example, the women's magazines and the magazines of what
the publishing trade calls the "shelter field," meaning those
devoted to houses and gardens.  For decades they have been
educating millions of women, month after month, in the techniques
of better living--telling them how to tend the baby, how to care
for children, how to entertain guests pleasantly, how to prepare
well-balanced meals, how to decorate a house prettily, how to make
the lawn and garden attractive, and so on.  Some of their advice
may sometimes have seemed amusing to the experienced; some of the
information given has been perverted to the flattery of
advertisers, or has been superficial or complacent; but the net
educational effect upon people whose horizons have been hemmed in
by circumstances has been remarkable.  And the mass-audience
magazines, with their national circulations, have also done much to
break down parochialism; to give the housewife in a dingy city
apartment, or the boy and girl growing upon a remote farm or in a
factory town, glimpses of worlds outside their routine rounds.  It
would be interesting to know how many people there are in the
United States today who got from popular magazines their first
acquaintance with, let us say, vitamins.

The advertisements in these magazines and elsewhere, furthermore,
have constantly been providing incentives to work hard in order to
be able to buy more goods.  There are some workers, in America as
elsewhere, who, when they get a wage increase, respond by taking
things easier on the ground that they can now afford to relax.  But
to the extent that this is not the general rule--to the extent that
workers keep on driving in the hope of being able to afford even
more--we can point to mass advertising as one of the great
incentive makers.

This form of journalistic mass education has been a purely
twentieth-century phenomenon.  At the turn of the century there was
no American magazine with a circulation of anywhere near a million;
by 1947 there were no less than 38 with circulations of over a
million apiece; and the Reader's Digest alone, with its plethora of
cheerful suggestions on how to live better, had reached by 1951 a
total circulation in the United States of over 9 1/2 millions.

Likewise the movies, which date only from about 1905, and the
radio, which as an instrument for popular broadcasting dates only
from 1920, have been bringing together in their audiences men,
women, and children of all income levels to enjoy the same
emotional excitements, and have shaped their films and programs to
a common denominator of American experience.

In the movies, popular stars like Cary Grant, Humphrey Bogart,
Gregory Peck, Montgomery Clift, and Farley Granger may play the
parts of men who are supposed to be rich and stylish, or men who
are at the end of their economic rope; but whatever role any one of
them assumes, his popularity depends upon his representing a kind
of charm that any young American male can appreciate and at least
approach; in other words, upon his conforming to what old-fashioned
people would call middle-class standards of speech and behavior.  I
prefer to call them classless, or all-American, for that,
essentially, is what they are.  The Hollywood actresses are subject
to the same compulsion; they may be cast in queenly or in humble
roles, but their publicity advisers know that if the public is to
adore them they must be represented in the film magazines as ready
to make a salad, mop the kitchen floor, and hang out the wash--
after which they may be shown enjoying some lucky leisure in well-
designed bathing suits beside sumptuous swimming pools.

On the radio Jack Benny, for all his big income, plays the part of
a Jack Benny who lives in a modest house, owns a wheezy old car,
and has for his sole servant a jack-of-all-trades helper with whom
he is on the breeziest of terms.  And Ozzie and Harriet Nelson find
themselves in a series of comic situations which one might label as
middle class, but which are common in their essence to the
experience of millions of young parents and children of various
income levels.

And what is the result?  Both the rich man's fourteen-year-old son,
who dismays his conservative parents by trying to talk like
Humphrey Bogart, and the truck driver's son, who cherishes the same
hope, will grow up to be more like their idols--and thus, more like
one another--than they would have otherwise.  And something else
happens.  Half a century ago a coal miner who found himself at a
fashionable restaurant would not have had the faintest notion of
how to behave; nowadays he has only to ask himself, "How would
Gregory Peck do it?"  In short, the social distance between the
extremes of American society is shrinking.

Whenever I think of this change, I think of something I saw not
long ago in New York City.  A street was being torn up for repairs,
and while the workmen were standing waiting for the arrival of new
equipment, one of them, who had in his hands an iron rod presumably
used for prying off manhole covers, was enjoying a little
relaxation.  I looked twice to see what he was doing with that rod.
He was practicing a graceful golf stroke.


To say that the reduced resources of the rich and the trend toward
an all-American standard of living have done away with Society
would be an exaggeration.  Social emulation is a perpetual force in
human affairs; in any community, social lines tend to be drawn and
snobberies to flourish; in most towns and smaller cities there is
an easily discernible social pattern with a local society on top,
though its composition may be forever shifting.  But as one
proceeds from the smaller communities to the larger ones, the
pattern becomes today much more complex, multiple, and elusive.  It
is complicated by the variety of professional and business
groupings which are to be found in a big community; and by the
special hierarchies within large businesses which impose upon
social relationships a set of distinctions which have little to do
with the old ones based upon family, fortified by wealth (these
business hierarchies I shall refer to again in the next chapter).
It is affected, too, by the prestige which attends not only
successful business executives regardless of their social status
but also, much more dazzingly, entertainers and other newsworthy or
photogenic characters.

In the constantly growing suburbs it is confused by the rapid shift
in personnel, as well as by the division of people's attention
between the concerns and entertainments of the suburb and those of
the city of which it is a satellite.  The Sheridans, who gave such
delightful parties last year, move to Detroit; the Stanleys are
lovely people but go to town for their real social life; the young
Edwardses are mighty attractive, but just moved out to the suburb
last year when their eldest child was arriving at school age, and
may move elsewhere if their income rises, and will probably go back
to town anyhow when the youngest child is grown up.  The pattern is
kaleidoscopic, to the confusion of organized snobbery.

Society--the old Society, with a large capital S--used to center in
New York.  But it is in New York that the present-day pattern
reaches its utmost complexity.  Here the well-to-do are in heavy
concentration, and few of them know more than a tiny fraction of
the others.  They form vaguely defined, overlapping groups.  There
are, for example, the bankers, brokers, and downtown lawyers and
their families.  There are the publishers, writers, advertising
people, radio and television people--a series of groups which in
turn overlap a series of Broadway ones.  There are substantial
business groups operating in wholesale and retail trade.  There are
the people associated with churches of various denominations--the
local Catholics forming an exceptionally distinct set, though it
overlaps those whose primary concern is with politics.  There are
ties of acquaintance between men and women connected with the
backing of different sorts of charitable and public-service
organizations.  There are further ties between New Yorkers who have
come from one part of the country or another, or whose summer and
week-end life brings them together in local communities on Long
Island or in Connecticut or New Jersey or elsewhere.  Each of the
arts has its devotees and supporters, linked loosely by mutual
acquaintance.  In some of these areas of interest Jews intermingle
with non-Jews; in others, Jews are quite separate.  At any dinner
party or cocktail party one is likely to meet some people of one's
own group along with others, probably previously unknown to one,
whose association with the host and hostess has been based upon
some other ties of common interest.

To say that in this variegated scene Society is no more would be by
no means correct.  There are many families of noteworthy lineage
and substantial means to whom such a statement would seem
preposterous.  But that this Society still exists is pretty nearly
their secret.

Its assemblies and coming-out parties attract limited public
attention.  It still offers, for a select number of debutantes, a
brief and furious round of social activity, and tries to provide
for them the most carefully selected male companionship--the
selective process being somewhat vitiated by the necessity of
importing for the larger festivities considerable numbers of
students, not so scrupulously chosen, from such nests of the young
elect as New Haven and Princeton.  But as the young men and women
grow older, their other interests make such claim upon their time
and attention that the status of most of them as members of Society
becomes somewhat blurred.  And though the more loyal of the elders
of Society might turn up their noses at that less ancient emulative
group known as Caf Society, and at the glare of publicity which
surrounds Tallulah Bankhead or Joe DiMaggio or Van Johnson, the
fact remains that many of their progeny would rank membership in
the Knickerbocker or the Links or the Brook or the Colony Club
below membership in the group favorably known to the attendants at
the Stork Club or Twenty-One.  And the society columns tend to
concern themselves largely with the caf crowd.  One of the things
that gave glitter to Society in the old days was that its
festivities were brilliantly costly; nowadays a big corporation can
throw a party at the Waldorf which few private families could
afford.  In short, to the extent that Society exists, it is
virtually unknown to the general public, and unnoticed.

The advertisers in their turn have taken heed of the change.  "It
is a sign of our times," Agnes Rogers wrote in 1949, "that glamour
is now generally advertised as attainable by all American women,
and as very easy to come by--you buy it in a jar.  Few manufacturers
feel today that to sell their products they must make women identify
themselves with the wealthy or socially elect.  The snob appeal has
become less potent than the appeal of glamour arrived at through
purchase of the right products and through careful schooling in
their appropriate use.  Anybody can have it, whatever her
background, for a little money and some effort.  Glamour has been

As for the great houses of an earlier day, those mighty castles in
which the rich and fashionable lived on a princely scale, they too
have mostly succumbed to the estate tax and the supertax.  Some are
still occupied, especially in Newport, where the old guard of the
socially elect stubbornly try to conduct themselves as if nothing
much had happened.  But in New York the most famous of the mansions
that once made Fifth Avenue the avenue of millionaires--such as
those of William H., William K., and Cornelius Vanderbilt--have
been razed to make way for business buildings or apartment houses.
In Newport itself, Ochre Court is a Catholic college and The
Breakers is leased year by year for use as a museum, where one may
see if one wishes what it was like to be a Vanderbilt in the grand
days.  The Frederick W. Vanderbilt house at Hyde Park is likewise a
museum.  At Lenox, the Henry White house is an inn.  Outside
Philadelphia, Whitemarsh Hall, the 130-room E. T. Stotesbury house,
is a research center for Pennsalt--the Pennsylvania Salt
Manufacturing Company.  At Palm Beach, the Flagler mansion is part
of the Whitehall Hotel.  Others have become nunneries, boys' and
girls' boarding schools, hospital institutions.  And nothing like
them has been built for a good many years, not only because of the
colossal expense of upkeep at present labor costs, but also because
the taste of the prosperous today is for a less princely--or pseudo-
princely--kind of living.

One views the passing of these private palaces with mixed feelings.
There always tended to be something bogus about the grandeur of the
most imitatively European of them.  One thinks of the rise in labor
costs that has made them so ruinously difficult to maintain today,
and reflects that it has brought new comfort and opportunity to a
host of men and women.  One grants that there is a subtle affront
to human dignity in the accumulation of great staffs of personal
attendants and flunkies.  And yet there was a glitter about some of
these great houses that one misses in the less stratified community
of today.

Last summer I went through one of the lesser of them--lesser in
terms of the number of people it once housed, for it had no more
than eight or ten master bedrooms, but sumptuous in the way of life
that had once flourished there.  It stood vacant, waiting for a
purchaser.  The tall columns of its portico stood on stucco bases
now cracked and chipping away.  The wooden columns of a side porch
were cracked, the old paint peeling from them.  The garden outside
had grown up to weeds; the view over a smiling valley was partly
cut off by rising undergrowth.  Inside the house, vandals had
ripped off a telephone box here, left piles of litter there in
their hunt for valuable loot.  The carved ceiling of the great
central hall--three stories high, some sixty feet long--had partly
come away as the result of a leak in the roof; there were little
heaps of fallen plaster on the hardwood floor.  One could scarcely
believe that the drawing room and dining room had once been lit of
an evening only by scores of candles as men and women in evening
clothes gathered in a ritual strange in its graceful formality to
the folkways of the present.  And one wondered whether the passing
of such a way of life was the price of democracy, and whether that
price was inconsiderable or high.


Today the cult of informality is pervasive.  Its advance has been
so long-continued that one would momentarily expect a reaction
toward elegance; but for every step taken in the direction of
formality, two steps are presently taken in the direction of an
easier code of manners.

Look at the male American of today.  The cutaway coat is
obsolescent, except for borrowed or rented wear at weddings.  (At a
recent wedding I noted that one of the duties of the groom and best
man was to attend to the business of renting cutaways for the
ushers, with no more embarrassment than would attend the hiring of
a caterer to serve the wedding breakfast.)  The tail coat is worn
only by a very few of the well-heeled young, at a very few parties;
the elder citizen of means seldom takes out of mothballs that full
dress suit that he acquired in 1926.  The dinner coat is worn less
and less, and the number of families whose males customarily dress
for dinner has dwindled to the vanishing point.  The hard collar
has likewise almost completely departed.  The waistcoat (or vest,
if you prefer) is going; if a man under forty wears one he is
marked as conservatively inclined in dress.  Hats of any sort are
in gradual retreat, especially in summer.  As for the hard straw
hat, it is virtually a period piece--worn chiefly by elderly
gentlemen with unalterable habits, or by young bloods with a zest
for the picturesquely antique.  And in a recent survey by the
National Office Management Association, three quarters of the
companies responding to questions about office rules said they
allowed men employees to remove their coats at any time, an
additional 13 per cent allowed this in warm weather only, and over
58 per cent allowed sports shirts.

Sports attire is gradually on the way in, ranging from the separate
tweed jacket and flannel or khaki slacks to the fancy-patterned
shirt and slacks favored in California and Florida.  Work clothes
of various sorts tend likewise to be popular for easy-going wear.
Young men shun neckties except as occasional concessions to
formality, and the standard costume of an undergraduate out for a
day with a girl at a girls' college is likely to be a shirt or T-
shirt and slacks, with wool socks and unpolished shoes.  If he
wishes to follow the very strictest code of aristocratic propriety,
he may insist upon wearing a plain white or plain blue shirt with
buttoned-down collar (left open, of course) rather than anything of
Hawaiian aspect, and dingy white shoes rather than dingy brown
ones; but he won't get into a regular two-piece suit, with necktie,
until dinner.  And on many a campus the two-piece suit plays today
almost, though not quite, the part that the dinner coat played in
the early years of the century: it is what one wears on a formal
occasion.  Otherwise one is happy in khaki slacks and a T-shirt,
sports shirt, sweater, lumberman's shirt, or windbreaker, the
combination chosen depending on the weather.  So steady is the
campaign of attrition against the formerly orthodox male costume,
in fact, that one suspects that its one-hundred-and-twenty-five-
year reign may be approaching its end.

Among women the trend toward informality of attire is not so
clearly defined.  Yet it is amusing to note with what enthusiasm
the supposedly omnipotent moguls of the dress trade and the
advertising trade decree from time to time the return of elegance,
and how widely spaced and brief are their triumphs; while the
majority of the younger women, and many older ones too, go hatless
all year round, go stockingless in summer, and wear flat-heeled
loafers or ballet shoes and peasant kerchiefs.

This informality is well suited to the prevalent code of easy-going
companionship between the sexes.  Husbands and wives spend more
time in one another's company than they used to; with cooking and
dishwashing and baby-tending to share, and with the high cost of
labor virtually forcing the husband to make a hobby of amateur
cabinet-making and of painting the kitchen and repairing the
household equipment, they could hardly avoid this even if they
chose, and there is not much occasion to dress up for one another.
With the steady spread of co-education, boys and girls become
accustomed to seeing the opposite sex at work as well as at play,
and costume themselves accordingly.  Men's clubs succumb one by one
to a demand for ladies' dining rooms, or even for the admission of
females to club precincts sacred in earlier days to the male; no
one appears to fear that feminine eyes or ears will be offended by
anything brutish, and there is a general feeling that it is good
fun to have the other sex around.  In this matter there is, of
course, a sharp divergence between the custom of one community or
social group and another.  In general, the more sophisticated the
group, the less do the men and women tend to separate to enjoy
themselves.  But that the general trend is toward a more relaxed
companionship seems beyond a doubt.

Gradually, as servants become rarities, the dinner party at which
guests are seated about a table is supplanted by casserole
entertaining, buffet style.  The hour for dinner becomes more
elastic as the hostess waits until the last guest has arrived
before putting the finishing touches on the meal--with the result
that those who were so injudicious as to come at the hour appointed
may have had an unduly prolonged bout with the cocktails.  Little
by little the formal introduction, in which the identity of Mr.
Jones is made known to Miss Robinson, gives way to an introduction
of Henry Jones to Barbara Robinson; to which, in all but a few
remaining islands of social rigidity, he may respond with, "Hi,
Barbara."  I have heard a waiter at a metropolitan restaurant with
three- and four- and five-dollar entrees on its  la carte bill of
fare put diners at their ease with the greeting, "What'll it be,
folks?"  Rare is the dance given in a private house; and though it
is possible to take a group of young people to dance at a hotel or
night club, such entertainment is likely to be so crowded and
expensive that when the young people are on their own they are
likely to go to a roadside tavern, where they can drink beer or
soft drinks, dance, play the jukebox, and discuss life at a
reasonable cost in a congenially relaxed atmosphere.  Square-
dancing, once the sport of yokels, enjoys high popularity among
various economic groups, and the more rustic and romping it is, the
better they like it.  "Come in your blue jeans," said the
invitation to boys to attend a recent square dance at a highly
select girls' school in New York.  On a Saturday, in a suburb, one
will occasionally see a Catholic girl headed for confession in blue
jeans with a fancy hat--the only one she owns.  In aspect after
aspect of American life, ceremony appears to be in continuous

Why?  Primarily, perhaps, because informality seems to people to be
democratic, unpretentious, friendly.  Among the sons and daughters
of the rich there is a vague, surviving guilt complex: an
embarrassed consciousness that during the Depression great numbers
of people were resentful of their way of life and suspicious of the
origin of the funds that made it possible.  This guilt complex
takes many forms, and one of them is a preference for the sort of
entertainment which won't seem to involve putting on airs.  The
same is true in some degree of many people in the upper echelons of
a business organization: so aware are they of the distrust of them
which unionism fosters that they go out of their way, at a company
party, to show that they have no princely delusions.  Among large
numbers of people in other income brackets there is, perhaps, a
sort of mystic satisfaction in what appear to be democratic ways;
among others there is simply a feeling that formality is a big
bore, and outdated, and they are relieved that they don't have to
make the effort.

Whatever one's view of the cult of informality, it is distinctly a
manifestation of the all-American standard of living and behavior.

Chapter 16

Corporations, New Style

Few things are harder than to observe clearly the life and
institutions of one's own day.  Newspapers do not help much, for
they record the unusual, not the usual.  Magazines help from time
to time, but they too are under a compulsion to concentrate on the
surprising; and the same, by and large, is true of the radio and
TV.  Photographers tend to seek out either the exceptional or the
picturesque; as a producer of books of pictures-and-text on recent
history I have often been struck by the scarcity of pictures which
show the ordinary, everyday aspect of things, or the generally
accepted way of doing things, at any given period.  And even when
we look about us with our own eyes, we tend to be conditioned by
the ideas which we picked up when young, either from our parents or
at school or college, as to the supposed nature of the things we
see.  It is still worse when, after looking, we begin to generalize
about our observations, for as often as not we have no vocabulary
to describe them which is not loaded with terms which have outdated
historical connotations.

Such as the word "capitalism," for instance.  We customarily say
that our economic system is capitalistic; yet the word connoted
half a century ago, and connotes today in Europe, a way of doing
business quite different from the current American way.  Or the
contrasting terms "free enterprise" and "socialism," each of which
carries an overload of traditional meaning which is not very
helpful in defining what we may intend to convey about the exact
state of economic and political affairs today.

And take the corporation.  Most American business is done by
corporations, ranging in size from virtually one-man affairs to
massive enterprises like General Motors, which today spends more
money annually than the United States Government used to spend in
the nineteen-twenties (even including the expenses of the Army and
Navy).  Nearly half of all gainfully employed Americans are on the
payroll of a corporation; if we exclude farmers and other self-
employed people from our reckoning, the proportion is much larger.
Yet the very nature of American corporations, especially the big
ones, has so changed since the days when most of us first heard the
term--or since the textbooks were written that first introduced us
to the corporate concept--that we have difficulty in grasping the
reality of what we actually see when we look at them.

The change has been very important to all of us.  Let us therefore
try to see the corporate institution of today with fresh eyes.

To begin with some generally familiar facts:  A corporation is
traditionally supposed to be controlled by the people who put up
the money to launch and develop it; they take shares of stock in
it, and as stockholders they elect directors to look after the
running of it for them, and the directors select and supervise the
managers who do the actual running.  Thus, in theory, and in the
letter of the law, the stockholders are the ultimate authority.
This is still true in most young companies, which need capital to
get going, and in many small ones anyhow.  But in most successful
American concerns which have grown to maturity, and especially in
the very big ones which between them do a very large proportion of
American business, the stockholders are no longer in control in any
real sense: they are subordinate in authority and importance to the

It is the management which determines policies and makes decisions.
Important decisions must be ratified by the directors, to be sure;
many if not most directors feel a heavy sense of responsibility,
and there is some evidence that this sense of responsibility has
been growing in recent years; yet their contribution to the actual
running of the corporation tends to be somewhat negative, if only
because few of them are living from day to day with the problems
laid before them.  As for the stockholders, the law still says that
they must ratify some sorts of major decisions, so a legal
rigmarole has to be gone through by which the stockholders will say
OK at their annual meeting.  But this annual meeting is ordinarily
a farce.

The officers of the company, exuding a synthetic affability, may be
faced with a few embarrassing questions and a few adverse speeches,
but the great majority of stockholders have sent in proxies
favorable to the management, and the protesters are therefore
annihilated by a gentleman who rises to cast several million votes
against them.  I myself have attended an annual meeting in which,
in the absence of any opposition, the proceedings were even more
cut-and-dried: the minutes of the meeting had been prepared in
advance, they were read aloud slowly, and at the appropriate
moments various directors responded to their various cues and
offered the appropriate resolutions and passed them, fortified by
the knowledge that the bundles of proxies which lay on the table
between them gave them full legal authority to act on the
stockholders' behalf.

Suppose a stockholder doesn't like the way the corporation is being
run?  Only if he is eccentric, or a special sort of crusader, or a
politician (union or otherwise) trying to make a stir, does he try
to oppose the management of a really big company.  What he does,
instead, is to sell his stock and get out.

His General Motors stock, or Goodyear stock, or United Airlines
stock does not in the great majority of cases represent to him a
part ownership and control of the mighty enterprise; it represents
a way of getting some income (or profit), his right to which is
attested by a prettily decorated sheet of paper which he keeps in
his safe-deposit box; and his interest in the corporation's fate is
likely to take principally the form of looking at the stock-market
page from time to time to see how the price is doing.  If he
doesn't like what he sees, he sells.

The management regards him with far more respect than it regarded
its minority stockholders at the turn of the century, when it might
tell them nothing at all about the company's progress, or at the
most produce for them a batch of bloodless statistics.  Now he is
given full and lively reports, full of photographs of the company's
more picturesque operations, and graphs in which the amount of
money spent in this and that way is represented by pretty piles of
coins.  I haven't yet seen an annual report with a picture of a
smiling bathing-suit girl in it, but I am sure there must have been
such: it is hardly possible that any concentrated effort of
salesmanship at the mid-century could long do without this standard
symbol of delight.  But just there is the nub of the situation.
The stockholder is viewed very much as the customer is viewed: not
as an owner but as someone who had better be wooed lest he take his
patronage elsewhere.

With potential opposition melting away through the sales exit, the
management is very much in the saddle--and in most of these larger
companies it is virtually self-perpetuating.  How else could things
be run in, let us say, the American Telephone Company, which has
over a million shareholders, no one of whom owns more than one-
tenth of one per cent of the stock?

Looking at this segment of American business, we would almost find
it appropriate to call our present economic system "managementism"
rather than "capitalism."

All this has been familiar to a great many observers for a great
many years.  But there is another change which is not quite so
widely recognized, though it too has been known to the knowledgeable
for a considerable time.

This is that the corporation of today, and especially the big one,
is not only not run by the stockholders but is in most cases not
nearly so dependent upon the purveyors of money--in short, the
bankers--as it used to be.  In the old days the managers of
companies went hat in hand to Wall Street--or State Street, or
Chestnut Street, or LaSalle Street--when they needed funds for the
salvation or reorganization or expansion of their businesses, and
the bankers proffered money on terms which usually involved their
having a say in the future management of those companies.  As a
result, a great banker to whom other bankers kowtowed and of whom
big investors stood in awe could become, as did Morgan the Elder,
something very close to a supreme boss of much of American
business.  Today bankers are indeed needed for help in the rescue
or reorganization or new financing of many businesses, and their
aid may be very valuable indeed, and their influence strong; but
their chance to throw their weight around is limited.  In the first
place, the terms on which they may deal with their clients are now
closely restricted by law.  In the second place, rival candidates
for the role of rescuer have appeared on the scene, such as the
government's Reconstruction Finance Corporation (some of whose
officials in recent years have been discovered to have taken a
highly personalized view of their function).  When a corporation
needs money for expansion, it may go to Madison Square rather than
to Wall Street--in other words, to a big insurance company--or may
be able to enlist the interest of one of those rising aggregations
of capital, the investment trusts.  Or it may use its own money.

For to a very large extent successful corporations today are self-
financing.  They roll their own capital, by paying out only part of
their earnings in dividends and using the rest to buy new
machinery, build new plants, acquire new subsidiaries.  This method
of superseding the banker was rare among big corporations at the
turn of the century, but it became very popular in the nineteen-
twenties, and it is standard among them today.  The head of a large
and successful corporation with ample funds is therefore likely to
regard Wall Street somewhat as he does his doctor: better be polite
to him because the awful day might come when he could give one
orders, and anyhow his occasional services and check-ups are
useful; but in the meantime the doctor is not one's master.
Similarly, nobody in Wall Street is the successful corporation
head's master, Mr. Vishinsky and his like to the contrary

In this as in many other matters, the Soviet propagandists--and
many foreign observers of America who are far less unsympathetic--
not only distort the truth about America but distort a truth more
than twenty years out of date.

Is the big and successful corporation its own master, then?  Not

To begin with, it is severely circumscribed by the government.  As
Professor Sumner H. Slichter has said, one of the basic changes
which have taken place in America during the past fifty years is
"the transformation of the economy from one of free enterprise to
one of government guided enterprise. . . .  The new economy," says
Dr. Slichter, "operates on the principle that fundamental decisions
on who has what incomes, what is produced, and at what prices it is
sold are determined by public policies."  The government interferes
with the course of prices by putting a floor under some, a ceiling
over others; it regulates in numerous ways how goods may be
advertised and sold, what businesses a corporation may be allowed
to buy into, and how employees may be paid; in some states with
Fair Employment laws it even has a say about who may be hired.
"When a piece of business comes up," writes Ed Tyng, "the first
question is not likely to be 'Should we do it?' but 'Can we do it,
under existing rules and regulations?'"  He is writing about
banking, but what he says holds good for many another business.
Furthermore, in the collection of corporate income taxes,
withholding taxes, social security taxes, and other levies the
government imposes upon the corporation an intricate series of
bookkeeping tasks which in some cases may be as onerous as those it
must undertake on its own behalf.  Thus the choices of enterprise
are both hedged in and complicated by government.

Management is severely limited, too, by the power of labor unions.
This is almost wholly a negative power: the union can tie the
corporation up, but cannot run it, or even administer the
provisions of a contract arrived at between it and the company:
this it has to leave to the management.  But the obstructive power
of union leaders may be very great; the people who say that the man
who in recent years has come closest to Pierpont Morgan in the
exercise of personal power in the national economy is John L. Lewis
are not very far off the beam.  In unionized plants a series of
contracts have served, in effect, to enact what has been well
described by Peter F. Drucker as "the new common law of the
industrial plant and office" as to hiring and firing, seniority
rights, the handling of grievances, overtime work, vacations, and a
lot of other things.  In many cases this body of common law may be
beneficial in the long run to the corporation as well as to its
employees, but it certainly reduces the independence of the

Finally, the management must always steer its course with an eye to
how its actions will look, not only to its employees, its
stockholders, its customers, and the government, but also to the
general public.  The heads of little businesses may engage in deals
which will not stand public scrutiny, and sometimes get away with
grand larceny; the heads of big businesses are aware that this is
exceedingly risky.  For they know they are under close critical
observation.  Detailed reports to the Securities and Exchange
Commission, detailed reports to the tax gatherers, and the
possibility at any moment of being investigated by the Federal
Trade Commission or by a congressional committee, leave them with
about as much sense of privacy as a goldfish.  A goldfish has got
to be good.  These men have acquired, too, for the most part, a
healthy respect for the commercial value of general popularity, and
feel that it is incumbent upon them to win friends and influence
people.  And this obligation, too, diminishes their opportunities
to do as they personally please.

So while the managers of our corporations continue, within limits,
to hire, fire, pay, buy, manufacture, and sell as they choose to
do, and after they reach a successful maturity are in large degree
free from interference by stockholders and financiers, and are thus
very differently placed from the managers of nationalized
industries or businesses, nevertheless the limitations are so
numerous and severe that to speak of these men as engaged in "free
enterprise" is more picturesque than accurate.  They are managing
private institutions operating under a series of severe
disciplines, and committed to doing so with an eye to the general

But that isn't the quarter of it.


For the very nature of corporate business has been undergoing a

To pick out one word that comes as near as any other to describing
the change, one might say that business is becoming professionalized,
in the sense that more and more men in business are engaged in doing
the sort of thing that we associate with the professional man
(lawyer, doctor, engineer, professor) and doing it more and more in
a spirit resembling that of the professional man.

When at the end of the first decade of this century the president
of Harvard University, composing the citation for the degree given
by the new Harvard Graduate School of Business Administration,
called business "the oldest of the arts and youngest of the
professions," there was considerable levity among the hard-shelled--
and not simply because the language he used reminded people of the
identity of the oldest of the professions.  They thought the whole
idea preposterous.  Business, a profession!  What an innocent
notion!  Business was a rough-and-tumble battle between men whose
first concern was to look out for number one, and the very idea of
professors being able to prepare men for it was nonsense.  As a
matter of fact, many a tough-fibered tycoon of those days was
dubious even about employing college graduates, whom he regarded as
toplofty, impractical fellows who had to unlearn a lot before they
were fit for the business arena.  One rough measure of the change
that has taken place since then is to be found in the fact that
this very professional school of business at Harvard has won
widespread respect, and financial backing as well, from among big
corporations; and that many of these corporations, at their own
expense, send some of their most promising officials, at the
age of forty or thereabouts, to fit themselves for enlarged
responsibilities by taking the school's thirteen-week course in
Advanced Management.  This does not mean that a great university
has departed from its scholarly traditions to shelter a trade
school; it means rather that an important part of American
business, as now operated, requires of its leading men what are
essentially professional skills and abilities.

Heaven knows there are large areas of trade where a shrewd eye for
a quick buck is dominant.  There are businessmen aplenty to whom
money-making is the sole criterion of performance--money-making at
anybody's expense.  Yet today the officers of most corporations of
consequence have to cope with so many intricate technical problems
of various sorts, have to bear in mind so constantly their
interlocking relations with their employees, the government, their
consumers, and the general public, and have to concentrate so hard
upon keeping a complex of operations in effective balance, that
there is a growing demand for men with highly trained and flexible

Business is absorbing into itself a host of functions of a
professional or semi-professional nature.  It employs engineers in
profusion; as the authors of a volume on Executive Action have put
it, "There is no longer such a person as 'the engineer,' but there
are a multitude of specialized engineers, many of whose skills are
not interchangeable."  It employs statisticians, cost accountants,
auditors, economists, quality-control experts, motion-study
experts, safety engineers, medical directors, personnel men, labor-
relations specialists, training executives, public-relations men,
advertising men, market analysts, research consultants, foreign-
trade consultants, lawyers, tax experts--the list could be
continued at length.

Take a single element in the modern corporate picture: that of
research.  In the early years of the century it was a rare company
which had its own research laboratory; and even after such
laboratories began to multiply fast during the nineteen-twenties,
one old-line executive, asked if his company had a research
department, said, "Yes, but we just sort of subsidize it as a
publicity front."  Even during the Great Depression, however, the
multiplication continued; and by 1947 the "Steelman report" issued
by the President's Scientific Resources Board estimated that of the
137,000 scientists and research engineers in the country, 30,000
were working for the government, 50,000 were working in colleges
and universities, and 57,000--a group larger than either of the
other two--were working in industrial research laboratories.

Take another element in the picture: the wide variety of
responsibilities, quite apart from traditional business ones, that
a corporation may find itself saddled with.  Tharon Perkins,
writing about the American oil companies operating in Venezuela,
has noted that each one has had to build a whole new town near each
oil field before it could begin to do business--and that this has
meant "having to provide a house for each employee, an education
for the children, hospitals and medical care for the entire family,
paved streets, garbage collection and a sewerage system, stores
where food can be bought (much of it below cost), power plants to
supply electricity, water systems with pure water, laundries and
ice plants--and even amusement centers with baseball diamonds,
movies, and club houses for dancing and billiards"; and that "an
oil company district manager or area superintendent has to RUN this
civilization after he has built it."  That sort of town building
and town managing requires a bevy of experts with highly
diversified professional talents.

The various specialists who are drawn into the employ of a big
corporation are not, in most cases, by any means shut away from
others of their kind who work for other employers.  No, they go to
meetings of the National Society of Sales Training Executives, or
the National Association of Cost Accountants, or the American
Society of Corporate Secretaries, or what not, there to swap notes
on progress in their particular fields and to pick up ideas.  And
when some of these groups assemble--when, for instance, the
industrial chemists meet with government chemists and university
chemists at sessions of the American Chemical Society--they find
common ground in devotion to the broadening of their particular
area of learning.  I have before me a report of a recent conference
on aviation health problems.  It was conducted by the Harvard
School of Public Health (a private institution of learning and
teaching), and it brought together professors from Harvard and
other institutions, representatives of the Navy, Air Force, and U.
S. Public Health Service, and representatives of airlines, aircraft
manufacturing companies, and insurance companies.  That sort of
collaboration goes on every day the country over.  Said Dr. J.
Robert Oppenheimer before a congressional committee in 1945.  "The
gossip of scientists who get together is the lifeblood of physics,
and I think it must be in all other branches of science. . . ."
And so it is with personnel men, market analysts, and cost
accountants too, he might have added, and with all those other
corporation employees who take a truly professional interest in
their specialties.

This swapping of ideas brings us to one of the most significant
facts about American business today--a fact which never ceases to
amaze European and even British businessmen when they confront it:
that there are few secrets in American business.  Rather there is a
continual cross-fertilization through the pooling of facts and

This takes place in a number of ways.  Take one upper-level way.
When the directors of the Manufacturing Chemists' Association,
representing scores of chemical concerns, meet monthly, there is
laid before them a tabulation of the safety record of the whole
industry--not only as a whole, but firm by firm, so that the man
from du Pont or Monsanto learns the exact safety figures of Merck
or American Cyanamid.  Why do they do this?  Obviously because
safety is a matter of such common concern to them that the
necessity for sharing whatever knowledge can be accumulated takes
precedence over the competitive impulse.

Similarly the magazine publishers set up many years ago the Audit
Bureau of Circulations, to make periodically a thorough and
unbiased inspection of the circulation records of each magazine,
and to publish the figures in detail.  In some other countries
these figures would be jealously guarded secrets; here the
assumption is that it is to the advantage of all that the
advertiser who buys space shall know exactly what he is buying,
even if this means that the competing concerns in the industry
shall each know just how the others are faring.

The pooling of information takes place through trade journals too.
Their number is legion, and each one is full of ideas on how to do
more effective business.  I have been told, not unreasonably, that
one reason why Italian military aviation was so backward during
World War II was that Mussolini's Fascist government had banned the
importation into Italy of aeronautical trade journals from the
United States and Britain, thus depriving the Italian engineers of
a vast deal of information which we here make available to all.

But the most characteristic of all American institutions for the
pooling of information are trade conventions.  In 1930, according
to the Wall Street Journal, there were 4,000 trade associations in
the United States; now, believe it or not, there are no less than
12,000--1,500 national ones and 10,500 state or local ones.  And so
many of these organizations have salaried managers that the
logical, climactic development has taken place: two hundred of the
managers gathered in Chicago in 1951 to consult together as a trade
association of managers of trade associations!

When one of these organizations holds its annual or semi-annual
convention--whether at the Waldorf or Commodore in New York, or the
Stevens or Edgewater Beach in Chicago, or the Chase in St. Louis,
or in Atlantic City or French Lick or White Sulphur--the ritual is
well-nigh standard: the green-baize-covered registration desk for
new arrivals, where they are handed a lapel badge and a schedule of
meetings and festivities; the formal meetings in the Palm Room or
Ballroom (sometimes ill-attended in the mornings); the formal
dinner at which some grand panjandrum of the industry makes a
speech concocted by his ghost-writer on the glories of free
enterprise and the insidious menace of socialism; the back-
slapping, highball drinking, poker playing, and general skylarking
that makes the members feel like boys again; the bridge or canasta
tournaments for wives--if these are invited; and, if they are not,
the tendency of executives to return home in such a depleted
condition as to confirm the local legend that New York, or Chicago,
or Atlantic City, or whatever the convention place happens to be,
is a sink of iniquity.  Yet though the serious purpose of these
gatherings sometimes seems submerged in a tide of alcohol, it
nevertheless is vital.  Information is pooled--about buying
conditions, selling conditions, the nature of the market, the
latest technical advances.  The conferees may not tell each other
quite everything; nevertheless the characteristic answer to the
question, "How's your paper supply holding up in quality?" is
emphatically not, "None of your business."  These men have learned
that it is to the long-range interest of all to pass information
around, very much as the members of the American Historical
Association have learned that it is to the long-range interest of
the science and art of history to pass information around.


Surveying the current business scene and the complex of problems
pressing upon the modern large-scale executive, the editors of the
magazine Fortune recently declared in their book, U.S.A., the
Permanent Revolution, that "management is becoming a profession";
and in an advertisement they put it even more flatly: "the tycoon
is dead. . . .  The mid-century business man has had to go to
school--in labor, in politics, in social welfare.  The engineer's a
business man, the salesman's an economist, the research man knows
advertising, the finance man knows law."

The tycoon dead?  The report may be exaggerated.  Nevertheless
there is a striking difference between the type of men now rising
to the top in big business and those of an earlier day.

Take, for example, the eight men whom I mentioned in Chapter 4 as
among the most influential in American economic affairs at the turn
of the century: J. Pierpont Morgan, John D. Rockefeller, Andrew
Carnegie, Edward H. Harriman, James Stillman, George F. Baker,
William Rockefeller, and H. H. Rogers.  I noted that of all these
men, none had been to college except Morgan, who had spent two
years at the University of Gttingen in Germany.  Nowadays it seems
quite natural to us that the great majority of big business
executives should be college graduates and that many should have
been trained in engineering or law.

For example, in the automobile industry--regarded by many as a
pretty tough one--the chief executive officer of General Motors,
Charles Erwin Wilson, a graduate of the Carnegie Institute of
Technology, began his career as an electrical engineer.  The
president of Chrysler, Lester Lum Colbert, went to the University
of Texas and the Harvard Law School, after which he became a
specialist in labor law.  And though Henry Ford II, head of the
Ford company, constitutes a somewhat special case, being one of the
few leading executives who may be said to have inherited his job
(an increasingly unusual thing today, when there is a marked trend
away from the family-run firm), he at least spent some years at

Frank Whittemore Abrams, chairman of the board of Standard Oil (New
Jersey), the biggest of all American concerns in terms of total
assets, is a Syracuse man, class of 1912, and was trained as an
engineer; the president of the same company, Eugene Holman, holds a
master's degree from the University of Texas and began his career
as a geologist.

Among the recent top executives of General Electric, the other
Charles E. Wilson (Charles Edward), who was president until he took
over the national mobilization assignment in 1950, is an exception
in not having gone to college, but the chairman of the board,
Philip Dunham Reed, got an engineering degree at Wisconsin and a
law degree at Fordham; Wilson was succeeded in the presidency by
Ralph J. Cordiner, Whitman College '22.  At U. S. Steel the recent
chairman of the board, Irving S. Olds, Yale '07, Harvard Law School
'10, is a lawyer.  And at American Telephone & Telegraph, upon the
retirement of Walter S. Gifford, Harvard '05, a statistician (who
later became the American Ambassador to Great Britain), he was
succeeded in the top position by Leroy Wilson, Rose Polytechnic
Institute '22, an engineer, and on the latter's death the place
went to Cleo F. Craig, University of Missouri '13, an electrical

The mention of Gifford's ambassadorial service suggests another
interesting thing about such men as these: that many of them have
at one time or another held government jobs.  Among those I have
just listed, for instance, Charles Edward Wilson was not only the
chief officer of the national mobilization effort in 1950-1952, but
in World War II was executive vice-chairman of the War Production
Board, where Cordiner also was for a time vice-chairman.  Reed
worked for the government from 1941 to 1945 in a variety of
assignments, one of which carried the rank of Minister.  Holman put
in a number of years with the U. S. Geological Survey before he
went into the oil business.  One might add parenthetically that
when Gifford went to the Court of St. James's, he succeeded
Ambassador Lewis W. Douglas, who had been at various times a
congressman, the U. S. Director of the Budget, chancellor of McGill
University, and president (later chairman) of the Mutual Life
Insurance Company.

If in our list of automobile companies we had included Studebaker,
we might have noted that it was the head of Studebaker, Paul
Hoffman, who took over one of the biggest political tasks of our
time, the administration of the Marshall Plan--and then became head
of the Ford Foundation.  And speaking of foundations, it should be
noted that in 1948 Devereux C. Josephs, who was head of the
Carnegie Corporation, a foundation which deals extensively with
professors, moved over to become president of the New York Life
Insurance Company, where the chairman of the board, George Leslie
Harrison, had been trained as a lawyer and had been governor of the
Federal Reserve Bank of New York, a semigovernmental organization.

These men are characteristic of a shift even more pronounced among
many of their juniors: a shift toward the rise, in big business, of
men to whom government service and public service of other sorts
come naturally, complementing their professional and business
training to prepare them for the wide range of techniques and
public responsibilities which present-day business confronts.  New
style corporations are getting new-style leaders.

We need not pause here more than a moment to note another aspect of
American life that most of us so take for granted that we are
astonished when Europeans express surprise at it; the fact that
America is crammed from end to end with private organizations and
associations--national, state, and local--designed to look out for
one aspect or another of the common good; and that in most of
these, businessmen play active and often leading roles.

In their book, U.S.A., the Permanent Revolution, the editors of
Fortune have hammered hard at the significance of this fact,
driving home their argument by showing how these organizations are
run in a specific city--Cedar Rapids, Iowa: how Keith Dunn,
executive vice-president of the Century Engineering Company,
presides at a luncheon meeting of the Cedar Rapids Chamber of
Commerce, of which he is president, and then moves on immediately
afterward to a meeting of the Community Chest; and how Van Vechten
Shaffer, president of the Guaranty Bank & Trust Company, is not
only head of the Chamber's Co-ordinating Committee, but is a
trustee and secretary of Coe College, president of the Cedar Rapids
Community Foundation, chairman of the local Health Council, a
member of the Iowa Health Council, and a money raiser for St.
Luke's Hospital, the local symphony, and the amateur theater--and
in all gives a third of his time, and often more, to the local
community.  There is nothing new about businessmen being on
hospital boards, school and college boards, or charitable boards,
or about their wives being active in the women's clubs and
federations thereof and the Parent-Teacher Associations.  But some
of the organizations that have developed in recent years with
active business support do strike a somewhat new note in this
picture of what Erwin D. Canham of the Christian Science Monitor
has called "voluntary collective action . . . a kind of
collectivism which has a potency incomparably more dynamic than
Marxist collectivism could ever be."

Let me mention only two out of a great many.  There is the
Committee for Economic Development, an organization for economic
study and political recommendations based upon this study, which
does not simply try to promote the interest of business management
but takes a much broader view of economic affairs, and brings
together on its committees and research groups a mixture of company
heads and academic economists which would astonish an old-time
tycoon.  And there is also the Advertising Council, described by
Lewis Galantire as "a voluntary organization of professional men
who donate to the nation the copy, the designs, and the technical
skill that go into our public campaigns for better schools, road
safety, fire prevention, government bond sales, the war against
tuberculosis and other diseases."  Listening to a radio commercial
on the importance of adequate support of our schools, and realizing
that it was written and distributed for free by the Advertising
Council, and is incorporated in an expensive radio show because the
sponsors of Bob Hope, let us say, feel that its inclusion adds to
the public appeal of their show, one feels as one does when
listening to a Metropolitan Life Insurance Company commercial on
the treatment of arthritis:  "Yes, I suppose this is just good
business in a way--but where does one draw the line between good
business and the promotion of the common weal?"  These days they
seem to overlap considerably.

And not only do they overlap, but there is a constant effort to
build bridges over whatever gaps remain between them.  At the mid-
century the desire for synthesis and reconciliation--between
various sciences, between science and industry, between sociology
and business, between this element in our society and that--is
widespread and contagious.  It has become the fashion to hold
conferences at which representatives of supposedly contrasting
interests in American society put their heads together and try to
arrive at common counsel.  One of these conferences, recently, was
organized by the Advertising Council, with the idea of throwing
light on what aspects of American life were least understood
abroad.  It was held at the Hotel Waldorf-Astoria in New York on
April 16,1951; the panel of talkers included an author, a magazine
editor and author, a foreign radio consultant and author, a
newspaper editor, a professor, a college president, a foundation
head, a manufacturer, and a manufacturer turned statesman and
foundation head.  What these men said was interesting, but not half
so interesting as that at the mid-century it seemed to be important
to get them together to discuss the meaning of America.  That is a
sample of the way in which men engaged in business and in other
kinds of effort are constantly drawn together to arrive at
mutuality of ideas in the common interest.

Another trend in American business is toward the supplanting of one-
man management by team management.  The tycoon may not be dead, but
such autocrats as the late table-pounding George Washington Hill of
American Tobacco and the rambunctious Sewell Avery of Montgomery
Ward are in increasingly short supply.  One corporation head summed
it up to me this way:

A lot of the companies in my industry were started in the early
years of the century as one-man shows: there was a fellow with an
idea and some capital, and the business was his personal business.
Then the thing grew, and in the twenties the sales problem was
uppermost, and this man was succeeded by a big salesman.  Later we
began to see the importance of research, and a research man, or at
any rate a research-minded man, would get the nod.  But now
research has become so complicated that it's a specialty, and what
you need is a team of people each one of which knows one or more of
these various specialties, and the chief thing required of the head
fellow is that he be able to keep this team working as a well-
balanced unit.  He's got to be a good captain of the team.  As
chairman, I don't pretend really to know what the research people
are doing; it's my job to keep them going in harmonious balance
with the rest of the outfit.

The organization of Standard Oil (New Jersey) is exceptional in
that the directors are full-time salaried members of the company
staff, meeting as a board once a week, while an executive committee
of five of them meets every day; but it offers an interesting--if
extreme--case of the current emphasis upon teamwork.  C. Hartley
Grattan has described in Harper's how the men at the top work:

The Board is indisputably the core of the management of the
company.  Its decisions are group decisions.  Unanimous consent is
always sought and when there is sharp division of opinion which
cannot be overcome by the usual methods of persuasion, the matter
is laid over with a request for more facts.  As a Board member the
President participates in discussions as an equal, just as the
Chairman of the Board does also.  It seems likely, the members
being only human, that the views of the Chairman and the President
carry more weight than those of ordinary members; but this, it is
insisted, does not give either domination of the Board.  Their
position is simply primus inter pares.

What of the attitude of such new-style managers as these toward the
general public interest?  Here one should walk very warily indeed,
recognizing that speeches by a corporation head may be window-
dressing arranged by a public-relations department and that, in
general, protestations of virtuous intent cannot always be taken at
face value.  Nevertheless something seems to have happened.

The Great Depression had much to do with it.  The top men of
America's big corporations remember the doghouse which they
inhabited in those days; and though some of the elder ones are
still unreconstructed Washington-haters, and there is hardly a man
in authority today who does not on occasion splutter at some of the
restrictions--and monumental paper work--imposed upon him by the
government, a great many of the younger and more nimble-minded of
them have acquired a genuine distaste for the shenanigans of the
nineteen-twenties, a firm intention not to butt their heads against
the political and social facts of life as their predecessors did,
and a hard-learned but unfeigned awareness of the principle that,
in the long run, as Peter F. Drucker has put it, "No policy is
likely to benefit the business itself unless it also benefits the
society."  The war had something to do with the change, too,
bringing together as it did businessmen, government men, labor
leaders, physical scientists, social scientists, and assorted
professional men in government undertakings in which they learned
to appreciate one another's competence and point of view.  I do not
mean that our business executives have put on haloes; I prefer the
way in which the attitude of these men was described by Ralph
Coghlan of the St. Louis Post Dispatch at the Corning conference of
1951--a conference, by the way, which dealt with "Living in
Industrial Civilization," and brought together in a two-day powwow
businessmen, sociologists and other scholars, journalists, and
government officials, and was staged by a business concern, the
Corning Glass Company.  Said Mr. Coghlan:

"When I was growing up, the word 'soulless' corporation was a very
common term. . . .  Well, in my lifetime I have seen a remarkable
change in this.  I don't know whether it could be said that
corporations have obtained souls, but at least they have obtained


The American corporation of today, large or small, is not only an
economic unit.  It is a political unit too, in the sense that most
of those who work for it are much more conscious, during most of
their working hours, of being under its governance than of being
under the governance of the regular political officials.  The boss--
whether president, or department head, or supervisor, or foreman--
is an executive authority closer to them than any governor or
mayor; and the code of practices of the firm--that body of common
law of which we have spoken--seems to them to condition their lives
and fortunes more urgently than the ordinances of the city or the
laws of the state and nation.  For it defines the extent of their
property rights in their jobs, which may mean more to them than any
of their tangible possessions, and it also determines in large
degree the amount of satisfaction that these jobs give them from
day to day.  Whether this code of practices has been built up by
management alone, or by contract between management and union, it
regulates not only them but, indirectly, their families too, so
that when Mr. Jones or Miss Miller shifts from a job in one company
to a job in another, the wrench to their daily mode of life and
their view of the world about them may be as sharp as if they had
moved from town to town.

And the corporation is a social unit too, a community.  The girl
who comes from an Ohio town to Philadelphia to take a job is
acutely aware that among her new fellow employees and their friends
she may find the man she will marry; as she begins to go out to
lunch with other girls in her department she is being introduced by
degrees into a new society.  The young man who is transferred from
the Cleveland plant to the Kansas City plant knows that his social
life in Kansas City will be built in large part about the
friendships he makes within the plant there.

The extent to which the corporation constitutes a community depends
of course upon many factors--the social homogeneity of the
employees as a group; whether the company dominates the town in
which it is located or is a small unit among many; whether or not
most of the employees separate at night to go to different
dormitory suburbs; and whether there is felt to be official
pressure for or against a concentrated association with other
members of the corporation's staff.  (One recalls the remark
attributed to Ben Sonnenberg, the New York public relations man, a
believer in the importance of outside contacts, that lunching with
colleagues is "career suicide.")  But on the whole the social life
within the corporation is a more important element in the American
scene, I believe, than one would gather from most of our fiction--
which is likely to be produced either by self-employed people who
do not know this life at first hand or by people who have
experienced it but are such natural-born individualists that they
look upon it with a bilious eye.  General awareness of its
importance may account, at least in part, for the steady movement
toward the cities, where people obscurely feel that they will be
guaranteed some social opportunities through office contacts--many
more than a small community would offer--but will not be as wholly
dependent upon these, as imprisoned within the corporate community,
as they might be in a one-company town.

In some corporations the social pattern takes curious forms.
Fortune published late in 1951 two articles dealing with the
pressures upon wives of executives in some concerns to conform to a
rigid code of executive-wifely conduct.  These articles--later
summarized in a single article in Life--revealed that in some
corporations executives are not chosen, or promoted, until their
wives have been approved as suitable members of the company
community; these wives are expected to have social ease, to refrain
from injudicious talk or alcoholic indiscretion, to guide other
wives toward seemly behavior, and to help their husbands put the
company's interest before any other.  Indirectly the articles also
revealed how delicate a pattern of conformity, echelon-mindedness,
and snobbery such a custom may impose upon the community, turning
the concept of teamwork among executives and the concept of the
corporation as a community into caricatures.

From the comment which these articles occasioned it was clear that
there are corporations in which no such gentle conspiracy to erase
individuality takes shape.  Yet in one way or another both the
management and the union, if any, are likely to tend, for their own
reasons, at least to encourage the employees' sense of belonging.

Thus in the urbanized society of the mid-century the company or
union paper serves as the equivalent of the old-time country
weekly.  "Angela Filson in Accounts Payable is sporting a new ring
these days.  The lucky man is Jerry Cassidy of the Des Moines
office.  Congratulations, Angela and Jerry!" . . . "Agent Win
Winget won enough in two football pools to keep his twins in new
shoes for the next three years." . . . "Our deep sympathy goes to
Lillian Gerchar, Helen Debreceni, and Pearl Anthony in the recent
loss of loved ones." . . . "Eleanor Rich, twelve-year-old daughter
of Howard Rich, employed in the pipe mill at Gadsden, recently won
the Alabama State Spelling Championship.  In cinching the crown she
correctly spelled 'baccalaureate' and 'eleemosynary.'  In the photo
Eleanor is shown with her proud dad."  What are these but the sort
of personals that have been the traditional seasoning of small-town
community life?  And does not the office party serve the corporate
society as the sort of saturnalia that other communities have
needed and have not always been able to devise--as occasions where
the salesmen kiss the secretaries, and the office boy tells the
department head that his routing system is all wrong, and the
community code tells them that none of this is to count on the
official record?

In this corporate community the labor union plays today an
anomalous part.  By its very nature it is divisive, required to be
anti-management, anti-company, anti-industry, a sort of His
Majesty's Opposition that will never, like an opposition political
party, be required--or be able--to take office and show that it can
do better.  The union leader is in a curious spot.  Unable,
himself, to put into practice any of the changes for which he
campaigns, he is compelled by his very position to make the most of
grievances, to whip up mistrust, and in some cases to keep alive
the threat of a strike which may paralyze not only the company or
industry against which he is campaigning but many another which has
had no part in the dispute.  When inflation threatens, the position
he occupies almost forces him to keep on pushing for increases
which will add to the inflationary pressure; if he doesn't, he may
lose his job to someone who shouts more loudly and consecutively
than he.  For he is cast in the role of a crusader, and if the time
comes when the need is not for rebellion but for reconciliation and
reconstruction, he is in danger of losing status.  Furthermore, his
search for able subordinates is complicated by the tendency of
management to promote some of the ablest potential candidates into
ineligibility.  He is required almost inevitably to be an
underminer of that loyalty to the company which offers one of the
deepest satisfactions of corporate work.  And the one really strong
weapon in his arsenal, the strike, is an exceedingly blunt one,
which hits a great many people at whom it is not aimed.

That the right to strike remains one of the fundamental liberties
in an industrial society one may agree.  One may agree, too, that
unions and their leaders have played and are playing a vital part
in the raising of the general standard of living; and that, by and
large, the codes of practice which they have written into the
statute books of industry (always excepting the featherbedding
codes imposed on certain industries) have done and are doing much
to make for decent conditions of life which would not otherwise be
attained.  It seems undeniable, furthermore, that some method of
providing an uncringing representation of the rank and file of
corporate employees in the contest over the disposition of
corporate funds is essential to our general well-being.  Yet it
remains an anomaly of our industrial life that this deep division
of loyalties is built into it in a day when the trend toward a
general American standard of living is otherwise such a unifying

Under these circumstances it is noteworthy that we have so many
ably managed and responsible unions as we have today, and that
patience and good will are so often to be found on both sides of
the table in management-labor relations.  Strikes, like airline
accidents, make news; reasonable agreements, like the hundreds of
thousands of airline flights that arrive safely, do not.  In the
reports of the British productivity teams there has been frequent
mention of the extent to which managements and unions have been
found to be working together toward the improvement of manufacturing
and administrative methods.  One reason would seem to be that
common-sense people recognize that they work better, and are
happier, when their loyalties are not in head-on conflict, but

That already the strike itself is tending to change its character
in response to this recognition has been manifest in recent years.
Though some strikes have been bitter and violent, these have been
the exception; and the contrast of the rest with the strikes of
earlier years has been very sharp.  Mary Heaton Vorse, who as a
reporter deeply sympathetic with labor observed the steel strikes
of 1919 and 1937 and then that of 1949 at close range, visiting
some of the same mill towns and attending strikers' meetings, was
astonished at what she saw in 1949: the absence of violent goon
squads; the sympathy of the townspeople generally with the
strikers, who seemed to them not a mob of red revolutionaries, as
they had seemed in 1919, and even in 1937, but a collection of
respectable fellow citizens to whom it was reasonable to extend
financial credit in the emergency; the action of some company
officials in serving coffee to the pickets; the manifest interest
of almost everybody in maintaining order.  The contrast with the
old days has been even cleaner-cut in some other recent strikes,
during which there has been noted in the local community an air of
friendly excitement something like that at the close of a lively
political campaign, or at the time of a big football match; in such
communities the strike has been regarded not as class warfare but
as a sort of game played between two teams, one of which has
numbers on its side while the other has authority and money.

Meanwhile there are further signs, here and there, of a further
evolution toward a lessening of the anomaly, toward a conceivable
new order of things.  Recent contracts tying wages to productivity
are one sign.  Such innovations as the Scanlon system of rewards,
which again emphasizes productivity, are another.  The widening
group of companies which have introduced profit-sharing--some of
them, like Lincoln Electric, with astonishing results--constitute
still another.  The intense preoccupation of many company officials
with the art of communicating with employees and the public, and
the studies which are constantly being made of the satisfactions
and dissatisfactions of the workers' lot, are likewise encouraging.
It may be that one of the changes we shall see during the next
generation will be a transformation of the very nature of the union
from an instrument of counter-loyalty and coercion into a less
emotionally divisive though equally effective part of the
organizational machinery of American business.  For as it exists
today it is becoming something of an anachronism in the more
enlightened industries.

The corporation has come a long way, but there is still much
unfinished business ahead of it.

Chapter 17

The Spirit of the Times

The late President A. Lawrence Lowell of Harvard was an extempore
speaker so brilliant that he could go to a public dinner quite
without notes, listen to three preliminary speakers, and then,
rising to speak himself, comment aptly on the remarks of those who
had preceded him and lead easily into an eloquent peroration of his
own.  One of the reasons why he could do this was that he had
almost by heart a number of suitable perorations on which he could
construct variations suitable to the particular occasion.  His
favorite one dealt with the difference between two ancient
civilizations, each of them rich and flourishing--Greece and
Carthage.  One of these, he would say, lives on in men's memories,
influences all of us today; the other left no imprint on the ages
to follow it.  For Carthage, by contrast with Greece, had a purely
commercial civilization in which there was little respect for
learning, philosophy, or the arts.  "Is America in danger of
becoming a Carthage?" Lowell would ask--and then he would launch
into an exposition of the vital and enduring importance of

There are a great many people today, there have been a great many
people throughout American history, who have in effect called the
United States a Carthage.  There are those who argue that during
the past half century, despite the spread of good living among its
people, it has been headed in the Carthaginian direction; that it
has been producing a mass culture in which religion and philosophy
languish, the arts are smothered by the barbarian demands of mass
entertainment, freedom is constricted by the dead weight of mass
opinion, and the life of the spirit wanes.  There are millions in
Europe, for instance, to whom contemporary American culture, as
they understand it, is no culture at all; to whom the typical
American is a man of money, a crude, loud fellow who knows no
values but mechanical and commercial ones.  And there are Americans
aplenty, old and young, who say that achievement in the realm of
the mind and spirit has become ominously more difficult in recent
years, and that our technological and economic triumphs are barren
because they have brought us no inner peace.

Some of the charges against contemporary American culture one may
perhaps be permitted to discount in advance.  Thus one may discount
the laments, by people with twenty thousand a year, that other
people whose incomes have risen from two thousand to four are
becoming demoralized by material success; or the nostalgia of those
who, when they compare past with present, are obviously matching
their own youth in pleasantly sheltered circumstances with the
conditions and behavior of a much more inclusive group today.  One
may also point out a persistently recurring error in European
appraisals of the American people: many Europeans, being accustomed
to thinking of men and women who travel freely and spend amply as
members of an elite, have a tendency to compare certain undeniably
crude, harsh, and unimaginative visitors from the States with
fellow countrymen of theirs whose social discipline has been quite
different--who belong, in European terms, to another class
entirely.  It is extraordinarily hard for many people, both here
and abroad, to adjust themselves to the fact that the prime
characteristic of the American scene is a broadening of
opportunity, and that the first fruits of a broadening of
opportunity may not be a lowered voice and a suitable deference
toward unfamiliar customs.

So let us begin by giving the floor to a man who may be relied upon
not to slip into these pitfalls, yet who nevertheless takes a hard
view of what the past half century has done to his country.

"At the beginning of 1950," writes Bruce Bliven in his introduction
to the book Twentieth Century Unlimited, "many newspapers and
magazines . . . published elaborate reviews of the years since
1900, liberally illustrated with the quaint costumes of the
McKinley era, with bicycle parades, barber-shop quartets with
handlebar mustaches, and the earliest automobiles struggling along
highways deep in mud.  None of them, so far as I am aware,
discussed what seems to me the most significant fact about the
changes in the past half century--the alteration in the moral
climate from one of overwhelming optimism to one which comes pretty
close to despair.

"Half a century ago, mankind, and especially the American section
of mankind, was firmly entrenched in the theory that this is the
best of all possible worlds and getting better by the minute. . . .
There was a kindly God in the heavens, whose chief concern was the
welfare, happiness, and continuous improvement of mankind, though
his ways were often inscrutable."

Today, continues Mr. Bliven, we have lost this faith and are
"frightened to death"--of war, atom bombs, and the looming prospect
of a general brutalization and deterioration of the human species.

Have we, then, become an irreligious and rudderless people?

Church statistics do not help us far toward an answer to this
question.  They show steady gains in membership for most church
groups, roughly comparable to the gain in population; but they are
suspect because of a very human tendency to keep on the rolls
people who never go to church any more except for weddings and
funerals, and there is no way of knowing whether the compilers of
church statistics have become more or less scrupulous in the past
few decades.  My own definite impression is that during the first
thirty or forty years of the half century there was a pretty steady
drift away from church attendance and from a feeling of
identification with the church and its creed and institutions, at
least on the part of well-to-do Americans (except perhaps among the
Roman Catholics, who were under an exceptionally rigid discipline).
It became customary among larger and larger numbers of the solid
citizenry of the land to sleep late on Sunday morning and then
grapple with the increasing poundage of the Sunday paper, or have a
10:30 appointment at the first tee, or drive over to the Joneses'
for midday cocktails, or pack the family into the car for a jaunt
to the shore or the hills.  I myself, making many week-end visits
every year over several decades, noted that as time went on it was
less and less likely that my host would ask on Saturday evening
what guests were planning to go to church the next morning; that by
the nineteen-twenties or thirties it was generally assumed that
none would be.  And although the households in which I visited may
not have been representative, they at least were of more or less
the same types throughout this whole period.  Today I should
imagine that in the heavy out-of-town traffic on a Friday afternoon
there are not many people who will be inside a church on Sunday

It has been my further observation that during at least the first
thirty and perhaps the first forty years of the century there was
an equally steady drift away from a sense of identification with
the faiths for which the churches stood.  Among some people there
was a feeling that science, and in particular the doctrine of
evolution, left no room for the old-time God, and that it was
exceedingly hard to imagine any sort of God who was reconcilable
with what science was demonstrating and would at the same time be
at home in the local church.  Among others there was a rising moral
impatience with an institution which seemed to pay too much
attention to the necessity of being unspotted by such alleged vices
as drinking, smoking, card playing, and Sunday golfing, and too
little to human brotherhood; the churches, or many of them, made a
resolute effort to meet this criticism by becoming complex
institutions dedicated to social service and the social gospel,
with schools, classes, women's auxiliaries, young people's groups,
sports, and theatricals, but not many of them held their whole
congregations--at least on Sunday morning.  Still others felt that
the clergy were too deferential to wealthy parishioners of dubious
civic virtue, or too isolated from the main currents of life.  And
among many there was a vague sense that the churches represented an
old-fashioned way of living and thinking and that modern-minded
people were outgrowing their influence.  And as the feeling of
compulsion to be among the churchgoers and church workers weakened,
there were naturally many to whom the automobile or the country
club or the beach or an eleven o'clock breakfast was simply too
agreeable to pass up.

Whether or not this drift away from formal religion is still the
prevailing tide, there was manifest during the nineteen-forties a
counter-movement.  In many men and women it took no more definite
form than an uneasy conviction that in times of stress and anxiety
there was something missing from their lives: they wished they had
something to tie to, some faith that would give them a measure of
inner peace and security.  The appearance on the best-seller lists
of such books as The Robe, The Cardinal, Peace of Mind, and The
Seven Storey Mountain indicated a widespread hunger and curiosity.
Some returned to the churches--or entered them for the first time.
In families here and there one noted a curious reversal: parents
who had abandoned the church in a mood of rebellion against outworn
ecclesiastical customs found their children in turn rebelling
against what seemed to them the parents' outworn pagan customs.
The Catholic Church in particular made many converts, many of them
counter-rebels of this sort, and spectacularly served as a haven
for ex-Communists who swung all the way from one set of
disciplinary bonds to another.  Whether the incoming tide was yet
stronger than the outgoing one, or what the later drift would be,
was still anybody's guess at the mid-century; but at least there
was, and is, a confusion in the flow of religious feeling and

Meanwhile, in quantities of families, the abandonment of church
allegiance had deprived the children of an occasionally effective
teacher of decent behavior.  Some parents were able to fill the
vacuum themselves; others were not, and became dismayed that their
young not only did not recognize Bible quotations but had somehow
missed out on acquiring a clear-cut moral code.  Looking round for
someone to blame for what had happened, such parents were likely to
fasten upon the public schools, arguing that to all their other
duties the schools must add the task of moral instruction.  There
were other parents whose conscientious study of psychological
principles, including the Freudian, and whose somewhat imperfect
digestion of the ideas of progressive educators so filled them with
uncertainty as to what moral teachings to deliver, and whether any
sort of discipline might not damage young spirits, that these young
spirits became--at least for the time being--brats of a singular
offensiveness.  And even if there had always been brats in the
world, it was easy for observers of such families to conclude that
moral behavior was indeed deteriorating, and that basketball
scandals and football scandals and teenage holdup gangs and
official corruption in Washington were all signs of a widespread
ethical decay.

This conclusion was and is of doubtful validity, I am convinced.
There has probably never been a generation some members of which
did not wonder whether the next generation was not bound for hell
in a handcar.  It may be argued that at the mid-century the manners
of many teenagers have suffered from their mothers' and fathers'
disbelief in stern measures; but that their ethical standards are
inferior, by and large, to those of their predecessors seems to me
doubtful indeed.  As for today's adults, there are undoubtedly many
whose lack of connection with organized religion, has left them
without any secure standards; but as I think of the people I have
actually known over a long period of time, I detect no general
deterioration of the conscience: those I see today do a good many
things that their grandparents would have considered improper, but
few things they would have regarded as paltry or mean.  And there
has been taking place among these people, and in the country at
large, a change of attitude that I am convinced is of great
importance.  During the half century the answer to the ancient
question, "Who is my neighbor?" has been receiving a broader and
broader answer.

There are still ladies and gentlemen who feel that they are of the
elect, and that the masses of their fellow countrymen are of
negligible importance; but their snobbery is today less
complacently assured, more defiant, than in the days when Society
was a word to conjure with.  The insect on the leaf is less often
found "proclaiming on the too much life among his hungry brothers
in the dust."  There are still business executives with an inflated
sense of their own value in the scheme of things, but the "studied
insolence" which Mark Sullivan noted among the coal operators of
1902 when confronted by the union representatives and the President
of the United States, and which magnates often displayed on the
witness stand in those days, is no longer to be seen (except
perhaps among such underworld gentry as Mr. Frank Costello).

I recall a college classmate of mine who in 1912 said that he knew
about a hundred of the five hundred members of his class, and
although he knew it sounded snobbish, weren't those after all about
all that mattered?  His equivalent today might say such a thing,
but pretty surely he would recognize as he did so that he was
flying in the teeth of accepted opinion.  People who today look at
what were originally the servants' quarters in an old mansion, or
even in a swank apartment of the 1920 vintage, are shocked at their
meagerness: is it possible, they ask themselves, that decent men
and women could have had such disregard for the human needs of men
and women living cheek by jowl with them?

The concept of the national income, the idea of measuring the
distribution of this income, the idea of the national economy as an
entity affected by the economic behavior of every one of us, the
very widespread interest in surveying sociologically the status of
this and that group of Americans the country over, in the
conviction that their fortunes are interdependent with ours: all
these have developed during this half century.  The ideal of
equality of educational opportunity never before commanded such
general acceptance.  In previous chapters of this book I have tried
to show that in recent years there has been a marked shift of
attitudes toward our most disadvantaged group, the Negroes, and no
less noticeably in the South than elsewhere; and that the concept
of responsibility to the general public has become more and more
widespread among the managers of pivotal businesses.  The amount of
time which individual men and women give to good works in the
broadest sense--including church work, volunteer hospital work,
parent-teacher associations, the Boy Scouts, the Red Cross, the
League of Women Voters, local symphony orchestras, the World
Federalists, the American Legion, the service activities of Rotary,
and so on endlessly--is in its total incalculable.  (There are
communities, I am told, where the number of people who engage in
money raising for the churches is larger than the number of
churchgoers.)  In sum, our sense of public obligation has expanded.

The change has had its amusing aspects.  There comes to one's mind
Anne Cleveland's cartoon of a Vassar girl dining with her parents
and exclaiming, "How can I explain the position of organized labor
to Father when you keep passing me chocolate sauce?"  One thinks of
a banker's daughter of one's acquaintance, who in her first job was
much more deeply interested in the plight of the file clerks, whom
she regarded as underpaid, than in helping the company make money.
And of the receipt by Dr. Ralph Bunche, in the spring of 1951, of
no less than thirteen honorary degrees in rapid succession, the
singular unanimity of his choice by so many institutions undoubtedly
reflecting in part a delight at finding an unexceptionable
opportunity to pay tribute to a Negro.

That the change should meet, here and there, with heated
resistance, is likewise natural.  The democratic ideal imposes a
great strain upon the tolerance and understanding of humankind.  So
we find a conscious and active anti-Semitism invading many a
suburban community which once took satisfaction in its homogeneity
and now finds it can no longer live to itself; or a savage anti-
Negro feeling rising in an industrial town in which Negroes were
formerly few and far between.  And here one should add a footnote
about the behavior of our armed forces abroad.  For a variety of
not easily defined reasons--including undoubtedly the traditionally
proletarian position of the foreign-language-speaking immigrant in
the United States--there is an obscure feeling among a great many
Americans that the acceptance of the principle of human dignity
stops at the water's edge: that a man who would be fiercely
concerned over an apparent injustice to a fellow private in the
American Army may be rude to Arabs, manhandle Koreans, and cheat
Germans, and not lose status thereby--and this, perhaps, at the
very moment when his representatives in Congress are appropriating
billions for the aid of the very sorts of people of whom he is so

Yet in spite of these adverse facts there has been, I am convinced,
an increasing overall acceptance in America of what Dr. Frank
Tannenbaum has called "the commitment to equality . . . spiritual
equality."  Whether this rising sense of identity of interest with
our fellow citizens should be labeled as religious, as Dr.
Tannenbaum and other speakers seemed to feel at the Waldorf Round
Table of April, 1951, seems to me a matter of playing with words.
Whether, as Walter H. Wheeler, Jr., suggested at that meeting, we
may be "depleting and living off inherited spiritual capital, to
put it in business language," is far from certain.  Yet at any rate
this may be said:  If we as a people do not obey the first and
great commandment as numerously and fervently as we used to, at
least we have been doing fairly well with the second.


We come now to another question to which the answer must be even
more two-sided and uncertain.  Does the all-American standard, the
all-American culture to which I devoted Chapter 15, threaten
quality?  Are we achieving a mass of second-rate education, second-
rate culture, second-rate thinking, and squeezing out the first-

The charge that we are indeed doing this comes in deafening volume.
To quote no less a sage than T. S. Eliot:  "We can assert with some
confidence that our own period is one of decline; that the
standards of culture are lower than they were fifty years ago; and
that the evidences of this decline are visible in every department
of human activity."  And if this seems a rather general indictment,
without special reference to the United States, it may be added
that Mr. Eliot has given abundant evidence that he is out of
sympathy with the American trend, preferring as he does a "graded
society" in which "the lower class still exists."

One could pile up a mountain of quotations by critics of the
American drift, playing the changes upon the two notions that,
according to C. Hartley Grattan, account for the Katzenjammer of
American writers today:

(1) a feeling . . . that the values by which men have lived these
many years are today in an advanced state of decomposition, with no
replacements in sight; and (2) that whatever a man's private values
may be, he cannot expect in any case consistently to act on them
successfully because the individual is, in the present-day world,
at the mercy of ever more oppressive and arbitrary institutions.

In other words, that the man of original bent--the writer, painter,
musician, architect, philosopher, or intellectual or spiritual
pioneer or maverick of any sort--not only faces what Eugene O'Neill
called the "sickness of today," which in Lloyd Morris's phrasing
has "resulted from the death of the old God and the failure of
science and materialism to give any satisfactory new one," but must
also confront a world in which the biggest rewards for literary
creation go to manufacturers of sexy costume romances; in which the
Broadway theater, after a glorious period of fresh creation in the
nineteen-twenties, is almost in the discard, having succumbed to
the high cost of featherbedding labor and the competition of the
movies; in which the movies in their turn, after a generation of
richly recompensing those who could attract audiences by the
millions and stifling those whose productions had doubtful box-
office value, are losing ground to television; in which the highest
television acclaim goes to Milton Berle rather than to Burr
Tillstrom; and in which the poet finds his market well-nigh gone.
One might sum up the charge in another way by saying that the
dynamic logic of mass production, while serving admirably to bring
us good automobiles and good nylons, enforces mediocrity on the
market for intellectual wares.

This is a very severe charge.  But there are a number of matters to
be considered and weighed before one is ready for judgment upon it.

One is the fact that those who have most eloquently lamented the
hard plight of the man or woman of creative talent have chiefly
been writers, and more especially avant-garde writers and their
more appreciative critics, and that the position occupied by these
people has been a somewhat special one.

During the years immediately preceding World War I the inventers
and innovators in American literature were in no such prevailing
mood of dismay.  On the contrary, they were having a high old time.
In Chicago, such men as Vachel Lindsay, Edgar Lee Masters, Sherwood
Anderson, Ring Lardner, and Carl Sandburg were experimenting with
gusto and confidence.  In New York, the young Bohemians of
Greenwich Village were hotly and rambunctiously enamored of a great
variety of unorthodoxies, ranging from free verse, imagism, post-
impressionism, cubism, and the realism of the "ashcan school" of
art to woman suffrage, socialism, and communism (of an innocently
idealistic variety compared with what later developed in Moscow).
When Alfred Stieglitz preached modern art at "291," when the Armory
Show was staged in 1913, when Max Eastman and John Reed crusaded
for labor, when Floyd Dell talked about the liberation of
literature, they saw before them a bright new world in which
progress would in due course bring triumph to the wild notions of
such heralds of the new enlightenment as themselves.

But World War I brought an immense disillusionment.  No longer did
the millennium seem just around the corner.  And the prevailing
mood shifted.

The novelists of the Lost Generation concentrated their attention
upon the meannesses and cruelties of contemporary life, and often
their keynote was one of despair.  Mencken led a chorus of scoffers
at American vulgarity and sentimentality, not indignantly but
cynically; when asked why he continued to live in a land in which
he found so little to revere, he asked, "Why do men go to zoos?"
Sinclair Lewis lampooned Main Street and George F. Babbitt; Scott
Fitzgerald underscored the baseness of respectable folk who went to
Jay Gatsby's lavish parties and then deserted him in his hour of
need.  And many of the avant-garde and their admirers and imitators
went to Paris, where Gertrude Stein said that "the future is not
important any more," and Hemingway's characters in The Sun Also
Rises acted as if it were not.  But in a world without hope one
could still cherish art, the one thing left that was worth while,
keeping it aloof from politics and business; and one could
particularly cherish that art which it was most difficult for the
vulgarians of politics and business to comprehend.  To these
refugees from twentieth-century America "difficulty itself became a
primary virtue," as Van Wyck Brooks has remarked: they paid special
homage to the aristocratic elaborations of Henry James, the
subtleties of the recluse Marcel Proust, the scholarly allusiveness
of Eliot, and the linguistic puzzles of Joyce.  And a pattern was
set, quite different from the pattern of 1910.  To have a literary
conscience was to take a bleak view of American life, human life in
general, and the way the world was going; and also of the ability
of any readers but a few to understand and appreciate true literary

This credo was to prove astonishingly durable.  During the nineteen-
thirties it had to contend with another emotional force.  The
economy had broken down, revolution was in the wind (or so it
seemed to many at the time), and many writers felt a generous urge
to condemn the cruelty of capitalism to "one-third of a nation,"
and to espouse the cause of embattled labor.  Thus they abandoned
hopelessness for militance.  There was an outpouring of proletarian
novels by writers whose first-hand-knowledge of factory workers was
highly limited.  Yet even among many of the writers and critics who
were most valiant in support of the common man there remained a
conviction that the man of sensibility and integrity must
inevitably write in terms intelligible only to the very uncommon
man; and we beheld the diverting spectacle of authors and students
of advanced composition returning from mass meetings held on behalf
of sharecroppers and Okies to pore over the sacred texts of Henry
James, who would have ignored sharecroppers, and Eliot, who was
certainly out of tune with the Okies.

During World War II the impulse to defend labor turned into an
impulse to defend the G.I. against the military brass.  The older
impulse to depict the world as a dismal place turned into an
impulse to show how brutal men at war could be (including, often,
the very G.I. who was supposed to engage the reader's sympathy);
and the belief that quality was bound to go unappreciated by all
but a very few turned into a general pessimism over the future of
culture, a pessimism that seemed almost to welcome defeat for any
sort of excellence.

"'It must be highly embarrassing (at least I hope it is)," wrote W.
H. Auden in 1948, "for living American novelists to be told . . .
that they have produced the only significant literature between the
two wars. . . .  Coming from Europe, my first, my strongest, my
most abiding impression is that no body of literature, written at
any time or in any place, is so uniformly depressing.  It is a
source of continual astonishment to me that the nation which has
the world-wide reputation of being the most optimistic, the most
gregarious, and the freest on earth should see itself through the
eyes of its most sensitive members as a society of helpless
victims, shady characters, and displaced persons. . . .  In novel
after novel one encounters heroes without honor or history; heroes
who succumb so monotonously to temptation that they cannot truly be
said to be tempted at all; heroes who, even if they are successful
in a worldly sense, remain nevertheless but the passive recipients
of good fortune; heroes whose sole moral virtue is a stoic
endurance of pain and disaster."

Could it be that such novelists have been following a fashion set
longer ago than they realize?  That one reason why sales of novels
in very recent years have been disappointing is that, as Mr.
Grattan has suggested, "contemporary writers appear to have given
up before contemporary readers are ready to do so," and that
perhaps the readers are today ahead of the writers?  That the
continuing notion among many advanced writers that only difficult
writing is good writing has led them to pay too little attention to
the art of communicating with numerous readers who may not be such
oafs as they suppose?  And that a sort of contagion of defeatism
among literary folk today should lead one to accept with a certain
reserve their unhappy conclusions concerning the state of American

Let us note their laments and look a little further.


One like myself who has worked for a great many years for a
magazine which nowadays can pay its authors no more than it did a
decade ago, because it has to pay its typographers and shipping men
so much more, is not likely to be complacent about the lot of the
man of letters today.  Nor is one who has felt he was waging a
steady uphill fight on behalf of what he perhaps fondly considered
distinguished journalism--uphill because there were constantly
appearing new magazines aimed at readers by the millions, and
because advertisers tended to want to reach those millions--going
to be complacent about the condition of literary institutions.  It
seems to me undeniable that the great success of the mass-
circulation magazines and the rise of the staff-written magazines
have between them made it harder for the free-lance author who
lacks the popular touch and who will not do potboiling, or cannot
do it successfully, and who has no other assured source of income,
to live comfortably.  But then he almost never has had things very
easy financially.  And there is this to be said: one reason why
magazines with severely high standards find the going difficult is
that they have no monopoly of material of high quality, for during
the past few decades an increasing amount of such material has been
finding a place in the mass periodicals.  (For a couple of random
examples, let me cite Winston Churchill's memoirs, appearing in
Life, and Faulkner's short stories, coming out in the Saturday
Evening Post.)  Furthermore, the number of writers of talent who
made good incomes by writing for the mass magazines without the
sacrifice of an iota of their integrity is much larger than one
might assume from the talk of the avant-gardists.  The picture is a
mixed one.

So too with regard to books.  The market for the output of the
"original" publishers, meaning those who sell newly-written books
at standard prices, chiefly through the bookstores, is somewhat
larger than before the war, but it is manifest that price
increases, reflecting high labor costs, have deterred many buyers.
The share of a few very successful writers in the total authors'
revenue increases; and it becomes more difficult than it used to be
for those whose books are not likely to sell more than a few
thousand copies (these include nearly all poets) to get their work
accepted.  Yet here again the situation is not as black as it has
been painted.  I agree with Bernard DeVoto that no book really
worth publishing fails of publication by some unit of a very
diversified industry; and I would add that while there is trash on
the best-seller lists, most of the books which reach those lofty
positions, with very pleasant results for their authors'
pocketbooks, are among the best of their time.

And there is more to it than this.  For there are also numerous
book clubs, at least two of which sell books by the hundreds of
thousands each month.  There are the quarterly Condensed Books
brought out by the Reader's Digest--four or five novels or
nonfiction books condensed in one volume--which, launched in 1950,
were selling by early 1952 at the rate of more than a million
apiece.  And there are the paper-bound reprint houses, whose
volumes, priced at twenty-five or thirty-five cents for the
newsstand and drugstore trade, are bought in phenomenal lots.  In
the year 1950 the total was no less than 214 million; in 1951 the
figure had jumped to 231 million.

Two-thirds or more of these paper-bound books, to be sure, were
novels or mysteries--thus falling into classifications too
inclusive to be reassuring as to the public taste--and some were
rubbish by any tolerable standard (the publishers of such wares
having learned, as one cynic has put it, that you can sell almost
anything adorned on the cover with a picture connoting sex or
violence, or preferably both, as in a picture of a luscious girl
getting her dress ripped off by a gunman).  But consider these
sales figures (as of January 1952) for a few paper-bound books:
Tennessee Williams' A Streetcar Named Desire, in play form, over
half a million; George Orwell's Nineteen Eighty-four, over three-
quarters of a million; Norman Mailer's The Naked and the Dead, over
a million and a quarter; Ruth Benedict's Patterns of Culture,
400,000; and--to cite an incontrovertibly classical example--a
translation of The Odyssey (with an abstract cover design),
350,000.  And remember that these sales, which are above and beyond
book-club sales and regular bookstore sales, have been achieved in
a nation of avid magazine readers.  It is true that the financial
returns to the author from such low-priced books are meager: he
gets less revenue from a million of them than from 20,000 sold at
standard prices.  Nevertheless there is an interesting phenomenon
here.  There is a big American market for good writing if it and
the price are within easy reach.

Let us look at the market for art.  The painter of today faces two
great difficulties.  The first is that his work is offered to the
public at high prices (if he can get any price at all) because he
can sell only his original work, to one collector or institution,
and cannot dispose of thousands at a time; and collectors with
ample money are scarce.  The second is that the abler young
painters of the day have mostly swung all the way to the abstract,
which to most potential buyers is about as comprehensible as
contemporary poetry.  Yet the signs of interest among the public
are striking.  Forbes Watson is authority for the statement that
there were more sales of paintings in the nineteen-forties than in
all the previous history of the United States; that in the year
1948 there were a hundred exhibitions of American art in American
museums; and that the total attendance at art exhibitions that year
was over 50 million.  One should also take note of the greatly
enlarged number of local museums; of the lively promotion of an
interest in art by many universities and colleges; the rising sale
of reproductions, in book form and otherwise; and also the recent
sharp increase in the number of Sunday amateur dabblers with a
paintbrush.  Lyman Bryson reports that the lowest estimate he has
been able to find of the number of people who paint in the United
States today is 300,000.  And the Department of Commerce says that
the sales of art supplies went up from four million dollars in 1939
to forty million in 1949--a tremendous leap.  The suspicion comes
over one that there is something stirring here, too, and that the
plight of the contemporary artist, like the plight of the
contemporary writer, may be partly due to the fact that the market
for his output may not yet be geared to the potential demand.

We turn to music--and confront an astonishing spectacle.

In 1900 there was only a handful of symphony orchestras in the
country; by May 1951 there were 659 "symphonic groups"--including
32 professional, 343 community, 231 college, and a scattering of
miscellaneous amateur groups.  Fifteen hundred American cities and
towns now support annual series of concerts.  Summer music
festivals attract audiences which would have been unimaginable even
thirty years ago.  To quote Cecil Smith,

The dollar-hungry countries of Europe are setting up music
festivals by the dozen, not to give American tourists the music
they would not hear at home, but to make sure they do not stay at
home because of the lack of music in Europe.  The programs at
Edinburgh, Strasbourg, Amsterdam, Florence, and Aix-en-Provence are
designed as competition for Tanglewood, Bethlehem, Ravinia, the
Cincinnati Zoo, and the Hollywood Bowl.

Mr. Smith cites further facts of interest: that the Austin, Texas,
symphony recently took over a drive-in movie for outdoor summer
concerts; that Kentucky hill people come in their bare feet when
the Louisville orchestra plays in Berea; and that "an all-
Stravinsky program, conducted by the composer, strikes Urbana,
Illinois, as a perfectly normal attraction."

A good deal of the credit for this extraordinary state of affairs
goes to the radio.  The first network broadcast of a symphony
orchestra was held in 1926, the first sponsored one came in 1929,
the Metropolitan Opera was put on the air in 1931, and Toscanini
was engaged as conductor of the NBC orchestra in 1937; by 1938 it
was estimated that the Music Appreciation Hour, conducted by Walter
Damrosch, was being heard each week by seven million children in
some 70,000 schools, and that the Ford Sunday Evening Hour,
featuring the Detroit Symphony, was fifth among all radio programs
in popularity.  Millions upon millions of people were getting music
of all sorts--popular, jazz, and classical--in such quantity, year
after year, that businessmen and housewives and school children who
had never until a few years earlier heard a symphony orchestra or a
string quartet were getting an ample opportunity to find out for
themselves whether "Roll Out the Barrel" or "One O'Clock Jump" or
Beethoven's Seventh sounded best on a fifth or tenth hearing.  In
the late nineteen-forties the radio network production of classical
music began to weaken as television made spectacular inroads upon
the radio business; but long before this another way of
communicating music had jumped into prominence.

During the nineteen-twenties the phonograph record business had
been threatened with virtual extinction by the rise of radio.  But
presently it began to expand: people who had developed a lively
interest in music began to want it on their own terms.  The
expansion was accelerated by the wild vogue of jazz, whose more
serious votaries soon learned that if you were to become a really
serious student of what Benny Goodman and Duke Ellington were
producing, you must collect old recordings and become a connoisseur
of Handy, Beiderbecke, and Armstrong.  By the nineteen-forties,
young people who in earlier years would have gone off dancing of an
evening were finding that it was very agreeable to sit on the floor
and listen to a record-player, with a few bottles of beer to wash
the music down.  Many whose taste in books and in art was very
limited were not only becoming able to identify the most famous
symphonies by their first few notes, but were developing a pride in
their acquaintance with the works of Bach's obscure contemporaries,
and in their connoisseurship of the comparative merits of
recordings by various orchestras.  A very rough estimate of the
sales of records during the year 1951, made by Billboard magazine,
put the grand total at some 190 million--more than one for every
man, woman, and child in the United States--and the total sale of
records in the "classical" category at perhaps ten to fifteen per
cent of that 190 million: let us say something like twenty to
thirty million classical records.  To give a single example: as
many as 20,000 sets of Wanda Landowska's harpsichord recordings of
the Goldberg Variations were sold during the first three months
after they were issued.  And a shrewd student of American culture
tells me that as he goes about the United States he keeps being
told, in place after place, "Our town is sort of unusual.  I
suppose the most exciting thing, to us, that's going on here isn't
anything in business but the way we've put over our symphony
orchestra (or our string quartet, or our community chorus)."

Verily, as one looks about the field of the arts, the picture is
confused.  Here is an incredible boom in public interest in music,
along with expanding audiences for the ballet, old-style and new-
style.  Here is the Broadway theater almost ready for the pulmotor--
and local civic theaters and college theaters in what look like a
promising adolescence.  Here are the movies, beloved by millions
(and berated by highbrow critics) for decades, losing audiences
little by little to television, which has not yet outgrown a
preposterous crudity.  Here is architecture, which has outgrown its
earlier imitation of old European styles and is producing superb
industrial buildings along with highly experimental and sometimes
absurd modern residences--while the peripheries of our great
cities, whether New York or Chicago or St. Louis or Los Angeles,
display to the bus traveler from airport to town almost no trace of
the handiwork of any architects at all.  Here are lovely (if
monotonous) motor parkways--and along the other main highways a
succession of roadtown eyesores (garages, tourist courts, filling
stations, billboards, second-hand auto salesrooms, junk dealers,
and more billboards) which make the motor parkways seem, by
contrast, like avenues for escapists.

Is not the truth of the situation perhaps something like this:
Here is a great nation which is conducting an unprecedented
experiment.  It has made an incredible number of people, previously
quite unsophisticated and alien to art or contemptuous of it,
prosperous by any previous standard known to man.  These multitudes
offer a huge market for him who would sell them equipment or
entertainment that they can understand and enjoy.  To compare them
with the people who in other lands have been lovers and students of
literature and the arts is grossly unfair.  They are not an elite,
but something else again.  Let us say it in italics:  THIS IS

The job before those Americans who would like to see the United
States a Greece rather than a Carthage is to try to develop,
alongside the media of entertainment and equipment which satisfy
these people's present needs, others which will satisfy more
exacting tastes and will be on hand for them when they are ready
for more rewarding fare.  The problem is an economic one as well as
an artistic one.  Whether it can be solved is still anybody's
guess.  But in a day when, despite the discouragement of many
literati, much of the best writing in the world is being done in
the United States; when the impoverishment of foreign institutions
of learning has made American universities no mere followers on the
road of learning, but leaders despite themselves, attracting
students from many continents; and when, willy nilly, a burden of
responsibility for the cultural condition of the world rests
heavily upon America, it should do us good to look at the army of
music lovers that we have produced.  For if this is what auspicious
economic conditions can bring in the area of one of the great arts,
possibly the miracle may be effected elsewhere too, and the all-
American culture may prove to have been, not the enemy of
excellence, but its seed-bed.

Walt Whitman saw the possibilities when he wrote, fancifully
depicting the arrival of the muse, a migrant from ancient Greece to
the New World:

     By thud of machinery and shrill steam-whistle undismay'd,
     Bluff'd not a bit by drain-pipe, gasometers, artificial
     Smiling and pleas'd with palpable intent to stay,
     She's here, install'd amid the kitchen-ware!


Yet there is still another question to ask.

The other day, running through some old papers of mine, I came upon
a copy of a Commencement address I had once delivered.  It was
entitled "In a Time of Apprehension," and in it I had spoken of the
fact that many people were feeling a "sense of doom, a sense of
impending disaster."  A good deal of what I had said then seemed to
me, as I reread the address, to fit the mood of the mid-century.
But the date on the manuscript was June, 1938--not only before the
atom bomb and the Cold War, but before World War II.

Since much longer ago than that there has been from time to time in
the minds of many Americans a feeling of uneasy tension, combined
often with one of frustration: a feeling that mighty, unmanageable
forces might be taking one toward that "impending disaster," and
there was nothing one could do about it.  In general one might
ascribe this mental state to the difficulty of adjusting ourselves
emotionally to life in what Graham Wallas called the "Great
Society"--a complex society in which the fate of a Kansas farmer or
a Syracuse druggist may be determined by a break in the New York
stock market, or a government decision in Washington, or an
invasion in Korea.  But more specifically there was first the World
War of 1914-1918, with its demonstration that something that had
happened in Sarajevo--where and what was Sarajevo?--could turn the
lives of Americans upside down; then there was the Great
Depression, with its solar-plexus blow to men and women who had
thought that their personal industry and efficiency could not go
without reward; then the march of Hitlerism and the coming of World
War II, which involved young men in lethal battle in places they
had never even heard of a year before; then the rise of that other
distant but implacable menace, Soviet Russia, and the apprehension
that a new war might break out at any moment, and the added terror
of the atom bomb.  And through all these latter years there were
the uncertainties involved in government emergency regulations such
as the draft, which as managed at the mid-century seemed to many
young Americans to make a travesty of the idea of free will.

There is probably no one who has not had at one time or another
this feeling of being as helpless in the grip of great events as a
passenger strapped to his seat in an airliner roaring through a
fog.  The businessman making out his budget for the coming year, or
signing a long-term contract; the young couple planning marriage;
the undergraduate wondering whether to go on to law school--all are
likely to feel that any decision they may make carries an implicit
rider, "Unless all hell busts loose."  And anyone presenting, as I
have been doing in this book, the thesis that we in the United
States during the past half century have on the whole made our
country a better place to live in, can almost hear angry replies:
"How can you say that, when about all we have succeeded in doing is
to move from a time of assurance to one of perpetual emergency?"
The fear of the unpredictable colors all our lives--and never more
so than during the past few years.

In that Commencement address of 1938 I said that we were living in
a time of panic and of irrational opinions born in panic, and
remarked that what happens during such times is that people look
for scapegoats on whom they can take out their anger at the
invisible forces which keep them in jeopardy.  This, too, has been
happening since the aggressive intentions of the Soviet Government
became transparently clear to most Americans--say about the year
1946 or 1947.  We have been looking for American scapegoats on whom
we can blame our present predicament, and whose discovery and
punishment might make us feel secure again.  And so panicky,
irrational, and long-continuing has been the search, and so
widespread have been the suspicions and fears that it has aroused,
that Americans face in these mid-century years the disturbing
question whether under such circumstances they can maintain the
freedom that has been their most prized heritage.

This is not simply a question of the moment.  For the contest with
organized communism may, for all we know, last a decade--or two--or
three--whether or not it flames into full-scale war.  There are
those who say that most living Americans may have to look forward
to its continuance for the rest of their lives.  That will mean
continuing strain, suspense, uncertainty; and continuing danger of
irrational reactions to that strain.

The specific form that our scapegoat hunting has taken in recent
years has been due, first of all, to the peculiar history and
nature of the Communist party in America.  During the Depression
years it ensnared some good and public-spirited men and women to
whom it seemed simply an organization dedicated to radical action
to solve the problems that were then racking the country.  If it
had Russian connections, this didn't bother many of them very much,
for to them at that time Russia actually seemed a place which had
found the cure for depressions; and besides, during the latter
nineteen-thirties--until August, 1939--the Soviet Government was
making common cause with the democracies against Hitler.  If it was
a secret organization, if it involved its members in constant
deceit, this they innocently swallowed as a necessity for a hard-
boiled militant group.  Its converts were not very numerous, but
many of them were strategically placed: they were mostly
intellectuals who could be insinuated into positions of influence
in government departments or in "front" organizations, and people
who, as labor leaders, could get control of unions.

"The truth was," as I wrote in Since Yesterday in 1940, "that many
of the young rebels had embraced--or at least dallied with--
communism because they saw it as the end-station of the road of
disillusionment.  First one saw that the going order was not
working right; then one progressed to the consideration of
reforms . . . and decided that half-measures would not suffice to
redeem America; one went on to the idea that nothing short of
revolution would serve; and there at the terminus of one's journey
sat Karl Marx waiting to ask one's unquestioning devotion, there was
the Communist Party promising to make a clean sweep of all that was
hateful in American life.  How welcome to find the end of the road,
how easy to be able to ascribe everything one disliked to

So things looked to most of those who got hooked.  Many of them
unhooked themselves when the 180-degree turns in Communist policy
in 1939 and 1941 made it clear to anyone in his senses that the
Party was in absolute subjection to a cynical foreign power; but
others could not or would not, and continued their machinations
under such clever disguises that so highly placed an innocent as
Henry A. Wallace could as late as 1948 be deluded into imagining
that he was not being used by them for their conspiratorial

Because the Communist party was conspiratorial and imposed secrecy
upon its members, the job of ferreting them out of government
departments, and organizations for the support of this or that
public policy, and labor unions, was difficult.  Because a great
many fine, patriotic people had worked in these departments or
organizations or unions, it was almost inevitable that some of
these people too should come under suspicion.  Because Communists
were accustomed to lying about their connections, the question
naturally arose whether these loyal citizens, too, might not be
lying when they affirmed their loyalty.  Because American foreign
policy had not prevented the build-up of Soviet power, or the
victory of the Chinese Communists over the Chiang Kai-shek
government, a further question arose in many suspicious minds: were
these people about whom they had their doubts responsible for the
insecure plight of America and the uncertainty in which we were all
living?  Because most of the converts to communism had been
radicals, and they had infiltrated most successfully into radical
or liberal organizations, the suspicion took another form in
undiscriminating minds: anybody who had any ideas which looked
queer to his neighbors might be a Communist, or something like a
Communist.  And because these suspicions were rife, there was a
wide-open chance for zealots (of whom the most furious were some of
the very people who had got hooked in the nineteen-thirties, and
were working out a savage atonement for their error) and for
ambitious politicians to brand many decent and conscientious
citizens as virtual traitors, thus placing upon them a stigma which
they might never live down.  The chain of circumstances that had
begun with Communist secrecy reached very far indeed.

And it has reached even farther than that.  For, as a result of the
inquisitions of various congressional committees, and the
government loyalty checks, and the strange drama of Alger Hiss, and
the fulminations of Senator McCarthy, and the terrorization of
parts of the entertainment world by the publication of Red
Channels, and the charges made against many school and college
teachers, a great many useful and productive people have been
frightened into a nervous conformity.  If a college instructor,
lecturing on economic theory, reaches the point in his lecture
where he should explain the respects in which Karl Marx was right
in his economic diagnosis, he is in a dither: suppose some neurotic
student should report that he is teaching communism?  If a
schoolteacher so much as mentions Russia, she wonders what tongues
may start wagging in the Parent-Teacher Association.  If a
businessman gets in the mail an appeal for funds for European
refugees, he looks uneasily at the letterhead and wonders if it may
represent some group he'd rather not get entangled with.  If a
politician running for the city council campaigns for better
housing, he knows well that his opponent will probably call his
proposal "communistic," or at any rate "leftist"--an inclusive term
which might be applied to almost anything, but has vaguely
opprobrious overtones and may lose him votes by the thousands.  At
many a point in American life, adventurous and constructive thought
is stifled by apprehension.

That behind this uneasy scapegoat hunting is the sense of
frustration produced by living under the tensions of an uneasy day
was manifest during the uproar over the removal of General
MacArthur in the spring of 1951.  For perhaps the most striking
thing about that great debate was not the speeches and counter-
speeches, or the interminable sessions of the Joint Congressional
Committee which interviewed officials at length, but the floods of
venomous letters received by newspaper editors and radio
commentators who did not favor the great General.  It was almost as
if some wellspring of poison had been tapped.  One realized then
how many people there were whom the state of international affairs
generally, and the war in Korea in particular, had strained beyond
their endurance: they had to throw something at somebody, in a
paroxysm of anger.  The outright expression of this rancor was
short-lived, and when Bobby Thomson hit his home run, and whole
communities were all just Giant fans and Dodger fans again, one
could recognize once more the familiar good humor of the American
democracy.  Yet the basic question remained:  How can we maintain
mutual trust, and an invigorating freedom of thought and
expression, in a nation which for an indefinite time must carry
heavy and uncertain responsibilities abroad, and meanwhile be
unrelaxed in its armed strength?

We are by nature a sanguine people, but never before have we been
subjected to the sort of prolonged strain that we feel today, and
our patience, humor, and courage are being sorely tested.

Chapter 18

What Have We Got Here?

For the March 4, 1951, issue of This Week, a magazine that goes as
a supplement to over ten million readers of Sunday newspapers, the
editor, William I. Nichols, wrote an article (later reprinted in
the Reader's Digest) called "Wanted: A New Name for 'Capitalism.'"
Arguing that the word is no longer the right one to fit our present
American system, because in too many people's minds, especially in
other parts of the world, "it stands for the primitive economic
system of the nineteenth century," Mr. Nichols asked:  "How shall
we describe this system--imperfect, but always improving, and
always capable of further improvement--where men move forward
together, working together, building together, producing always
more and more, and sharing together the rewards of their increased
production?"  He said he had heard various suggestions, such as
"the new capitalism," "democratic capitalism," "economic
democracy," "industrial democracy," "distributism," "mutualism,"
and "productivism," but wondered if there might not be a better
term.  And he invited readers to write in their own suggestions in
a coupon printed in the magazine.

Fifteen thousand coupons came back with suggestions.  "Never in my
whole editorial experience," said Mr. Nichols afterward, "have I
touched so live a nerve."

Perhaps one reason for this extraordinary response was that the
idea of asking readers to do something simple and easy about an
idea thrown at them--"as if it were a box-top contest," as Mr.
Nichols said--was an apt journalistic stroke.  But surely it also
suggested the existence in the United States of a very widespread
feeling that we've got something here--something working reasonably
well and at any rate going full tilt--that defies all the old

And I suspect that one reason why so many people feel this way is
that here in the United States we have not been constructing a
system as such, but tinkering with and repairing and rebuilding,
piece by piece, an old system to make it run better, as I tried to
suggest in the chapter on "The Revolt of the American Conscience";
and that accordingly we have arrived at a transformed product which
might be likened to an automobile continually repaired, while
running, by means of new parts taken from any old car which seemed
to suit the immediate purpose of the repairers, with the result
that in the end it is hard to say whether what we have is a Buick
or a Cadillac or a Ford.

In the various chapters of this book I have tried to show how this
patchwork process has taken place.  In the nineteenth century we
had in the United States a combination of federal and state and
local governments--the federal component being small and very
limited in its duties--which left business to operate pretty much
as it pleased.  But these governments permitted businessmen to
organize corporations which were given special rights and
privileges, and while these rights and privileges worked
wonderfully in providing incentives for men to build up lively and
inventive businesses, they had other unforeseen effects.  They made
the lone workman, whose income was determined by the Iron Law of
Wages, pretty nearly helpless before his employer; they gave an
enormous share of the fruits of the enterprise to this employer;
and they also gave huge power to the men who controlled the
supplies of money without which the employers found it difficult to
operate.  At the turn of the century America seemed in danger of
becoming a land in which the millionaires had more and more and the
rest had less and less, and where a few financiers had a strangle
hold, not only on the country's economic apparatus, but on its
political apparatus too.

This outraged the democratic spirit of the country, the national
sense of fair play.  So we went to work to change things--not by
revolution but by a series of experimental revisions of the system.
When it broke down badly in the Great Depression the repair work
and reconstruction were pretty drastic, and some was foolish, but
the same basic principle of unrevolutionary and experimental change
prevailed.  After some years of this there was considerable
uncertainty whether the engine would ever run again without
wheezing and knocking.  But when World War II came along, we
discovered that if Washington jammed the accelerator right down to
the floor boards the engine began to run smoothly and fast.  And
when the war was over, and Washington released the accelerator, it
still hummed.  What had happened to bring about this astonishing

The answer, in brief, is that through a combination of patchwork
revisions of the system--tax laws, minimum wage laws, subsidies and
guarantees and regulations of various sorts, plus labor union
pressures and new management attitudes--we had repealed the Iron
Law of Wages.  We had brought about a virtually automatic
redistribution of income from the well-to-do to the less well-to-
do.  And this did not stall the machine but actually stepped up its
power.  Just as an individual business seemed to run best when it
plowed part of its profits into improvements, so the business
system as a whole seemed to run better if you plowed some of the
national income into improvements in the income and status of the
lower income groups, enabling them to buy more goods and thus to
expand the market for everybody.  We had discovered a new frontier
to open up: the purchasing power of the poor.

That, it seems to me, is the essence of the Great American
Discovery.  And it has its corollary: that if you thus bring
advantages to a great lot of previously underprivileged people,
they will rise to their opportunities and, by and large, will
become responsible citizens.


At present we have a very large and powerful central government.
It continues to expand as if in response to some irresistible law
of growth--not only because of the obligations which war and Cold
War have imposed upon it, but because of our increasing
interdependence as a more and more urbanized people with more and
more complex institutions.  The government regulates business in
innumerable ways, as we saw in Chapter 16.  It constantly
interferes with the operations of the once almighty economic law of
supply and demand, the law of the market place.  It provides all
sorts of subsidies and guarantees to groups who have convinced it,
rightly or wrongly, that they need such help.  And furthermore it
acknowledges two great responsibilities, the recognition of which
was forced upon it during the miserable years of the Great
Depression.  One of these is a responsibility for seeing that
people in an economic jam are helped to their feet--if not by their
relatives and friends, or by local relief, or by state relief, then
by federal relief if necessary.  And the other is a responsibility
for seeing that the economic system as a whole does not break down.

The government therefore maintains certain control powers over the
national economy AS A WHOLE; and in a time of emergency like that
which has followed the onset of the Korean War, these powers are
extended.  But it does not try to run our individual businesses
(with certain exceptions such as the atomic power industry, which
for security purposes is an island of socialism in a sea of private
management).  For we recognize that our businesses are better run
if they remain in private hands.  The past dozen years or so have
offered a triumphant demonstration of the validity of this belief.
For they have seen privately managed American business not only do
a brilliant job of huge-scale war production, but also foster a
startling variety of advances in technology.

Nor, for that matter, does the federal government take over the
power of our state and local governments, though it subsidizes them
to do many things which they cannot adequately do unaided.  So
there is a wide distribution of governmental powers.  Our road
system, for instance, is part local, part state, and only in minor
degree federal.  Our university and college system is partly state
run, partly independent.  And our school system is mostly locally
run (by local public authority), partly church run, partly

Furthermore we have an extraordinarily wide and proliferating
assortment of voluntary institutions, associations, and societies
which in their manifold ways contribute to the public good.  Not
only universities, schools, churches, hospitals, museums,
libraries, and social agencies in great variety, but also societies
for the protection or promotion of practically everything: if you
want to feed European children, or protect our wild ducks, or
promote zoning systems, or agitate for more freedom for
corporations, or extend church work, or make boys into Boy Scouts,
or save the redwoods, you will find a private organization
dedicated to this purpose, and sometimes there will be several of
them.  There are also the foundations, offspring of idealism and
the estate tax.  And an endless range of trade associations,
professional associations, alumni and alumnae associations, service
clubs, and lodges.  As a people we are great joiners, campaigners,
and voluntary group helpers and savers and reformers and improvers
and promoters.  Get together half a dozen like-minded Americans and
pretty soon you'll have an association, an executive secretary, a
national program, and a fund-raising campaign.

Nor is it easy to draw a sharp line between the voluntary
organizations on the one hand and either business or the government
on the other.  When a good part of the money contributed in a
Community Chest campaign comes from local corporations, and a
mighty foundation draws its resources from an automobile company,
and the private air lines fly over airways maintained by the
federal government, and a university may be partly state-supported
and partly privately supported (and in addition may be subsidized
for certain research work by the federal government), the lines are
blurred indeed.  And as we saw in Chapter 16, there is constant
consultation and collaboration between people who are working on
the same problem in private business, in private public-service
organizations, in the government, and in state and private
institutions of learning.

Under such circumstances it is fair to say that the moral and
intellectual strength of the United States is based in considerable
degree upon private organizations which are as consecrated to the
idea of public duty as governmental ones could be, and in part
perform services almost indistinguishable from governmental ones,
but provide at the same time vastly more diversity and flexibility
of approach, and vastly more opportunity for the free play of
individual talent and interest, than could be harnessed in any
other way.  And that the American system as a whole is such a
mixture of different things, arrived at in such diverse,
unsystematic, and even haphazard ways, that possibly its strength
lies in the very fact that you can't put a label to it.

Over every proposal for a further change in the complicated design
of the national economic machine there is hot argument.  Will this
measure undermine the incentive to work and save and invest and
invent?  Will it give tyrannical power to Washington?  Does this
group of people, or this industry, really need aid?  Can the
government afford it?  Does it set a good or a bad precedent?
People can get apoplectic over such issues--and no wonder, for the
development of this new American system is highly experimental, and
we don't know whether we can continue to make it work.

Take a look at a few of the uncertainties.

During the postwar years inflation, though never acute, has been
almost uninterrupted, and in sum has been a serious menace to our
economic health.  We don't know whether we can maintain our fast
pace without continuing inflation.

Even before the Korean war we had pretty nearly reached the limit
of taxation--the limit beyond which the burden would become so
intolerable that the incentive to produce would be weakened and tax
evasion would become a monumental rather than a minor problem.  We
don't know whether we can reduce this load or increase our
productivity fast enough to take care of it.

If the Soviets should change their policy so convincingly that we
could ease up on military expenditures, we don't know whether we
could step up domestic production fast enough to prevent a

If total war should come, we don't know whether the federal debt
would become so astronomical that the credit of the federal
government would be shaken.

In any case, we don't know whether the government has taken on so
many financial responsibilities, since it added to its own previous
authority much of the authority once exercised by Wall Street, that
there is not a danger of a new kind of panic and financial collapse
at some time in the future--a panic resulting from the inability,
not of private financiers, but of public financiers, to maintain
the values they have undertaken to guarantee.  We think we know a
great deal more about economics than we did a generation ago, but
we cannot be surer that we are living in a New Era than were the
moguls of Wall Street who cherished that innocent faith in 1929.

And in addition, we don't know at exactly what point a policy of
aid to disadvantaged men and women degenerates into a demoralizing
policy of handouts to people who would rather accept federal
bounties than extend themselves.  Some are sure we have already
crossed this line; others are sure we haven't.

So it is just as well that every time we tinker with this
experimental system there should be energetic and protracted

But the fury of our political campaigns, and the angry disputes
over this or that congressional bill, detract our attention from a
remarkable fact: that despite the purple language which is tossed
about, very few Americans seriously propose any REALLY WHOLESALE
change in our evolving American system.  (And at that, our
stormiest debates in recent years have not been over domestic
policy but over foreign policy, or over the supposed influence of
American Communists and their friends and alleged friends over
foreign policy.)  There is a large amount of antipathy to the
administration in power in Washington.  There are numerous people
who would like to curb federal power, repeal various laws now on
the books, pare down the bureaucracy, minimize relief.  There are
others who want the government to take on new labors and new
powers, like that of running a great medical insurance program.
Yet the vast majority of Americans agree that the government should
continue to accept an overall responsibility for the satisfactory
operation of the national economy; that it should continue to
accept responsibility for relief when necessary; that it should
supervise and regulate business to SOME extent; that it should
subsidize and guarantee various groups to SOME extent--but that it
should keep its intervention limited, and should let the great bulk
of business remain under private management.  The seething debate
is over how much of this and how much of that we need, but the area
of virtual agreement is very wide; and this includes letting
private business remain in private hands.

For we believe we have demonstrated that business can be far more
resourcefully and ingeniously run by private managers; and
furthermore that these private managers can run most if not all of
it with such consideration for the general public welfare that they
can achieve for us all that government ownership would bring, plus
the efficiency, flexibility, and adventurousness which government
ownership would jeopardize--and without the danger of tyranny that
government ownership might invite.

In short, there is subconscious agreement among the vast majority
of Americans that the United States is not evolving TOWARD
socialism, but PAST socialism.


I say subconscious agreement because in our conscious thought most
of us still seem to be the victims of an old idea that has become a
delusion.  This is the idea that there is in the world a sort of
inevitable trend of progress toward socialism; that people who want
the government to do more than it is doing are therefore liberal
(if they are polite about it) or radical (if they are aggressive
about it); and that people who want the management of business to
remain in private hands are therefore conservative (if polite) or
reactionary (if aggressive).

Historically there has been ample warrant for this picture of the
political spectrum.  During the past century or so the principal
political changes have been in the direction of getting the
government to do more and more for what was thought to be the
common weal; and the people who didn't want the government to act,
who wanted to dig their heels in and stop it from acting, were
rightly known as conservatives.  By contrast the people who went
whole hog for government intervention, to the point of wanting the
government to take over the ownership and operation of the
principal private industries, in short the Socialists, were rightly
known as radicals; and those who wanted it to take over virtually
everything, by violent revolution if necessary, in short the
Communists, were rightly known as extreme radicals.  But now the
United States has been demonstrating pretty convincingly that the
system that works best of all, combining most of the genuine
advantages of governmental responsibility and of private
initiative, and avoiding the disadvantages of each, is one in which
governmental intervention is limited and private industry and
private associations have a great degree of freedom; and also that
one of the mightiest advantages of this system is the way in which
it diffuses very widely the decision-making power and the
opportunities that go with it.  In short, that the direction of
progress is now different from what people had supposed it was.

Yet the delusion persists that the trend of the times is toward
socialism--and perhaps even toward communism.  Though our
production, our wealth, our standard of living are the wonder of
the world; though Britain under Socialist leadership had to come to
us for financial aid; though, as Isabel Lundberg wrote in 1947, we
are in a position to offer tangible goods and expert technological
services to nations to whom the Russians, for all their loud talk
of material benefits, could not offer so much as a shoelace; though
our evolved system is potentially the most revolutionary force on
earth, nevertheless so fixed in our minds is this delusion that
when we face foreign problems we instinctively consider ourselves
the natural allies of conservatism, and we tend to behave as if we
wanted to stifle the natural hopes of mankind for a decenter way of
life.  Instinctively we set our faces against change.  And
preposterously we think of Soviet Russia--which has submerged the
historic Communist aim of a better life for the masses of people in
an aim of national aggrandizement through barbaric means--as if it
and its allied zealots and dupes represented radicalism,
represented a disposition of things toward which we ourselves might
drift if we did not hold fast against change; as if Soviet Russia
were something other than a despotic medievalism which was
developed out of a revolutionary attempt to meet the problems of
the nineteenth century--problems which we ourselves have long since

It is time we rid ourselves of this notion about Russia.  It is
time we realize that when we battle against communism, we are
battling against the past, not against the future.  It is time,
too, we rid ourselves of the notion that the direction of change at
home is toward socialism or communism, and that therefore loyal
Americans must stand pat.  This notion is a stultifying force in
our life.  It causes well-meaning people to imagine that anyone
with unorthodox ideas must be suspect of subversive intent.  It
tends to cramp men's imaginations into a timid conformity.  It
tends to constrict our generous impulses as a people.  Combined
with the fear of large-scale war, and especially of atomic war, it
eats away at our bold confidence in ourselves and our destiny.

We would do better to put it out of our minds, and to realize that
our sobering position of leadership in the world is founded upon
the fact that we have not stood still.  The story of the changes in
the contours of American life that we have hammered out in the
first half of this twentieth century, is a triumphant story,
however harsh may have been some of our experiences in the interim
and however obscure may be the shape of the future.  We would do
well to think of our accomplishment thus far as but the preface to
what we may accomplish in the second half of the century if we can
continue to invent, improve, and change--and can keep a good heart.
The courageous nation, like the courageous man, is not unhappy at
the thought of dangers beside the road ahead, but welcomes them as
challenges to be faced and overwhelmed along an adventurous course.


Sources and Obligations

This book grew out of an article entitled "The Big Change" which I
wrote in the spring of 1950 for the Centennial Number of Harper's
Magazine, published in October, 1950; which in turn drew upon the
text of a talk I had given on "Social Changes of Our Time" before
the Pennsylvania Historical Society on February 4, 1949, which was
printed in The Pennsylvania Magazine of History and Biography,
April, 1949.  My Centennial article dealt with the changes in the
United States between 1850 and 1950, with special attention to the
distribution of wealth and opportunity; after it appeared, I
decided to develop this theme in book form, but to concentrate upon
the period between 1900 and 1950, which offered, it seemed to me, a
more significant contrast than did the longer period.

While I was at work on the book I found that a number of other
people were laboring in more or less the same vineyard.  There was,
for example, Lewis Galantire, who had written a fine article on
"America Today" for the July, 1950, issue of Foreign Affairs,
sketching the difference between the contemporary United States and
European impressions of it.  (This article was later printed in
pamphlet form by the Overbrook Press, Stamford, Connecticut.)  Mr.
Galantire did much of the preliminary spadework for a Round Table
Discussion on the Elements of a Free, Dynamic Society which was
sponsored by the Advertising Council, Inc., and was held under the
chairmanship of Paul G. Hoffman, at the Waldorf-Astoria Hotel in
New York on April 16, 1951.  The various participants in that
conference, especially Peter F. Drucker, who produced the principal
paper for it, seemed to me to see the evolution of present-day
America from points of view somewhat like mine.  And so did Russell
Davenport and the editors of Fortune, who in the February, 1951,
issue of that magazine and then in a book called U.S.A., The
Permanent Revolution (Prentice-Hall, 1951) played the changes on
themes parallel to those of The Big Change.  To all these people I
am indebted for ideas which fitted so well with those I was putting
on paper that I could not always be sure when I was appropriating
what they had thought of first and when I was on my own.

I am indebted, too, to a number of colleagues at Harper & Brothers
who have produced material for me, or suggested leads to follow, or
have read and criticized my manuscript in early drafts, or have
otherwise helped me: notably John Fischer, Eric Larrabee, Cass
Canfield, Ordway Tead, John A. Kouwenhoven, Russell Lynes, Rose
Daly, and Waldo W. Sellew.  Others whose help I should particularly
like to acknowledge--without involving them in responsibility for
the results--are Donald K. David, Richardson Wood, John Bartlow
Martin, William McNear Rand, Leo Wotman, Walter White, Robert L.
Heilbroner, Carroll Wilson, and Wayne Andrews.  I owe a bow to the
staff of Facts, Inc., of New York, an organization which is a
researcher's delight in checking information; to Theodore Bolton,
the helpful librarian of the Century Association; and especially to
Ralph A. Beals, Rollin Alger Sawyer, and numerous other members of
the indefatigable staff of the New York Public Library.  My thanks
go also to my sister, Hildegarde Allen, who provided me with
several useful sources on the 1900 period; my son, Oliver Ellsworth
Allen, for aid at many points; and above all my wife, Agnes Rogers
Allen, not only for general aid and comfort but for a great deal of
material, a variety of suggestions, and illuminating page-by-page

This is an inadequately partial list of those to whom I am
indebted; if I tried to make it complete it would be interminable.

In my previous books I have listed, chapter by chapter, the precise
sources of facts which I thought serious scholars and other writers
might question or for any reason want to track down.  Since The Big
Change is primarily a summary, arrangement, analysis, and
interpretation of reasonably familiar data rather than a journey of
historical exploration, and since I have indicated in the text the
sources for some specific facts which might be subject to
challenge, it seems unnecessary to do this here.  But I should like
to pay my respects to certain books and documents which I have
found particularly helpful:

William Allen White's Autobiography (Macmillan, 1946) for its
insights into politics at the turn of the century and later, and
especially into the movement which I have called "The Revolt of the
American Conscience."

The five volumes of Mark Sullivan's Our Times (Scribner) and
especially the first three of them (published in 1926, 1927, and
1930 respectively) for varied sidelights on American life in the
early years of the century.

Clyde Brion Davis's The Age of Indiscretion (Lippincott, 1950) for
its brisk account of life in a Missouri town at the beginning of
the century.

Oscar Handlin's This Was America (Harvard University Press, 1949)
for its collection of foreigners' impressions of the American

Robert Hunter's Poverty (Macmillan, 1904) for its conscientious
study of life on "The Other Side of the Tracks."

Two books edited by Robert A. Woods, The City Wilderness (Houghton
Mifflin, 1898) and Americans in Process (Houghton Mifflin, 1902),
for their detailed and thoughtful examination of Boston slum life
in those years.

A group of classics of economic and social analysis and measurement
of the intermediate period: Recent Economic Changes (McGraw-Hill,
1929) and Recent Social Trends (McGraw-Hill, 1933); Middletown and
Middletown in Transition, by Robert S. Lynd and Helen Merrell Lynd
(Harcourt Brace, 1929 and 1937 respectively); and America's
Capacity to Consume, by Maurice Leven, Harold G. Moulton, and Clark
Warburton (Brookings Institution, 1934).  And also the subsequent
volume, America's Needs and Resources, by J. Frederick Dewhurst and
associates (Twentieth Century Fund, 1947).

Gunnar Myrdal's An American Dilemma (Harper, 1944) for its
searching discussion of the position and predicament of the Negro.

Van Wyck Brooks's The Confident Years, 1885-1915 (Dutton, 1952) for
its fresh interpretation of trends in literary thought, including
those after 1915.

Twentieth Century Unlimited, edited by Bruce Bliven (Lippincott,
1950), for its collection of studies of developments in various
sectors of American life, especially the arts.

Low-Income Families and Economic Stability.  Materials on the
Problem of Low-Income Families.  Assembled by the subcommittee on
low-income families.  Joint Committee on the Economic Report.  81st
Congress, 1st session.  I have drawn heavily on this document for
my analysis of poverty at the mid-century at the beginning of
Chapter 15.

And Shares of Upper Income Groups in Income and Savings, by Simon
Kuznets.  Occasional Paper 35 of the National Bureau of Economic
Research, Inc.  I have drawn on this document for my analysis of
wealth's slice in the pie, in the same chapter.

I should also like to mention the reports of the President's
Council of Economic Advisers for recent years; the successive
British Productivity Reports, some of which are highly illuminating;
successive volumes of the World Almanac, the figures in which often
turn up interesting clues to what has been happening; and, finally,
the 1949 edition of The United States Since 1865, by Louis M. Hacker
and Benjamin B. Kendrick (Appleton-Century-Crofts, Inc.), which I
have used for constant reference on the standard data of American
history during the 1900-1950 period.


End of this Project Gutenberg of Australia eBook

This site is full of FREE ebooks - Project Gutenberg Australia